JP6903191B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-3506 JP-A-2009-240459

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300) and
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) provided outside the projection device and provided with a control means (for example, a sub-control board 3200) for controlling the effect.
The projection device
Optical elements used to project images (eg, LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and
Cooling means (eg, FAN4, FAN5) with a fan for intake or exhaust, and
Temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors 3341a, 3341b, 3341c) for detecting the temperature at a predetermined location, and
The temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is the first temperature (for example, the previous detection temperature + (x% of the current detection temperature)) or the second temperature higher than the first temperature (for example, the previous detection temperature). When the temperature exceeds + ((x + α)% of the detected temperature this time)), the control means is provided with a transmission means for transmitting the first error information which is information indicating an abnormality.
When the control means receives the first error information when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is the second temperature, the control means responds to the first error information to the projection device.
When the projection device receives a response to the first error information, the projection device has a first stop process (for example, a DLP control circuit 3313, and an LED) for stopping the operation of the optical element and the cooling means in operation in the projection device. An operation stop means for executing (transmits a drive stop command to the LED driver 3314 for driving the light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B, and a rotation stop command to FAN4 and FAN5) is further provided.
The operation stop means executes the first stop process when a predetermined time elapses without a response to the first error information from the control means after the transmission means transmits the first error information.
When the rotation speed of the fan is smaller than the predetermined rotation speed, the transmission means transmits the second error information, which is information indicating an abnormality, to the control means.
When the operation stop means receives a response to the second error information from the control means, the operation stop means has a second stop process (for example, DLP control) for stopping the operation of the optical element and the cooling means in operation in the projection device. A drive stop command is transmitted to the circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 that drives the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B, and a rotation stop command is transmitted to FAN4 and FAN5) .

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to separate the correspondence with respect to the detected temperature at a predetermined position in the projection device according to two criteria, and it is possible to take the correspondence according to the number of operations of the movable means. Further, under predetermined conditions, it is possible to control the projection device so as to stop the operation during operation. Error information is transmitted to the control means in response to various abnormalities of the projection device (for example, an abnormality in temperature or an abnormality in the number of operations), and if there is a response from the control means at that time, the projection device responds to the generated abnormality. Since each part (for example, circuit and fan) is stopped (forced shutdown is performed), malfunction due to heat accumulation of the projection device is avoided, and the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time is eliminated. Further, it is possible to safely project a high-quality image having a high image visual effect. Further, even if there is no response from the control means, the operation of the projection device is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses, so that the malfunction of the projection device is surely avoided and the image is of high quality. Safe projection is ensured.

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

It is a front perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is an upper perspective view of the projector device. It is a perspective view when the display unit is attached to a cabinet. It is a lower perspective view of the projector device. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a left exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a right side exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a rear perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is the whole perspective view of the projector device. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a figure which shows the lens unit of a projector apparatus. It is a top view which shows the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing a projector apparatus. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal along the XXVI-XXVI line of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of the upper pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the posture adjustment method of the lower pedestal. It is a figure which shows the connection form of a projector device and an adjustment PC. It is a perspective view which shows the case of the projector apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the state which arranged the heat sink and the optical element in the case of a projector apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the air flow path formed in the case of a projector apparatus. It is a front view which shows the inside of a cabinet. It is a side view of the cabinet with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism open. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower door mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the system configuration of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub-control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a reel drive board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a door relay board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the auxiliary relay board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a scaler board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a multi-output scaler LSI. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the sub liquid crystal I / F board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the divided display pattern of a projector device and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 4 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 5 of the division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 6 of the division display pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the communication specification of a game machine. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a scaler board and a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a sub liquid crystal I / F board and a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a projector control board | sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the error information transmitted as a command from each board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of the adjustment PC. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process of a main control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a sub-control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the focus change request processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device task of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device reception interrupt processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device initialization processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a scaler activation parameter request of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a scaler status command of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler reception confirmation reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal control processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal start parameter request of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal setting change processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector start parameter request of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector reception confirmation reception processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector status of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction processing of a sub-control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a scaler board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st serial line reception interrupt processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reception between sub-control-scaler of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of transmission between sub-control and scaler of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of the projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main processing of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the serial line reception interrupt processing of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control of the projector control board-projector. It is a flowchart which shows the internal setting change process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting value storage process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control of a projector control board-the processing at the time of transmission between projectors. It is a flowchart which shows the status transmission data creation process of a projector control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal control main processing of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the serial line reception interrupt processing of a sub liquid crystal I / F board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reception between the sub control-sub liquid crystal of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission processing of a sub-liquid crystal I / F substrate. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the 1st modification of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the 2nd modification of the projector apparatus. It is a front view which shows the arrangement form of the projector apparatus which concerns on 3rd modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the projector apparatus applied to 4th modification to 20th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main processing of the projector control board which concerns on 4th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of the projector control board which concerns on 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the LED temperature control table and FAN temperature control table provided in the projector control board which concerns on 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature control table provided in the projector control board which concerns on 5th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 6th modification. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature rotation speed control table provided in the projector control board which concerns on 7th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control of the projector control board which concerns on 8th modification | process at the time of transmission between projectors. It is a flowchart which shows the projector initialization processing of the projector control board which concerns on 8th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control processing of the sub-control board which concerns on 9th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector-controlled reception processing of the sub-control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction processing of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of the sub-control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control processing of the sub-control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the sub-control board which concerns on 11th modification. It is a figure which shows the display example of the image projected by the projector apparatus which concerns on 11th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the sub-control board which concerns on 12th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the sub-control board which concerns on 13th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table provided in the sub-control board which concerns on a 14th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction processing of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 14th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table provided in the sub-control board which concerns on the 15th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the demo command transmission processing of the main control board which concerns on 15th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state which concerns on the 16th modification. It is a figure which shows the focus adjustment frequency setting table provided in the sub-control board which concerns on 17th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 17th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the auxiliary control board which concerns on 18th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of activation of a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of startup of a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of a normal operation of a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of a normal operation between a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of screen switching between a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of screen switching between a projector apparatus and a sub CPU which concerns on 19th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main processing executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on 20th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt process executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on 20th modification. It is a front perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine when the display of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism is omitted. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a top view of the display unit. It is sectional drawing of the irradiation unit which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is an upper perspective view which shows the projector device and the projector cover. It is a block diagram which shows the system configuration of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub-control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is an upper perspective view of the projector device. It is a top view of the projector device. It is a rear view of the projector device. It is a bottom view which shows the state which the projector device is arranged in the irradiation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of an irradiation unit. It is an upper perspective view of the projector device. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main processing of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the DMD temperature and the output data of a temperature sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector initialization processing of a projector control board. It is a figure which shows the FAN rotation speed control table. It is a figure which shows the lens temperature control table. It is a figure which shows the pattern of the image projection by a projector device. It is an exploded perspective view which shows a part in a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the cross section of the optical case in a projector device. It is a figure which shows the cross section of the optical case in a projector apparatus enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a perspective view of the projector device. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the LED temperature diagnosis processing of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the LED temperature diagnosis processing of a projector control board. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the present LED temperature and a reference temperature. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the FAN rotation speed diagnosis processing of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector initialization processing of a projector control board. It is the figure which showed the grace rotation speed until the warning before and after aged deterioration. It is a side view of the gaming machine provided with a plurality of projector devices. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which realizes a screen inversion function. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which realizes a screen inversion function. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which realizes another screen inversion function. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of a sub-control board. It is sectional drawing of the irradiation unit which can rotate a mirror mechanism. It is sectional drawing of the irradiation unit which can rotate a mirror mechanism. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which realizes still another screen inversion function. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which realizes still another screen inversion function. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the warning screen which is displayed by the instruction of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the condition related to the display of a warning screen. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. It is a graph which shows the transition of the DMD temperature. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. It is a flowchart which shows the projector temperature warning screen determination processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the status transmission data creation process of a projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector status of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector status of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of a normal operation between a sub CPU of a sub control board and a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the command used in the communication sequence at the time of a normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the luminance adjustment process of a sub-control board. It is a graph which shows the example of the brightness adjustment of an LED light source. It is a figure which shows the condition related to the display of a warning screen. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the warning screen which is displayed according to the transition of the DMD temperature. It is a flowchart which shows the projector temperature warning screen determination processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the error history determination process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. It is a flowchart which shows the luminance adjustment process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector temperature warning screen determination processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector temperature warning screen determination processing of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the warning screen which is displayed by the instruction of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the condition related to the display of a warning screen. It is a flowchart which shows the intake fan warning screen determination processing of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the game system including the display device for a game. It is sectional drawing of the display device for a game. It is an exploded perspective view of the display device for a game.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachislot machine. The gaming machine 1 can be played using coins, medals, gaming balls, tokens, and other gaming media such as cards that are given or given to the player and that store game value information. , In the following, it will be described assuming that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 is a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the gaming machine, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper part of the front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower part arranged in the lower part of the front surface of the cabinet G. It has a door mechanism DD.

Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. Then, a wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. For the reels RL, RC, and RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, and RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, and RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c on a substantially horizontal plane are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A sub display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The sub-display device DD20 displays, for example, the number of medals paid out and the number of remaining medals credited when a prize is established. Since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is usually 50, the sub-display device DD20 displays the number of credits of 50 or less. When 50 medals, which is the maximum number of medals, are credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet DD14.

On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided to rotate and drive the reels RL, RC, and RR by the operation of the player and to start the variable display of the symbol in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the sub display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 switches the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by operating a push button. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancellation shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit DD15.

A lumbar panel DD18 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R. The lumbar panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the lumbar panel DD18, a name representing the model of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by sounds such as voice and music. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is arranged on the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 is a so-called touch panel DD19T in which a touch sensor panel DD10T as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitance type that detects contact with a part of the human body (fingertip or the like) or an electrostatic pen and outputs the detection signal. It may be of a method of detecting contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputting the detection signal, or of another method or structure (in-cell structure or the like). In the present embodiment, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T can be used to perform optical adjustment of the projector device B2 described later.

The sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and on the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games played as the game progresses is displayed, and the player can use the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. A message or input key for requesting selection or input is displayed.

In the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) according to the effect related to the game on the display screen. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing accessory, a jog dial, a push button, or the like may be attached as a dedicated attachment. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be omitted by allocating its function to the display unit A or the like described later. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be arranged on the left side of the main display window DD4. As such another sub-liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided on the back side thereof, and a display surface is provided with a transparent and decorated panel capable of producing an effect. May be formed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for displaying an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and for example, its position (projection distance or angle) with respect to an accessory which is a screen described later. Etc.) and by projecting an image according to the effect information generated based on the shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful effect.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming the upper portion of the irradiation unit B and a screen housing C10 (see FIGS. 12, 13, etc.) of the screen device C. Although details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B is a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 and obliquely downward and rearward for the irradiation light from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses a projector device B2 and a mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being exteriorized by the case B22, and is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a horizontally arranged flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. As a result, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 21) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 transmits the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (see FIG. 33) of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD241 (Digital Micromirror Device: see FIG. 33) forward through a lens or the like. It is arranged so as to emit light toward the mirror mechanism B3. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). The mirror mechanism B3 holds the optical mirror B32 by the mirror holder B31. The mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding portion B11 so that the distance thereof can be adjusted. Thereby, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 7, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 inclined upward from the rear to the front in the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, the reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the upper wall portion B12. It has side wall portions B13 and B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in an angle-adjustable space portion formed by the protrusion. There is.

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have protruding portions B131 protruding from the lower end portion in the left-right horizontal direction. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is positioned so as to correspond to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the first protruding portions B131a protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the opening of the cabinet G in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second protrusion B131b is positioned so as to correspond to the space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the second protruding portions B131b protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the space portion of the cabinet G. That is, the side wall portions B13 and B13 are formed so that the distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the second protrusions B131b is wider than the distance along the left-right direction of the tips of the first protrusion B131a. .. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protruding portion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 5), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 via the screw holes B131C. Further, by projecting the projecting portion B131 in the horizontal direction from the lower ends of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the projecting portions B131 and the side wall portions B13 are formed on both side ends of the projector cover B1 and the recesses B132 are provided from the front ends thereof. Are continuously formed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. Further, in the shape of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1, the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the tip end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from the lower end portion is the second protruding portion. The front portion of the B131b is configured to be larger than the rear portion (see FIG. 8). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes a larger space than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, at least a part of the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the space in front of the space BS overlap in top view. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the gaming machine 1 on the island equipment.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 10, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side or from the upper side to the lower side of the projector device B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed so as to bend diagonally downward and backward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed so as to bend in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the front portion of the projector cover B1 is covered from the lower side by the upper portion B15a, and the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower portion to the rear portion. There is. Further, the inclined portion B15b is arranged so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 in the top view. Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) of the inclined portion B15b is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. Below the perforated plate B15, the front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged.

The front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side, which is a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a front exposure arranged on a lower side, which is an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is rotatable from the position, and is in an inclined posture close to substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of air portions reach the perforated plate B15. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling effect.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, the position of the player's line of sight located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation unit B from this line-of-sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation unit B from being visually observed.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 12, the irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the protruding portion B131 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the display unit A can unite the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, as a plurality of screen mechanisms, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided. The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 each have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, respectively, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. Driven by (see FIG. 20). Of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier. Therefore, when driving the front screen mechanism E1, a larger driving force is required than when driving the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
As described above, the screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 13, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. It has a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation unit B is located are opened. The box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are each separately molded into a predetermined shape, so that a predetermined functional component such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since the plate members can be partially replaced, the specifications can be easily changed for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. .. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right movable body base C12 is placed so that the right movable body base C5 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left movable body base C13 is mounted so that the left movable body base C6 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. A pattern is three-dimensionally formed on the inner side surfaces of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 in the left-right direction due to unevenness. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

Further, the front portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion thereof is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front portion C14. When the display unit A is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) of the cabinet G, the front portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 to move rearward into the cabinet G. It makes it possible to perform positioning. Then, the display unit A can be screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front portion C14, so that the display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G. It has become.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operating openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operating openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape in which the longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position after incorporating the display unit A into the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screws. Then, the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet G by reaching into the cabinet G and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands. After that, the front screen in the locked state is reached by reaching into the screen device C from one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit A and rotating the crank gear E21 that can be seen horizontally from the operating opening C21. The mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door mechanism UD open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and reach the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21 from the door. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A from the cabinet G.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 (see FIG. 20) is positioned and arranged by the motor accommodating portion C22. Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 each have a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 in the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen drive mechanism E2. A second support portion C24 that rotatably supports the shaft member E3 that serves as the gear shaft of the above is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable body base C5 and the right plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged between the left movable body base C6 and the left plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 15, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a recess CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK includes various functional components in the display unit A (for example, projector device B2, front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2, etc.) and various functional components other than the display unit A (sub-control board SS, etc., which will be described later). ) Is a relay board for relaying the wiring (not shown). The relay board CK includes a screen drive control board CS (see FIGS. 37 and 42) for exchanging signals and the like with the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

Further, the back plate C4 is arranged in front of the rear end of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. As a result, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the space GS is generated by the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2, left side plate C3 and back plate C4 of the screen device C. It will be defined. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. As a result, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G due to this space GS.

Further, a through hole G11 is formed at a position of the intermediate support plate G1 facing the space GS (see FIG. 5). The through hole G11 is formed so that its opening surrounds the relay board CK in a top view. The relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which the wiring from the device (sub-control board SS or the like described later) accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. .. As a result, the electrical connection between the relay board CK of the display unit A and the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is a connector by inserting the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space into the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

By arranging the relay board CK outside the screen device C in this way, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Further, the heat generated from the relay board CK can be easily discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation holes G3a (see FIG. 2) formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

Further, the wiring for connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear portion of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind the various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom in wiring can be increased.

Since the relay board CK is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It is possible that Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes through the through hole G11 and is below the intermediate support plate G1. It may be configured to protrude into. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the screen drive mechanism F2, E2, and the relay board CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2, C3, and the back plate C4, respectively. It is positioned and arranged on different plates. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be shared among the models of the gaming machine 1, it can be shared among the models on a board-by-board basis. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than in the case of manufacturing the display unit for each model.

Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by fastening the screws, the connections between the plates C1 to C4 can be released by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be exchanged. As a result, the functional parts of the display unit can be replaced on a board-by-board basis, so that the specifications of the display unit A can be changed while reusing the functional parts that are not subject to replacement of the display unit A. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 20, the right movable body base C5 is arranged on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is arranged on the right inner side of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to see these drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with recesses for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector device B2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the fixing screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D includes a front reflection portion D1, a right surface reflection portion D2, a left surface reflection portion D3, and a bottom reflection portion D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting units D1 to D4 are projection surfaces on which the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged so as to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation unit B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. Is set to. The right-side reflection portion D2 and the left-side reflection portion D3 are joined to the right-side portion and the left-side portion of the front-side reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front-side reflection portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 make it easier for the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface to be toward the front reflection portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is frontal while displaying an image by the irradiation light. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, also for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface tends to be directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected on the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents blurring due to mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) and the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, it can be defined in any way as long as white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to the screen type (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D does not contain the black pigment, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, if the brightness is low, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen on the surrounding wall. The lower the value, the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 19, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 is formed flat.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrated by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to the sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIG. 17, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position (in the standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 is configured to be inclined upward from the rear end portion to the front end portion. ing. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2.

As described above, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is placed in the front standby position is set to an inclined posture in which the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end portion to the front end portion, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is parallel to the horizontal plane. Compared with the posture, it is possible to prevent the irradiation light emitted by the irradiation unit B from being obstructed by the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when arranged in the front standby position can be brought closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged even in the limited space of the display unit A. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when arranged in the front standby position is set with respect to the projector device B2. Can be brought closer. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased in size.

As shown in FIG. 14, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a position in which the upper end portion (one end portion) thereof is at the upper end when the upper end portion (one end portion) is arranged in the front exposed position on the back surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 (in the exposed posture). Is connected to.

The crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 13) at an intermediate position. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable around the intermediate position. This intermediate position coincides with the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1.

As described above, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposed position. Further, the crank member E22 is connected to a position where the upper end portion (one end portion) thereof becomes an upper portion when the crank member E22 is arranged at the front exposed position (in the exposed posture) on the back surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. .. With the above configuration, the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposed position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged.

A slide groove (not shown) is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove is formed so as to have a U-shape when viewed from the side. A slide member E26 (see FIG. 14) is movably engaged with the slide groove. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the slide groove. The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 13, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right plate C2. In the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position is the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting with.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-bar link having 0 degrees of freedom with the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as the fixed end and the slide member E26 as the free end. Therefore, the front screen mechanism E1 The front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake even when the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position of the slide member E26 connects the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the slide groove of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture and the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position is movable along the slide groove, so that the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft of the crank gear E21 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed with E21a as a fixed end and the slide member E26 as a free end that can move along the slide groove. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the slide member E26 slides along the slide groove, so that the crank member E22 rotates with the intermediate position as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor E25 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub-control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub-relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor E25 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and may be driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 gradually accelerates from 0 in the stopped state in the standby posture or the exposed posture, reaches the maximum speed in the intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture, and then gradually decelerates. When the exposed posture or the standby posture is reached, the stopped state becomes 0 again. As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

The right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 (see FIG. 13).

In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. As the motor shaft gear E24 rotates, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 and the shaft member E3 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B rotate integrally. Then, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, so that the front screen mechanism E1 rotates around the rotation center axis, and the front standby position and the front It will move between the exposed position.

As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is transferred to the two crank members E22. It becomes possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22 as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided on the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotation shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the shaft member E3 is increased, and the shaft member E3 can be arranged so as not to interfere with the arrangement of other accessories such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the other accessory can be increased while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 to a desired degree.

Further, since the shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not obstructed by the shaft member E3. Further, since the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, it is compared with the case where it is arranged behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis (the length of the crank member E22) can be shortened. Therefore, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained to a desired degree.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is made of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has a side view arc-shaped shape that is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction. The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that becomes convex toward the upstream side in the irradiation direction of the light from the projector device B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position.

The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposed position, the projection surface F1a can appear an image by irradiating the irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIG. 20, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 (not shown on the right side), an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 is connected to the back surface of the right end portion and the back surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Further, a support shaft F21a (not shown on the left side) is formed on the outer surface of the other end of the two arm members F21 so as to project outward in the left-right direction. These support shafts F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. As a result, the two arm members F21 can rotate around the support shaft F21a. The support shaft F21a coincides with the rotation center shaft of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. In the present embodiment, the drive motor F24 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub-control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub-relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor F24 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and may be driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

In the above configuration, when the drive motor F24 is driven under the control of the sub-control board SS, the motor shaft gear F23 rotates. As the motor shaft gear F23 rotates, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, so that the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the reel standby position and the reel exposed position are set. Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 each partially overlap each other (see FIGS. 17 and 18). Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms E2 and F2, respectively. That is, the drives of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are not interlocked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to grasp the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 respectively. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board SS (see FIG. 34) grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position with the front standby position as the origin position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position.

However, if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not operating normally, or if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is cut off, the sub-control board SS Cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism (not shown) for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the sub-control board SS executes a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism.

For example, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operating range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front exposed position, for example, The reel screen mechanism F1 is not arranged at the reel exposed position. Therefore, when the sensor mechanism detects that the front screen exists at the front exposed position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 does not exist at the reel exposed position.

(Screen surface processing)
Next, the surface processing of the screen will be described. Screens to be projected such as the front reflection part D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D, the right side reflection part D2, the left side reflection part D3, the bottom reflection part D4, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11, and the projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1. Is textured to achieve moderate performance. Wrinkle processing is a process in which wrinkles (wrinkle patterns) are formed on the surface. The screen or the like to be projected is molded using a die that has been textured, whereby a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface of the screen or the like to be projected. With such a wrinkle pattern on the surface, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source, and further, it is possible to realize a good reflection of the projected image.

The grain processing includes a pattern called "pear-skin". In the present embodiment, for example, a pear-skin pattern having an average depth of about 25 μm to 30 μm and a draft of 3% or more (pear-skin No. 5). Is preferable.

Further, as surface processing of a screen or the like, two-layer coating is applied in order to realize appropriate performance. Two-layer coating means that paints having different characteristics are applied one above the other (in two layers). For example, a high-brightness paint having high reflectivity (for example, 2P-600 silver, which is a metallic paint "ultra-bright silver") is used for the undercoat, and a matte paint (for example, "matte") is used for the topcoat. HG-650 white) which is "white" can be used. Further, about 5% of a matting agent (silica) can be added to HG-650 white.

In such coating, the film thickness of the top coat is, for example, 22 to 23 μm, and the film thickness of the undercoat is, for example, about 1 μm. With such coating, the glossiness at a gloss of 60 ° becomes 4 to 5.

In addition, 2P-600 silver uses vapor-deposited aluminum as the aluminum pigment, and the weight concentration (PWC) of the aluminum pigment in the coating film is set to 20 to 30%, which is higher than that of general silver paint, and has a higher gloss. Indicates the value (reflection performance). The composition of HG-650 white is 20 to 30% for resin, 30 to 40% for titanium oxide, 5 to 10% for silica as a matting agent, 0.5 to 2% for additives, and solvent. It is 30-40%.

In addition, as a topcoat paint, a paint in which glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle sizes as a matting agent are added in a predetermined ratio to HG-650 white, and a paint in which silica is added in addition to the beads are used. It can also be used. Further, it is also possible to use a paint obtained by adding beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent to HG-650F clear or HG-650F clear in a predetermined ratio. The film thickness can also be adjusted in various ways, for example, up to 16 to 23 μm. The composition of HG-650F clear is 20 to 30% for resin, 2 to 5% for silica as a matting agent, 0.5 to 2% for additives, and 60 to 70% for solvent.

Further, as another undercoat paint, HG-650 white or a paint obtained by adding glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle sizes as a matting agent to HG-650 white in a predetermined ratio can also be used. Further, the film thickness can be adjusted in various ways, for example, from 1 to 21 μm.

As described above, by forming the screen to be projected by embossing or applying two-layer coating, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source, and the projection image can be further improved. It can be realized. In addition, the above-mentioned two-layer coating can be applied to a screen or an accessory that has been textured. The material of the screen or the like to be projected is, for example, black or white ABS resin or transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited thereto.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 21, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. A sub-control board SS, which will be described later, is connected to the projector device B2 via a relay board CK. Although not shown in FIG. 21, the relay board CK and the sub-control board SS are connected via a scaler board SK (see FIGS. 37 and 43) described later. The sub-control board SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 as a visual effect. Display the image. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A or the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 30 and 37) of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC 1000 is used for adjusting the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and performing the initial focus setting (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, but the adjustment device of the projector device B2 is a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which an adjustment program (application software) is installed. Alternatively, it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 and a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. As shown in FIG. 33, the optical mechanism B24 has LED light sources 240R, 240G, which emit each color light of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) as components arranged around the lens unit B21. The 240B, the DMD241, the focus mechanism 242 for adjusting the focus of the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21, and the like are provided.

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub-control board SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on the command of the sub-control board SS to adjust the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores data related to the setting / adjustment of the projector device B2 by the control LSI 230. Although not particularly shown, the control LSI 230 has a built-in ROM in which a control program or the like is stored and a DRAM used in a work area related to setting / adjustment of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly composed of a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and DMD241 of the optical mechanism B24.

The DMD 241 is an integrated mirror equivalent to pixels corresponding to the display resolution on the main surface of the semiconductor chip. The DMD 241 is configured such that each mirror is tilted by + 10 ° or −10 ° along a diagonal axis with respect to the main surface due to the electrostatic field action of the memory element directly under each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD 241 is switched between an ON state (a state of reflecting light in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state of reflecting light outside the predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 241 is in the ON state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B through the dichroic mirror or the like (not shown) is guided to the lens unit B21 again through the dichroic mirror or the like, while being turned off. In this state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B through the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected in a direction other than the lens unit B21.

The DLP control circuit 232 controls the LED driver 233 that drives the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, and DMD241 in a time-divided manner via a dichroic mirror or the like that does not show the light of each color of RGB from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B. To be incident on. At this time, the DLP control circuit 232 turns the mirror corresponding to which pixel into the ON state or the OFF state at which timing according to the projected image, that is, which color of the RGB light has which timing. Determines whether to reflect in a predetermined direction, and controls the ON / OFF state of each mirror of the DMD 241.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in the predetermined direction by the DMD 241 travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, and is incident on the mirror mechanism B3, and finally by the mirror mechanism B3. It is guided to the projection target by reflection. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the accessory to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. As a result, the display unit A provided with the projector device B2 is constructed to be cheaper and smaller, and can be easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate portion on the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end portion so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. The procedure for adjusting the mounting of the projector device B2 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 23, 24, and 33, the projector device B2 includes LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, and DMD241 on which a lens unit B21 and LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are mounted as internal components. It has a DMD board 241a, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, an intake fan 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), and a projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is housed while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered with the lens unit cover B222, and the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, the DMD substrate 241a, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fan 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 33 and the like, the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD substrate 241a are equipped with a temperature sensor B25 (see FIGS. 21 and 37) made of, for example, a thermistor. These temperature sensors B25 detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the vicinity of the lens unit B21, and output the temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23.

The lens unit B21 includes an optical case B21a for accommodating a dichroic mirror, a reflecting plate, etc. (not shown), a lens group 210A including a projection lens 210, a lens holder B21b provided at the front portion of the optical case B21a while holding the lens group 210A, and a lens holder B21b. It has a focus mechanism 242 provided on the front right side of the optical case B21a so that a part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction (front-back direction). The optical case B21a is provided with an opening for allowing the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and DMD241 to face from the outside to the inside. The rear portion of the lens holder B21b is fixed to the front portion of the optical case B21a, while the front portion of the lens holder B21b is relatively moved in the front-rear direction (optical axis direction) by the focus mechanism 242 with respect to the rear portion. The projection lens 210 is held in the. The lens unit B21 is provided with a so-called lens shift mechanism (not shown), and the horizontal and vertical positions (horizontal image position, vertical direction) of the image projected by using this lens shift mechanism. It is possible to fine-tune the image position).

The focus mechanism 242 is for focusing on the reflecting surfaces of the reflecting units D1 to D4 and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a displaced with respect to the projector device B2 while changing the focal length of the projection lens 210. The focus mechanism 242 is arranged along the optical axis direction of the rack member 242A that can move integrally with the front side portion of the lens holder B21b that holds the projection lens 210, and is screwed with the rack member 242A. It has a lead screw 242B that can rotate while doing so, and a focus motor 242C that rotates the lead screw 242B. The focus motor 242C is connected to the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

For example, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in a predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the front side by the feed screw operation, and as a result, the projection lens 210 also moves to the front side together with the rack member 242A. As the focal length becomes relatively long, the focus (focus position) can be adjusted to a distant place. On the other hand, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the rear side by the feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 is also integrated with the rack member 242A to the front side. As a result of moving to, the focal length becomes relatively short, so that the focus (focus position) is adjusted to the closer side.

According to such a focus mechanism 242, the focal length can be dynamically changed in conjunction with the movement of the projection planes E11a and F1a. Further, for example, when the projection target is changed from the projection surface E11a to the projection surface F1a, or vice versa, the optical path lengths from the projection lens 210 to each projection target are different to some extent, so that each optical path is changed. The focus (focus position) can be statically changed so that the focal length is appropriate according to the length.

The front portion of the lens holder B21b and the projection lens 210 are covered with the lens unit cover B222. The lens unit cover B222 is provided with a translucent surface B222a that transmits the irradiation light from the projection lens 210, and the light emitted from the projection lens 210 passes through the translucent surface B222a and proceeds to the mirror mechanism B3. ..

The LED substrate 240Ra is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear right side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240R faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ga is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear rear side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240G faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ba is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear left side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240B faces the inside of the optical case B21a. The DMD substrate 241a is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the left side surface of the optical case B21a, and the DMD241 faces the inside of the optical case B21a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, and DMD241, the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD241 are relatively high. It shows a low tendency.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the focus mechanism 242 is arranged on the right side of the lens holder B21b, and the projection lens 210 is arranged on the front portion of the lens holder B21b. The front portion of the lens holder B21b is movable in the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 by the focus mechanism 242. Although the details of the focus mechanism 242 are omitted, the focus mechanism 242 includes a stepping motor, a lead screw, a carriage, and the like, and is configured to be movable in the optical axis direction at the front portion of the lens holder B21b.

That is, the projection lens 210 is integrated with the front portion of the lens holder B21b and is movable by the focus mechanism 242, and as shown in FIG. 24A, from the rear side to the front side along the optical axis direction. Or, it moves from the front side to the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the light from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B reaches the DMD 241 through a collimator, a dichroic mirror, etc. (not shown), is reflected by the DMD 241 and then reflected by the dichroic mirror or the like, and then the lens group 210A. Is finally emitted through the projection lens 210.

As described above, the projection lens 210 is configured to move in the optical axis direction. As a result, the focus is adjusted, and a clear image in focus is projected on the screen or the accessory whose position has been changed by movement.

In such a projector device B2, video data related to an image such as an effect is transmitted from the sub-control board SS, and the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 so as to project the image on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control board SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the effect.

Here, the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and is applied to the projection surfaces E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. , Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sink 243R is arranged on the right side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ra. The heat sink 243G is arranged on the rear side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ga. The heat sink 243B is located in the center of the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ba. The heat sink 243D is arranged on the left side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the DMD substrate 241a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the fin outer size of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, the heat sink 243R and the heat sink 243G are relatively large, while the heat sink 243B and the heat sink 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and DMD substrate 241a into the air, so that the temperature of the optical element or the substrate is changed until the optical characteristics are significantly changed. Efficiently dissipates heat so as not to raise the temperature. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiating members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat radiating effect, and have a plurality of heat radiating fins in order to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the rear portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, an intake port B22A is provided on the right front side of the case B22 in which the intake fan 244A is close, and the heat sink 243R is close to the intake port B22A. An exhaust port B22E is provided at the rear right side of the case B22. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and in the other part of the left side of the case B22 along with the intake port B22B, the inside of the case B22 is provided. The intake port B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space S of the above. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 to which the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after being forcibly taken in by the intake fan 244A from the intake port B22A, it is exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. An air flow path P1 is formed as an air flow. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, the heat is taken from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G, and then forced by the exhaust fan 45 from the exhaust port B22D. The air flow path P2 is formed as a flow of air exhausted to. Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, the air flow path is a flow of air that is forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 45 while mainly taking heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. P3 is formed.

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231 and a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and DMD board 241a arranged in the case B22, and further to the focus mechanism 242.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Position / orientation adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) of the projector cover B1, and is a rectangular main body portion 2200 and main body portion 2200. It is formed by bending both the left and right sides downward and outward, and has a step with the main body 2200 and extends to both the left and right sides. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and the main body 2200 are partially rearward to rearward. It has a rear end 2202 extending to. The main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screwing. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 28) that is inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that roughly corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is integrally formed with three connecting screw portions 2210 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A while fitting the coil spring 2211 to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. By fastening the nut 2213 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 via the washer 2212, the nut 2213 is suspended from the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other in an adjustable distance at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is composed of a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the position and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 28 shows the mounting form of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower view of FIG. 28 (a) is a view showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper view of FIG. 28 (a) is a view of FIG. 28 (a). It is sectional drawing which follows the BB'line shown in the figure below. Note that FIG. 28 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

Here, the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 28A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 28A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion of the reference numeral A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

FIG. 28B shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of the arrow E with respect to FIG. 28A. The upper view of FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD'shown in the lower figure of FIG. 28 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 28B, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted as the reference direction so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction.

FIG. 29 shows the connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connecting portion R2. Note that FIG. 29 shows one connecting portion R2, but the same applies to the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. To. A coil spring 2211 is fitted onto the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is urged in a direction away from each other (vertical direction), so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Loosening is prevented at the joint.

In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 29). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

In the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position of the lower pedestal B221 in the vicinity of the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the lines connecting the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangle so that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged like this. That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nuts 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction. The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in either the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Such posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode.

As shown in FIG. 30, adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector device B2 via the sub-control board SS and the like. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 adjusts the optical axis direction and checks the displayed image on the screen or the like at the time of inspection at a factory or the like. , Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the image are carried out. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the projector control board B23 of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 37). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, the optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light, the focus adjustment, and the like in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are the adjustment value data of the horizontal and vertical directions and the focus position (horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E adjustment values, vertical position (vertical direction). Image positions) A to E adjustment values, focus positions A to E adjustment values) are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 (see FIG. 106). The horizontal and vertical direction and focus position adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 are not supplied to the projector device B2 due to transportation after shipment from the factory, and the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall. However, it can be used as it is. Such horizontal position adjustment and vertical adjustment data are acquired to control the lens shift mechanism of the lens unit B21, and focus position adjustment value data is acquired to control the focus mechanism 242. .. The horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, the focus position A to E adjustment value, the horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E offset described later, and the vertical position ( Vertical image position) A to E offset, focus position A to E offset, focus drift correction values A to E, for example, "A" is the projection plane of the fixed screen mechanism D, and "B" is The projection surfaces E11a and "C" of the front screen member E11 correspond to the adjustment value data corresponding to the projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1, and "D" and "E" correspond to future expandability (projection surface is It is a reserve in consideration of (when it increases).

As is clear from the above with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the projector device B2 is mainly positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction according to the mounting position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12, and is located below. The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture of the side pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space.

In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three connecting portions for connecting to each other, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied, four locations are provided. The connecting portion may be provided above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates and is fixed to the lower pedestal.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Intake / exhaust structure of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the case B22 of the projector device B2 is provided with three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C and two exhaust ports B22D, B22E. Of the three intake ports B22A, B22B, and B22C, two intake ports B22A and B22B are provided with intake fans 244A and 244B, while one intake port B22C is not provided with an intake fan. Further, of the two exhaust ports B22D and B22E, one exhaust port B22D is provided with an exhaust fan 245, while the other exhaust port B22E is not provided with an exhaust fan.

At the intake port B22A, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244A, and the air flow passes through the heat sink 243R as the air flow path P1 to take heat from the heat sink 243R. After that, the air flow path P1 linearly flows from the heat sink 243R to the exhaust port B22E, and is naturally discharged (exhaust heat) from the exhaust port B22E to the outside of the case B22.

Also at the intake port B22B, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244B. This air flow takes heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G by passing through the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G while passing through a part of the empty space S as the air flow path P2. After that, the air flow path P2 is drawn into the exhaust fan 245 and flows so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged (exhausted heat) from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22.

At the intake port B22C, air is semi-forcedly taken into the case B22 mainly by the pulling force of the exhaust fan 245. This air flow takes heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243B and 243G by passing through a considerable part of the empty space S as an air flow path P3 and mainly passing through the heat sinks 243B and 243G. After that, the air flow path P3 is also drawn into the exhaust fan 245 and flows so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22 while merging with the air flow path P2. (Exhaust heat). The intake fans 244A and 244B and the exhaust fan 245 function as a cooling device for the projector device B2.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED light sources 240G and 240B exhibit relatively high heat generation characteristics, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD241 exhibit relatively low heat generation characteristics. The LED substrates 240Ga and 240Ba on which the LED light sources 240G and 240B having high heat generation characteristics are mounted are in thermal contact with the heat sinks 243G and 243B through which the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 pass.

Here, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 flow in from the separate intake ports B22B and B22C, but merge at one exhaust port B22D, and flow out from the exhaust port B22D with the exhaust port B22D as a common ventilation port. It has become. As a result, the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are forcibly discharged while merging, resulting in a smooth flow, and heat can be efficiently taken from and cooled by the plurality of heat sinks 243G and 243B. ..

Further, since the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 are efficiently and forcibly discharged by the exhaust fan 245, heat accumulation by a plurality of optical elements such as LED light sources 240G and 240B and DMD241 in the projector device B2 is effective. It is possible to prevent overheating of optical parts such as lenses.

Further, since the two air flow paths P2 and P3 leading to one exhaust port B22D cool the three heat sinks 243D, 243B and 243G, which are more than the two air flow paths P2 and P3, they are provided corresponding to these heat sinks 243D, 243B and 243G. A plurality of optical elements such as the DMD 241 and the LED light sources 240B and 240G can be cooled more efficiently.

In the present embodiment, the two air flow paths P2 and P3 are merged at one exhaust port 245. For example, three or more air flow paths P1 are also merged at the exhaust port 245. The air flow paths of the above may be collectively exhausted from one exhaust port.

(Cabinet G)
As shown in FIG. 34, a display unit A is provided in the upper space of the cabinet G. Further, a power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G, and a sub-control board SS is provided on the back side of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP (the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G). Is provided. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is arranged on the front side of the sub-control board SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub-control board SS. Further, a sub-relay board SN is provided between the sub-control board SS and the intermediate support board G1. Above the hopper mechanism HP, a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) for supplying metal medals from the outside is provided, and medals are dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. Further, above the medal supply mechanism MH, a scaler board SK for connecting the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the touch panel DD19T to the sub control board SS is provided.

In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub-control board SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub-control board SS. Further, the thin plate-shaped sub-relay board SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin plate-shaped sub-control board SS detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are viewed from the side. It is arranged in a state where the L-shape is turned upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub-control board SS side, the sheet metal BK It is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub-control board SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can also be prevented by the sheet metal BK. Further, since the sub-control board SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control board SS is removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. Can't. This enhances the security of the sub-control board SS.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 35, the lower door locking mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, and the like. It has a cylinder lock G513.

The locked portion G511 has two rod-shaped locked rods G511a and G511b formed at both ends of the concave frame G511c at the upper portion and the lower portion.

The locking portion G512 has a long cylinder G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 slidably arranged in the cylinder G5122 in the vertical direction.

The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b slide in the cylinder G5122 in the vertical direction as the locking plate G5121 slides, so that the locked rods inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122. It locks or is released from G511a and G511b. Further, the locking plate G5121 has a spring that is urged upward.

The claws G5121a and G5121b are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position to lock the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked to the lower door mechanism DD. The lock on the locked rods G511a and G511b is set to be released when the door is lowered from the height position at which the door is locked to the height position at which the lock is released. Further, the tip surfaces of the claw portions G5121a and G5121b are inclined obliquely downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle portion. The pull-down portion makes it possible to pull down the locking plate G5121 as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, the locking rods G511a and G511b can be unlocked from the locked rods G511a and G511b by descending according to the pulling down of the locking plate G5121. The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a door relay board DS for connecting electronic components on the door side and the cabinet G side.

(Upper door mechanism DU: Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 35, the upper door lock mechanism G52 has a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have.

The locked portion G521 has two rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b formed at both ends of the concave frame G521c at the upper portion and the lower portion.

The locking portion G522 has a long cylinder G5222 and a long locking plate G5221 slidably arranged in the cylinder G5222 in the vertical direction.

The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b that are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b slide in the cylinder G5222 in the vertical direction as the locking plate G5221 slides, so that the locked rods inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. It locks or is released from G521a and G521b.

The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked with respect to the locked rods G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked with the upper door mechanism DU. The lock on the locked rods G521a and G521b is set to be released when the vehicle is lowered from the height position at which the door is locked to the height position at which the lock is released. Further, the tip surfaces of the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are inclined obliquely downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

An opening (not shown) is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and a protrusion (not shown) provided on the locking plate G5221 passes through the opening. It protrudes toward the inside of the cabinet G. By pulling down the protrusion, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and the locking between the claw portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can be released accordingly.

Here, the protrusion is slid upward and is arranged so as to abut on the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD when the locking plate G5221 is in a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper part of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can be prevented from being unlocked, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so as not to be opened.

On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference with the protrusion on the upper part of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion G5221a , G5221b with respect to the locked rods G521a and G521b is released, and the lock of the upper door mechanism DU with respect to the cabinet G can be released.

As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to first unlock the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to perform an unlocking operation on the lower door locking mechanism G51, open the lower door mechanism DD, and then perform an unlocking operation on the upper door locking mechanism G52. The security for the upper space of the cabinet G can be enhanced. Further, the upper space of the cabinet G can be more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

Further, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, the key has an advantage that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

Further, due to the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are caught by the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the hooking is released. As a result, the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU, which is interlocked with the sliding of the locking plate G5221, can be locked.

Further, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the shaft-supported end and is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened / closed, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and the security can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a one-way hinge in which a predetermined torque is applied in the closing direction of the lower door mechanism DD is adopted between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G. As a result, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 that is physically interfered with by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 36, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 includes a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

The lower door DD1 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing). As shown in FIG. 36, the reel unit RU is detachably provided on the back side (internal side (lower space side) of the cabinet G) of the lower door DD1. In addition to the reels RL, RC, and RR, the reel unit RU is provided with a reel drive board RD that controls a reel motor. The main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, and RR of the reel unit RU based on the command signals output by the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc. (see FIG. 3). By stopping, the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, and RR are stopped and displayed.

By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS according to the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the gaming machine 1 You can easily perform the work of assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling.

Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, its removal is required. Can be difficult.

Further, the main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Therefore, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized intrusion is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control board MS is reached. Is difficult, and security can be improved.

Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed and the reel design of the reel unit RU is changed. And changes in the game content can be done collectively.

(System configuration of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 37, as the main boards included in the system, the game machine 1 includes a main control board MS, a sub control board SS, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, and a scaler board SK. It includes a projector control board B23, a sub liquid crystal I / F board SL, and a screen drive control board CS. Power is supplied to the main control board MS, the sub control board SS, and the like when the power switch DE2 is turned on from the power supply board DE1 of the power supply device DE. In addition to the above-mentioned ones included in the system, the game machine 1 has a 7-segment display 30 for digital display, an external centralized terminal board 31 for connecting an external display, a graphic board 40, and other known components. Sub RAM board 41, sub ROM board 42, selector 50 for medal identification, door open / close monitoring switch 51, BET switch 52, settlement switch 53, start switch 54, stop switch board 55, setting key type switch 56, LED board 60 , LED group 61 for production and decoration, speaker group 62 for production, 24h door monitoring unit 63, and door monitoring switch 64. Description of these known components will be omitted.

A general harness and an optical fiber cable are used to connect the boards and the like. For example, the main control board MS is connected to each of the reel drive board RD and the 7-segment display 30 via a harness H so as to output a control signal in one direction. The reel drive board RD is connected to the door relay board DS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 so as to optically transmit various signals to the door relay board DS in one direction. The door relay board DS is connected to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2 so as to optically transmit various signals in one direction to the main control board MS. As a result, the main control board MS, the reel drive board RD, and the door relay board DS are loop-connected through the harness H and the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2 so as to simply transmit commands and the like in one direction. The sub-relay board SN is connected to the security IC 306 described later in the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown), and the external centralized terminal board 31 is connected to the security IC 307 described later in the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown). ) Is connected. The security ICs 306 and 307 of the main control board MS conceal the communication data by, for example, encrypting the plaintext transmission command by the AES method.

The main control board MS is a board for controlling the main game operation of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 38, the main control board MS includes a main CPU 300, a main RAM 301, a main ROM 302, a clock pulse generation circuit 303, a frequency divider 304, an I / O communication LSI 305 as a master, and security ICs 306 and 307. For example, the main CPU 300 transmits a command for controlling the reel rotation operation and the medal payout operation to the reel drive board RD through the I / O communication LSI 305. Further, the main CPU 300 optically receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) connected to the door relay board DS through the I / O communication LSI 305, and performs predetermined processing based on these signals. .. Specific processing of such a main control board MS (main CPU 300) will be described later.

The sub-control board SS is a board mainly for controlling the effect associated with the game of the gaming machine 1. The sub-control board SS is connected to the sub-relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: for board-to-board), and the sub-relay board SN and the scaler board SK are connected to each other via a harness H. Various signals are exchanged in both directions with these.

As shown in FIG. 39, the sub-control board SS has a sub CPU 400, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real-time clock (RTC: Real Time Lock) 402 which is a date and time timing circuit, and is exchanged. As a possible expansion card, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic substrate 40 has a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (video memory) 441. For example, the sub CPU 400 transmits a signal for displacing the projection surfaces E11a and F1a to the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 through the sub relay board SN and the screen drive control board CS (see FIG. 42). .. Further, the sub CPU 400 transmits a video signal for displaying an image on the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, or the like to the projector control board B23 or the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the scaler board SK (FIG. 43). reference). Specific processing of such a sub control board SS (sub CPU 400) will be described later.

The reel drive board RD is a board for controlling the rotation operation of the reels RL, RC, and RR in the reel unit RU and controlling the medal payout operation by the hopper mechanism HP. As shown in FIG. 40, the reel drive board RD has an I / O communication LSI 310, a reel motor driver 311, and a hopper motor driver 312 that are slaves to the I / O communication LSI 305 that is the master of the main control board MS. For example, the I / O communication LSI 305 includes a payout signal from the hopper mechanism HP, a detection signal from the medal supply mechanism switch MHS for detecting the dropping of a medal on the hopper mechanism HP, a signal from the reel unit RU indicating the rotation state of the reel, and the like. Is converted into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication method, and these optical signals are transmitted to the main control board MS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 and the door relay board DS. Further, the I / O communication LSI 305 inputs a control signal instructing reel rotation start / rotation stop, medal payout, etc. from the main control board MS via the harness H, and inputs a control signal corresponding to these control signals. , It is output to the reel unit RU and the hopper mechanism HP through the reel motor driver 311 and the hopper motor driver 312. In this way, the control signal by the electric signal is output from the main control board MS, and the input to the main control board MS is performed by communication via the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2. This is because there is a problem of responsiveness with the hopper mechanism HP (problem of transmission time due to command transmission). In short, the main control board M and the reel drive board RD are not connected via an optical fiber cable in order to prevent a large deviation in the stop position of the symbol due to a delay when the reel is stopped from pressing the stop button, for example. It has become like.

The door relay board DS relays various signals in one direction from the reel drive board RD, various switches (50 to 56) provided on the door side, and the like to the main control board MS provided on the cabinet G side. It is a board of. As shown in FIG. 41, the door relay board DS has an I / O communication LSI 500 and an external input driver 501 that are slaves to the I / O communication LSI 305 that is the master of the main control board MS. For example, the I / O communication LSI 500 receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) through the external input driver 501 and converts them into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication method, and converts these optical signals into optical signals. It is transmitted to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2. Further, the I / O communication LSI 500 also receives a signal from the reel driver board RD, converts it into an optical signal according to a predetermined optical communication method, and converts this optical signal into a main control board via a second optical fiber cable FC2. Send to MS.

The sub-relay board SN is a board for mainly relaying commands from the main control board MS to the sub-control board SS and relaying various signals between the production mechanism and the like and the sub-control board SS. .. As shown in FIG. 42, the sub-relay board SN includes a security IC 600, a sound IC 601, a digital amplifier 602, and an I2C controller 603. For example, the sub-relay board SN transmits the video signal from the sub-control board SS as a bypass signal to the scaler board SK, and the screen drive signal from the sub-control board SS is transmitted to the screen drive control board CS via the I2C controller 603. The detection signal of the door monitoring switch 64 and the like are exchanged with the door monitoring unit 63 for 24 hours. The security IC 600 receives a security command (various commands from the encrypted main control board MS, etc.) from the main control board MS, converts the security command into plain text (decrypts the encrypted command), and then converts the security command into plain text (decrypts the encrypted command). It is transmitted to the sub-control board SS. The sound IC 601 receives a sound signal for production from the sub-control board SS, and transmits a signal corresponding to this sound signal to the speaker group 62 through the digital amplifier 602. The I2C controller 603 receives a lighting signal for production from the sub-control board SS, transmits a signal corresponding to the lighting signal to the LED board 60, and between the sub-control board SS and the screen drive control board CS. Exchange control signals and sensor signals.

The scaler board SK mainly receives video signals for production from the sub-control board SS, divides the video signals to generate video signals corresponding to a plurality of video displays, and converts these video signals into the projector device B2. It is a substrate for transmitting to the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19. As shown in FIG. 43, the scaler substrate SK includes an MCU (Micro Control Unit) (control LSI) 700, a multi-output scaler LSI (also referred to as a resolution conversion LSI) 710, and a V-by-one (registered trademark) HS transmitter 711. And SDRAM (DDR SDRAM / DDR2 SDRAM / DDR3 SDRAM, etc.) 712. In the MCU 700, the sub-relay board SN and the multi-output scaler LSI 710 are connected, and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL and the projector control board B23 are connected. In the multi-output scaler LSI710, the sub-control board SS is connected as an input source, and the MCU700, the V-by-one HS transmitter 711, the SDRAM 712, and the projector control board B23 are connected. The V-by-one HS transmitter 711 is connected to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL as an output destination.

As shown in FIG. 44, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 constitutes an MCU interface (for example, PCI Express) 800 connected to the MCU 700 and the SDRAM 712 (not shown), an SDRAM interface (for example, PCI Express) 820, and a resolution conversion output block. , Multiple Select Areas A to D801 to 804, LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) as a differential interface (1), (2) 811, 812, LVTTL (Low Voltage Transistor Transistor Transistor) as an input / output interface. It has (1) and (2) 815,814, and DSF (Double Scaling Filter) (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822 that constitute a video division block.

The multi-output scaler LSI 710, for example, divides an LVDS signal as a video signal, converts the resolution, and outputs the signal. Specifically, the multi-output scaler LSI710 divides a pair of LVDS signals (LDVS Dual: InPutA, InPutB) by differential transmission from the sub-control board SS into two by DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822. Further, conversion is performed to a predetermined resolution by each of the four select areas A to D801 to 804. After that, the multi-output scaler LSI710 mainly outputs LVDS signals (single signals of LVDS1 and LVDS2) for projector display through LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813. , 814 is used to output LVTTL signals (RGB signals of LVTTL1 and LVTTL2) for sub-liquid crystal display. The LVDS signal output from the multi-output scaler LSI710 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 directly or through the MCU700, and the LVTTL signal is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 or the MCU700. Will be done. Specific processing of such a scaler substrate SK (MCU700, multi-output scaler LSI710) will be described later.

The sub liquid crystal I / F board SL mainly relays the video signal (LVTTL signal) from the scaler board SK to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and also between the sub control board SS and the touch panel DD19T via the scaler board SK. It is a substrate for relaying various signals. As shown in FIG. 45, the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL has an MCU 900, a V-by-one HS receiver 901, a liquid crystal driver IC 902, and an LED driver IC 903. For example, the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL receives the video signal from the scaler board SK by the V-by-one HS receiver 901 and the MCU 900, and the liquid crystal driver IC 902 receives a control signal for driving the liquid crystal based on the video signal. Along with transmitting to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the LED driver IC903 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display backlight to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image is displayed at a predetermined resolution based on the image signal. Further, the MCU 900 receives the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T, and transmits the signal corresponding to the operation signal to the sub-control board SS via the suspender board SK. As a result, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS recognizes the input operation according to the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T. Although not shown in particular, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 incorporates a temperature sensor such as a thermistor, and the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL, whereby the sub liquid crystal is displayed. The MCU900 of the I / F board SL can recognize the operating temperature. Specific processing of such a sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL (MCU900) will be described later. Specific processing of the projector control board B23 (control LSI 230) shown in FIG. 21 will also be described later.

(Video split display pattern)
In the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image for production or when the projector device B2 is optically adjusted, the sub control board SS or the sub control board SS forms a divided display pattern as shown in FIG. An image is displayed when the scaler board SK performs signal processing. That is, as shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” of resolution 1280 × 800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution 480 × 800). By synthesizing with the data block indicated by "β"), an LVDS dual-in signal composed of one synthesized signal is transmitted to the scaler board SK.

The scaler board SK generates two video data α and β from the LVDS dual-in signal by the DSF (α) and (β) 821 and 822 of the multi-output scaler LSI710, and buffers these video data α and β to the SDRAM 712. Temporarily memorize in. The video data α and β are expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with an array image as shown on the left side of FIG. 46.

After that, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into an LVDS1 signal (video signal indicated by “A” having a resolution of 1280 × 800) for projector display through the select areas A801 and LVDS (1) 811. Then, this LVDS1 signal A is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 converts the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 into an LVTTL1 signal for sub-liquid crystal display (video signal indicated by “C” with a resolution of 480 × 800) through the select area C803 and LVTTL (1) 813. This LVTTL1 signal C is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVTTL1 signal C are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device B2 can project an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can display an image on the screen at a resolution equivalent to 480 × 800 pixels.

As the divided display pattern, a modified example as shown in FIGS. 47 to 52 can be realized according to a change in the display mode such as a change in the number of screens (number of display devices) for displaying an image or a change in the enlargement ratio related to the resolution. ing.

(Modification example 1)
For example, as shown in FIG. 47, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” of resolution 1280 × 800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution 1024 × 768). By synthesizing with the data block indicated by "β"), an LVDS dual-in signal composed of one synthesized signal is transmitted to the scaler board SK.

At this time, the scaler board SK inputs two video data α, β divided by DSF (α), (β) 821,822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown on the left side of FIG. 47. The array image of the pattern 1 or the input pattern 2 is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

Then, if the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK displays the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801, 802 and LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. 47. Through (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into an LVDS1 + 2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A + B” having a resolution of 1280 × 800), and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to the LVTTL1 + 2 signal for sub liquid crystal display (“C + D” with a resolution of 1024 × 768. ”, And this LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device (for example, WXGA: an abbreviation for Wide-XGA) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and the sub display device DD20 is used as a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, XGA: eXteded Graphics Array). When provided as (abbreviation), it is possible to display an image on the screen with a resolution equivalent to the number of 1024 × 768 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK selects the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801 and 802 and as shown in the lower right of FIG. 47. Through LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into, for example, LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio change, and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and the LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio change, for example, the resolution 1280 × 800. It is converted into the LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D of the above, and this LVTTL1 + 2 signal C + D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C + D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and in the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device, a resolution suitable for the display characteristics peculiar to each device is appropriate. The image can be displayed on.

(Modification 2)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with a resolution of 1280 × 800) and two video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution). By synthesizing the data block indicated by "β-1" of 800 x 480 and the data block indicated by "β-2" of resolution 800 x 480), the LVDS dual-in signal consisting of one synthesized signal can be obtained from the scaler board SK. Send to.

At this time, the scaler board SK displays three video data α, β-1, β-2 divided by DSF (α), (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal in FIG. 48. An array image of any of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

Then, if the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK displays the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801, 802 and LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. Through (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into an LVDS1 + 2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A + B” having a resolution of 1280 × 800), and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to display the LVTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by "C" and "D" with a resolution of 800 x 480), and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are converted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device (for example, FHD: an abbreviation for Full-HD) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280 × 800 pixels, and as a sub liquid crystal display device, it is different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When a sub-liquid crystal display device (for example, WXGA) is provided, an image can be displayed on each screen at a resolution equivalent to 800 × 480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK selects the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 in the select areas A, B801 and 802 and as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through LVDS (1) and (2) 811 and 812, it is converted into, for example, LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B having a resolution of 1920 × 1080 according to the set value of the enlargement ratio change, and this LVDS1 + 2 signal A + B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU700 also transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to set the enlargement ratio change. For example, it is converted into LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1280 × 800, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A + B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and the projector device (for example, FHD) and the two sub-liquid crystal display devices (for example, WXGA) are transmitted. ), The image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics peculiar to each device.

(Modification example 3)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the sub-control board SS includes two video data for projector display (data blocks indicated by “α-1” and “α-2” having a resolution of 800 × 480) and a sub. By synthesizing two video data for liquid crystal display (data blocks indicated by "β-1" and "β-2" with a resolution of 800 x 480), an LVDS dual-in signal consisting of one synthesized signal can be obtained on a scaler substrate. Send to SK.

At this time, the scaler board SK has four video data α-1, α-2, β-1, β-divided by DSF (α), (β) 821,822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal. 2 is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with an array image of any of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side of FIG. 49.

Then, the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK selects two video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the upper right of FIG. 49 unless the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set. Converted to LVDS1 signal and LVDS2 signal (video signals indicated by "A" and "B" of resolution 800 × 480) for projector display through areas A, B801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811 and 812. These LVDS1 signal A and LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to display the LVTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by "C" and "D" with a resolution of 800 x 480), and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are converted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 800 × 480 pixels, and when the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and two other display devices are provided as the sub liquid crystal device, 800 × An image can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU700 of the scaler board SK displays two video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the lower right of FIG. Through the select areas A, B801,802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811,812, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B having a resolution of, for example, 1280 × 720 are converted according to the setting value of the enlargement ratio change, and these LVDS1 The signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU700 also transmits the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D803,804 and LVTTL (1), (2) 815,814 to set the enlargement ratio change. For example, it is converted into LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1024 × 768, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS. The image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics peculiar to the device.

(Modifications 4 to 6)
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the sub-control board SS is composed of video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” or the like) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (“β” or the like). By sequentially outputting the data blocks shown), a plurality of LVDS single-in signals corresponding to each may be continuously transmitted to the scaler board SK. Even in such a case, the LVDS signal and the LVTTL signal indicating a predetermined resolution can be output separately by the same signal processing as the above-mentioned divided display pattern, and the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device are unique to each device. It is possible to appropriately display an image with a resolution suitable for the display characteristics of. In the present embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 6, three types of resolutions of FHD, WXGA, and XGA are illustrated, but the resolution is not limited to these, and for example, VGA (Video Graphics) may be used depending on the specifications and performance of the display device. By using a display device that supports resolutions such as Array), 2K, and 4K, a higher-definition image may be displayed.

The scaler board may be capable of outputting a plurality of video signals to one display means. For example, the scaler board may generate and output a video signal for displaying a part of the screen and a video signal for displaying the remaining part of the screen from one video data. Further, the scaler board may generate and output a left-eye video signal and a right-eye video signal for 3D display from one video data. According to this, it is possible to display an image by a 3D display method using parallax based on the image signal for the left eye and the image signal for the right eye from the scaler board, and in the projector device, it is stereoscopic not only by projection mapping but also by parallax. It is possible to display a feeling and powerful image.

(Communication specifications of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 53, the communication specifications of the sub-control board SS-scaler board SK, the scaler board SK-projector control board B23, and the scaler board SK-sub liquid crystal I / F board SL include the communication format and communication. The speed (baud rate), data length, stop bit, presence / absence of parity, protocol, and communication format are specified as shown in the figure. The ID is shown separately for easy viewing of the source ID and the destination ID, but it is actually a single byte of data. For example, when the sub-control board SS transmits data to the scaler board SK, the ID is 21H as the data indicating the ID by combining the source ID: 01H and the transmission destination ID: 20H. In the following description, the communication line between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK is referred to as a first serial line, and the communication line between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 is referred to as a second serial line. The communication line between the SK-sub liquid crystal I / F board SL may be referred to as a third serial line.

(List of commands between each board)
As shown in FIG. 54, the commands exchanged between the scaler board SK and the sub-control board SS are, for example, "startup parameter request", "parameter request", "status", and "status" as commands transmitted from the scaler board SK. "Reception confirmation" and "error notification" are specified, and as commands sent from the sub-control board SS, for example, "start parameter request confirmation", "setting completed", "status request", "status request completed", "Number of output screen division settings", "Output screen resolution setting", "Number of input screen division settings", and "Input screen resolution setting" are specified. The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG. 54.

As shown in FIG. 55, the commands exchanged between the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL and the sub control board SS are, for example, "startup parameter request" and "parameter" as commands transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. "Request", "Status", "Reception confirmation", and "Error notification" are specified, and as commands sent from the sub-control board SS, for example, "Startup parameter request confirmation", "Setting complete", and "Status request" , "Status request completed", "Sub LCD screen resolution setting", and "Sub LCD brightness setting" are specified. The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to Dn) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, the commands exchanged between the projector control board B23 and the sub-control board SS are, for example, "startup parameter request", "parameter request", and "reception confirmation" as commands transmitted from the projector control board B23. , "Error notification", "LED temperature", "FAN (fan) rotation speed", "LED brightness", "horizontal adjustment value", "vertical adjustment value", "focus adjustment value", "drift correction temperature" Is specified, and as commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS, for example, "start parameter request confirmation", "setting completed", "status request", "status request completed", "LED brightness setting", " Trapezoidal distortion correction value, "white color temperature setting", "horizontal position offset", "horizontal position adjustment value", "vertical position offset", "vertical position adjustment value", "brightness setting", "contrast setting", " "Gamma setting", "focus offset", "focus adjustment value", "focus drift correction value", and "test pattern" are specified. The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to n) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 57, the error information transmitted from the scaler board SK by the error notification transmission command includes "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "scaler output setting abnormality", "scaler input setting abnormality", and "WDT". (Watchdog timer) -Scaler ", and for each error, parameters (including the data position" D1 "in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error status are specified. The error information transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL by the error notification transmission command includes "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "touch panel input abnormality", "sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality", and "sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality". There are "temperature abnormality" and "WDT-sub liquid crystal display", and for each error, parameters (including the data position "D1" in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error states are specified. The error information transmitted from the projector control board B23 by the error notification transmission command includes "LED (R) temperature abnormality", "LED (G) temperature abnormality", "LED (B) temperature abnormality", and "FAN1 rotation". There are "abnormal", "FAN2 rotation abnormality", "FAN3 rotation abnormality", "voltage abnormality", "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "WDT-DLP", and parameters (data in communication format) for each error. The position (including "D1" or "D2"), the condition for occurrence of the error, and the state of the error are specified. The error management area of the scaler board SK, the projector control board B23, and the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL (SDRAM memory map shown in FIG. 96, DRAM memory map shown in FIG. 106, and DRAM memory shown in FIG. 116), which will be described later. The error information and error detection conditions set in (see map) are applied as they are.

(Memory map of PC1000 for adjustment)
As shown in FIG. 58, in the memory (DRAM) of the adjustment PC 1000, a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, and a status storage area are stored as work areas of predetermined application software when optical adjustment is performed on the projector device B2. The area is provided. The storage medium (HDD) of the adjustment PC 1000 has horizontal positions A to E adjustment values, vertical positions A to E adjustment values, focus positions A to E adjustment values, LED brightness settings, and trapezoidal distortion as matters related to optical adjustment. Correction values, white color temperature settings, luminance settings, contrast settings, gamma settings, test patterns, horizontal positions A to E offsets, vertical positions A to E offsets, focus position offsets A to E, and the like are provided. The specific processing of the adjustment PC 1000 will be described later.

(Processing of main control board MS)
[Processing when the power is turned on by the main CPU 300]
FIG. 59 shows the processing when the power is turned on by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 300 performs the power-on processing (S101). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines, for example, whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initializes according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (unit game) (S102). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes, for example, by designating a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. As a result, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 301 are cleared.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S103). In this process, the main CPU 300 sets the effective line based on the number of inserted sheets and determines whether or not the start operation is possible.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a random number value acquisition process (S104). In this process, the main CPU 300 extracts and acquires a random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area. The random number value is used in the next internal lottery process.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an internal lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines the internal winning combination.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S106). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes an area related to control for stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a start command generation / storage process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a start command and stores the generated start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board SS by the command transmission process. The start command includes various information (internal winning combination, game status, etc.) necessary for the production, such as the internal winning combination. As a result, the sub-control board SS can produce an effect according to the start operation.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs wait processing (S108). In this process, the main CPU 300 waits so as not to accept the start operation or the like until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the previous game.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start process (S109). In this process, the main CPU 300 requests the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S110). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a reel rotation start command and stores the generated reel rotation start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The reel rotation start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can recognize the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S111). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines the attraction priority of the winning combination that can be displayed, and stores the attraction priority data in a predetermined storage area.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel stop control process (S112). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR based on the timing of the stop operation by the player, the internal winning combination, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning search process (S113). In this process, the main CPU 300 collates the symbol combination displayed along the effective line after the reels RL, RC, and RR are stopped with the symbol combination table, determines the display combination, and determines the number of medals to be paid out. Do.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning operation command generation / storage process (S114). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a winning operation command and stores the generated winning operation command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The winning operation command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can determine the production content and the like according to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout process (S115). In this process, the main CPU 300 pays out medals based on the number of medals to be paid out determined in the process of S113.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout end command generation / storage process (S116). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a medal payout end command and stores the generated medal payout end command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The medal payout end command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can recognize the end of payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus end check process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 300 ends the operation of the bonus game when the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus operation check process (S118). In this process, the main CPU 300 starts the operation of the bonus game when the condition for starting the bonus game is satisfied. The main CPU 300 operates the re-game when the conditions for the re-game are satisfied. After the execution of S118, the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S102 again.

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 ms)]
FIG. 60 shows an interrupt process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 300 periodically saves registers at a predetermined cycle (1.1172 ms) (S121).

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an input port check process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 300 confirms the presence / absence of an input signal from the door relay board DS. For example, the main CPU 300 stores signals from the start switch 54, the stop switch board 55, and the like for each interrupt process. Further, the main CPU 300 stores input state commands corresponding to input signals from various switches and the like in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in the data transmission process described later. As a result, various effects can be executed according to the start operation of the unit game and the stop operation of the reels RL, RC, and RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a timer update process (S123). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the timer set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs the effect timer update process (S124). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the effect timer set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel control process (S125). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of controlling the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR. Specifically, the main CPU 300 starts the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR in response to the request to start the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, that is, the start operation, and at a constant speed. Control is performed so that the reels RL, RC, and RR rotate. Further, in response to the stop operation, control is performed so that the rotation of the reels RL, RC, and RR corresponding to the stop operation is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs the 7SEG drive process (S126). In this process, the main CPU 300 causes the 7-segment display 30 to display the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a data transmission process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 300 transmits the command stored in the transmission data storage area to the sub-control board SS via the security IC 306.

Next, the main CPU 300 restores the register (S128). After that, the main CPU 300 ends the interrupt process.

(Memory map of sub-control board SS)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the sub RAM board 41, SRAM 401, and sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS are provided with various regions for performing optical adjustment with respect to the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 61, the sub RAM board 41 has a part of a work area (for example, an area used in a task system and an LED control task described later) for the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS to perform various controls. Areas used in each task such as (not shown) include sub-device reception storage area, sub-device transmission storage area, scaler control reception storage area, sub LCD control reception storage area, projector control reception storage area, and flags. Storage area, scaler setting value storage area, scaler setting confirmation storage area, sub LCD setting value storage area, sub LCD setting confirmation storage area, touch panel input storage area, projector setting value storage area, projector status storage area, drift correction storage area It is provided. For example, in the flag storage area, the EXT reception flag, the reception completion flag, the scaler setting completion flag, the sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, the projector setting completion flag, the scaler setting changing flag, the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag, and the projector setting changing flag , The flag for setting when the scaler is started, the flag for setting when the sub LCD is started, and the flag for setting when the projector is started are stored. The input type, the input X coordinate, and the input Y coordinate are stored in the touch panel input storage area. A drift correction monitoring counter and a focus correction value storage area are provided in the drift correction storage area. The sub device means a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2 in addition to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the touch panel DD19T, and the projector device B2 controlled by the sub control board SS. These stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, the SRAM 401 has a scaler setting value storage area and a sub liquid crystal as a part of the data that can be backed up (for example, the data in the area where the game state, RT state, etc. are backed up is not shown). A setting value storage area and a projector setting value storage area are provided. In the scaler setting value storage area, as the scaler setting values, the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, the output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolutions, the output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolutions, the input screens 1 and 2 horizontal resolutions, and the input Screens 1 and 2 vertical resolutions are stored. The sub liquid crystal setting value storage area stores the sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal brightness as the sub liquid crystal setting values. In the projector setting value storage area, as projector setting values, horizontal position A to E offset, horizontal position A to E adjustment value, vertical position A to E offset, vertical position A to E adjustment value, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and test pattern are stored. These set values will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, the sub ROM board 42 has a part of fixed data (control program of the sub control board SS, various lottery values required for the game, video data, sound data, LED data, and accessories (screen). ) Operation data and the like are not shown), and a scaler initial value area, a sub liquid crystal initial value area, and a projector initial value area are provided. In the scaler initial value area, the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, baud rate, data length, parity, stop, output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screens 1 and 2 horizontal The resolution, input screens 1 and 2, and the vertical resolution are stored. The sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal brightness are stored in the sub liquid crystal initial value region. In the projector initial value area, horizontal positions A to E offset, vertical positions A to E offset, focus position offsets A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, contrast setting, Contains gamma settings, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, and test patterns. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of sub-control board SS)
[Processing when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400]
FIG. 63 shows a process when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of the sub control board SS (S131). In this process, the sub CPU 400 initializes the task system, such as error checking of the SRAM 401 and initialization of the sub RAM board 41 (RAM clear, backup data set of the SRAM 401, etc.). The task system includes an LED control task, a sound control task, a screen accessory control task, a main task, a main board communication task, an animation task, and a subdevice task, which will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the LED control task (S132). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the LED control task described later (see FIG. 64).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the sound control task (S133). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the sound control task described later (see FIG. 65).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the screen accessory control task (S134). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the screen accessory control task described later (see FIG. 66).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main task (S135). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the main task described later (see FIG. 69).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main board communication task (S136). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the main board communication task described later (see FIG. 70).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the animation task (S137). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the animation task described later (see FIG. 72).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the sub device task (S138). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of the sub device task described later (see FIG. 73).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a power failure recovery process (S139). In this process, the sub CPU 400 performs a process of restoring the backup data at the time of power failure. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of turning on the power.

[LED control task]
FIG. 64 shows an LED control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs LED-related data initialization processing (S141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data analysis processing (S142).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the LED effect execution process (S143).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S144). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S142.

[Sound control task]
FIG. 65 shows a sound control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of sound-related data (S151).
Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data analysis processing (S152).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sound effect execution process (S153). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S152.

[Screen accessory control task]
FIG. 66 shows a screen accessory control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory test process in order to confirm whether or not the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 at the time of turning on the power operate normally (S161). For example, as a test, the reel screen mechanism E1 is first moved to the display position and then to the storage position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position. Then, when an abnormality is detected during the test operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, the projector device B2 displays a notification of the abnormality and requests that a message notifying the occurrence of the abnormality be output from the above-mentioned sound control task.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is the registered screen accessory data (S162). In this process, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the screen accessory data requesting the operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41. When the screen accessory data exists (S162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S163. When the screen accessory data does not exist (S162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S164.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory operation construction process (S163). In this process, the sub CPU 400 constructs an operation pattern of the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 based on the screen accessory data. As the operation pattern of the screen drive mechanisms E1 and F1, for example, when the image is projected on the front screen mechanism E1 and the accessory data for projecting the image is registered on the reel screen mechanism F1 (front screen mechanism). The sub CPU 400 that executes the screen accessory operation construction process sets the storage operation pattern of the front screen mechanism E1 and also sets the front screen. After the mechanism E1 is housed in the upper part, the operation pattern is constructed in the order of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the display surface.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory control process (S164). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 2 msec (S165). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S162.

[Screen accessory control process]
FIG. 67 shows the screen accessory control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 corresponds to the operation start step from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed by the screen accessory operation construction process described above, and the screen (projection target) is changed. It is determined whether or not it is (S171). When the screen change occurs in the operation start step (S171: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S172. If it is not the operation start step or does not correspond to the occurrence of screen change (S171: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S173.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus change request processing (S172). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a front screen control process (S173). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the front screen drive mechanism E2 in order to move the front screen mechanism E1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a reel screen control process (S174). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 in order to move the reel screen mechanism F1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is -1 (S175). The focus standby counter is a subtraction counter for generating a predetermined waiting time when changing the focus position with respect to the projector device B2. When the value of the focus standby counter is -1, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process. If the value of the focus standby counter is not -1 (S175: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S176.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176). When the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S178. When the value of the focus standby counter is not 0 (S176: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S177.

Next, the sub CPU 400 subtracts 1 from the value of the focus standby counter (S177). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

In S178, the sub CPU 400 requests the projector device B2 to change the setting at the changed focus position. In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position setting change request data in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the current focus position before the change and the focus position after the change. As a result, for example, when the projection target of the image is switched from the front screen mechanism E1 to the reel screen mechanism F1 or vice versa, the projector device B2 changes the focus position setting. The focus mechanism 242 can be controlled based on the required data, and the projection lens 210 can be focused on the focus position corresponding to each of the screen mechanisms E1 and F2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus standby counter to -1 (S179). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

[Focus change request processing]
FIG. 68 shows the focus change request processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 acquires the current focus position (focus positions A to E offset) from the current operating states of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 (S181).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the changed focus position (focus positions A to E offset) from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed from the registered accessory data (S182).

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the number of focus change pulses (S183). The number of focus change pulses is the number of pulses of the motor drive signal supplied to the focus motor 242C when the focus position is changed, and is the required number of pulses corresponding to the amount obtained by subtracting the changed focus position from the current focus position. Calculated as an absolute value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus adjustment time (S184). The focus adjustment time is the actual working time of the focus mechanism 242 that changes the focus position. For example, if the motor drive signal for the focus motor 242C is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled (pulse). It is calculated by multiplying the period) by the number of focus change pulses obtained in S183.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a transmission time (setting change transmission time) for changing the focus position setting by communicating with the projector control board B23 (S185). The setting change transmission time is the transmission time 1 of the data exchanged between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK due to the change of the focus position setting, and the transmission of the data exchanged between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23. It is calculated as the time including the time 2. The transmission time 1 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits, which is the number of data × (data length + parity + start + stop), by 1 / baud rate 1. Similarly, the transmission time 2 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits by 1 / baud rate 2. In the present embodiment, the baud rate 1 is 38400 bps, the baud rate 2 is 19200 bps, the data length is 8 bits, there is no parity, the start and stop bits are 1 bit, and the transmission time 1 and the transmission time 2 obtained by using these numerical values are used. Is calculated.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus change time (S186). The focus change time is calculated as a total time of the setting change transmission time obtained in S185 and the focus adjustment time obtained in S184.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is changed (S187). When changing to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S188. If the change is not to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S189.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the movement time 1 when moving the front screen mechanism E1 to a predetermined position (S188). This movement time 1 is the actual working time of the front screen drive mechanism E2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor E25 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a pulse square wave having a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S190.

In S189, the sub CPU 400 calculates the movement time 2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to a predetermined position. This movement time 2 is the actual working time of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is a pulse square wave having a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses.

Next, the sub CPU 400 divides the difference between the movement times 1 and 2 obtained in S188 or S189 and the focus change time obtained in S186 by 2 corresponding to 2 msec of the processing cycle of the screen accessory control task, and calculates the difference. A value corresponding to time is set in the focus standby counter (S190). As a result, with respect to the operation of moving the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to a predetermined position and the operation of changing the focus position, the values that are exactly the required time differences are not set in the focus standby counter. The focus position can be changed to a predetermined position at the timing when the movement operation of F1 is completed. That is, it is possible to project an image of good image quality that is in focus by changing the focus position even on the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 immediately after the movement.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is focus interlocking when displaying the image (for example, "1" when there is a focus interlocking flag (not shown) and "0" when there is no focus interlocking flag (S191)). .. Focus interlocking means that the focus position is continuously changed in conjunction with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. When there is no focus interlocking (S191: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S192. When there is focus interlocking (S191: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 in the focus standby counter (S192). That is, when the focus interlocking is not performed, the focus position is immediately changed at the beginning of the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, and when the focus interlocking is performed, the focus position is at the timing when the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is completed. The change of is completed. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

[Main task]
FIG. 69 shows the main task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization: vertical synchronization signal) interrupt initialization process (S201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a VSYNC interrupt that occurs at a cycle of 33 msec (S202).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs drawing processing (S203).

Next, the sub CPU 400 resets the watchdog timer (WDT) (S204). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S202.

[Main board communication task]
FIG. 70 shows a main board communication task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes the communication message queue (S211).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires a reception command from the main control board MS from the communication message queue (S212).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a receive command (S213). When there is a receive command (S213: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S214. If there is no receive command (S213: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S218.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the reception command (S214).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received command is a valid command (S215). When the receive command is a valid command (S215: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S216. If the receive command is not a valid command (S215: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S218. The reception command is valid, for example, when the value of the command is in the range of 01H to 10H.

Next, the sub CPU 400 creates game information from the reception command and stores the game information in a predetermined area (not shown) of the sub RAM board 41 (S216). This game information includes, for example, an internal winning combination, a game state, a set value, the number of bonus games, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a command analysis process (S217). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 10 msec (S218). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S212.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 shows a command analysis process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a command consistency determination process (S221).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the effect content determination process (S222).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs animation data determination processing (S223).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the LED data determination process (S224).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data determination processing (S225).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory data determination process (S226).

Next, the sub CPU 400 registers each of the determined data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM board 41 (S227). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the command analysis process.

[Anime task]
FIG. 72 shows an animation task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 checks for changes from the previous game information (S231).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the main object control process (S232).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the main animation task management process (S233).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub object control process (S234).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub animation task management process (S235).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 33 msec (S236). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S231.

[Subdevice task]
FIG. 73 shows a sub-device task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device initialization process (S241). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control process (S242). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control process (S243). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control process (S244). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 10 msec (S245). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S242.

[Sub-device reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 74 shows a sub-device reception interrupt process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The sub-device reception interrupt process is a reception interrupt process for capturing communication data transmitted by the scaler board SK in response to an external request of the sub-device (sub-liquid crystal display device DD19, touch panel DD19T, projector device B2, etc.). As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is'STX' indicating the beginning of the data (S251). When the received data is'STX (Start of Text: 02H)'(S251: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S252. If the received data is not'STX'(S251: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S253.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’, and clears the sub device reception storage area (S252). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S253, the sub CPU 400 stores the received data in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the data received from the sub device is'ETX'indicating the end of the data (S254). When the received data is'ETX (End of TeXt: 03H)'(S254: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S255. If the received data is not'ETX'(S254: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S256.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S255). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S256, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is ‘ON’. When the ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S256: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S257. If the ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S256: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device reception data sum check process (S257).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S257 is normal (S258). When the sum value is normal (S258: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S260. If the sum value is not normal (S258: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S259. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the sum value is normal, the received data up to'ETX'excluding'STX'of the received data is added and received after'ETX'. The consistency of the sum value is judged by collating with the received data. The method of calculating the sum value is not limited to the addition formula, and a subtraction formula or an exclusive OR (also referred to as BCC) may be used.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (clears the sub device reception storage area) (S259). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S260, the sub CPU 400 sets the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

[Sub-device initialization process]
FIG. 75 shows a sub-device initialization process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub-control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes the first serial line that serves as the communication line with the scaler board SK (S271).

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S272). As shown in FIG. 62, the scaler setting values include the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screens 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, and input. It corresponds to a device profile showing the control characteristics of the scaler board SK such as screens 1 and 2 and the vertical resolution.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process for the range of the scaler set value stored in the scaler set value storage area (S273).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the scaler set values in the scaler set value storage area are within the effective range (S274). As shown in FIG. 54, the effective range of the scaler set value is defined in advance as a transmission command from the sub-control board SS. When all the scaler set values are within the effective range (S274: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S276. When at least one scaler set value is not within the effective range (S274: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S275.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S275). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the scaler set value is written in advance in the scaler initial value area of the sub ROM board 42.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S276). As shown in FIG. 62, the sub liquid crystal set value corresponds to a device profile showing the display characteristics of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 such as the sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal brightness.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process for the range of the sub liquid crystal set value stored in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S277).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the sub liquid crystal set values in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area are within the effective range (S278). When all the sub liquid crystal set values are within the effective range (S278: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S280. When at least one sub liquid crystal set value is not within the effective range (S278: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S279.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S279). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the sub liquid crystal set value is written in advance in the sub liquid crystal initial value area of the sub ROM board 42.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the projector set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S280). As shown in FIG. 62, the projector set values include horizontal position A to E adjustment value, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E adjustment value, vertical position A to E offset, and focus position offset. It corresponds to a device profile showing display characteristics of the projector device B2 such as A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and focus drift correction value A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process for the range of the projector set value stored in the projector set value storage area (S281).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the projector set values in the projector set value storage area are within the effective range (S282). When all the projector set values are within the effective range (S282: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S284. When at least one projector setting value is not within the effective range (S282: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S283.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the projector set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 as initial values (S283). As shown in FIG. 62, the initial value of the projector set value is written in advance in the projector initial value area of the sub ROM board 42.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting completion flag, the sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, and the projector setting completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S284). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device initialization process.

[Scaler control process]
FIG. 76 shows the scaler control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, in the sub CPU 400, whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates'scaler (see ID: 02H shown in FIG. 53)'. (S291). When the source ID indicates'scaler'(S291: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S292. When the source ID does not indicate'scaler'(S291: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a received data consistency check process for controlling the scaler board SK (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '01H'to '05H' indicating the transmission command from the scaler board SK shown in FIG. 54. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S294. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S295.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards (clears) the data in the sub device reception storage area because the consistency of the received data is abnormal (invalid received data) (S294). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

In S295, the sub CPU 400 performs the scaler control reception time processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

[Processing when receiving scaler control]
FIG. 77 shows the process at the time of receiving the scaler control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the scaler control reception storage area (S301).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'start parameter request'(S302). When the reception command is'start parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'(S302: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S303. If the received command is not'start parameter request'(S302: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S304.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when receiving a scaler activation parameter request (S303). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S304, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'parameter request (see CMD: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the reception command is'parameter request'(S304: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S305. When the reception command is not'parameter request'(S304: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S311.

Next, the sub CPU 400 receives a request to change the scaler set value (see CMD: 02H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S305). When there is a request to change the scaler set value (S305: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S306. When there is no request to change the scaler set value (S305: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S309.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S306).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler setting value to be changed) from the scaler setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S307).

Next, the sub CPU 400 uses the acquired setting change content as an argument (a general name of the parameter on the software, which means that the caller passes the parameter to the subroutine function (process) of the call destination), and performs the scaler setting change process. (S308). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S309, the sub CPU 400 receives a status request (see CMD: 02H, D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) from the scaler board SK based on the parameter value (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. Determine if it exists. When there is a status request (S309: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S310. If there is no status request (S309: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S311 the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the receive command is'status'(S311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S312. If the receive command is not'status'(S311: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S313.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when receiving a scaler status command (S312). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

In S313, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the reception command is'reception confirmation'(S313: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S314. If the reception command is not'reception confirmation'(S313: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S315.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler reception confirmation reception time process (S314). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

In S315, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is an "error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)". When the reception command is'error notification'(S315: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S316. If the reception command is not'error notification'(S315: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing when a scaler error occurs (S316).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound scaler error generation output to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the scaler board SK by sound, and simultaneously notifies the LED group 61 of the error by the light emitting mode. LED scaler error occurrence A lighting request is made (S317). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler control.

[Processing when a scaler activation parameter request is received]
FIG. 78 shows the process when the scaler start parameter request is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S321). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of'start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)' to the scaler board SK.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S322). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the scaler activation parameter request is received.

[Scaler setting change process]
FIG. 79 shows a scaler setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 takes out the setting change contents of the scaler setting value received as an argument (S331).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the number of output screen division settings (S332). When the setting change content is the number of output screen division settings (S332: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S333. When the setting change content is not the number of output screen division settings (S332: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S334.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen division set number command transmission process (S333). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the number of output screen division settings in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and specifies the output patterns 0 to 3 as the number of output screen division settings 1 to 4. The command of the number of division settings (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

In S334, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen resolution setting. When the setting change content is the output screen resolution setting (S334: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S335. When the setting change content is not the output screen resolution setting (S334: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S336.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen resolution setting command transmission process (S335). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the output screen resolution as the output screen number (1 to 4), horizontal resolution (480 to 4060), and vertical. The command of'output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'to specify the resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Specifically, as an example, when the number of output screen division settings is "2", the output screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler board SK twice (two cycles (400 msec)). The first output screen number: 1 and the output screen number: 1 correspond to the horizontal resolution and vertical resolution, and the second output screen number: 2 and the output screen number: 2 correspond to the horizontal resolution and vertical resolution. Will be sent. Similarly, in the case of the input screen resolution setting command described later, the input screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler board SK a number of times according to the number of input screen division settings.

In S336, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the number of input screen division settings. When the setting change content is the number of input screen division settings (S336: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S337. When the setting change content is not the number of input screen division settings (S336: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S338.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen division set number command transmission process (S337). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the number of input screen division settings in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and specifies 1 or 2 as the number of input screen division settings (FIG. 54). The command of'CMD: 07H shown in the right column)'is transmitted to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

In S338, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the input screen resolution setting. When the setting change content is the input screen resolution setting (S338: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S339. When the setting change content is not the input screen resolution setting (S338: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen resolution setting command transmission process (S339). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the input screen resolution as the input pattern (0, 1) corresponding to the input screen number (1, 2). , Send the command of'input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'to specify the horizontal resolution (480 to 4060) and the vertical resolution (240 to 1600) to the scaler board SK. .. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process. Such a scaler setting change process is executed when a worker of a gaming machine manufacturing factory performs a menu operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

[Processing when receiving a scaler status command]
FIG. 80 shows the process when the scaler status command is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from "D1" of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is the output setting based on the value (S341). When the status type is output setting (S341: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S342. When the status type is not the output setting (S341: No), that is, when the status type is the input setting, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S343.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the output screen resolution data saved after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S342). As shown in FIG. 54, the output screen resolution data includes the number of output divisions (1 to 4), the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolution (0 to 4060), and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolution (0 to 1600). Is included. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S344.

In S343, the sub CPU 400 saves the input screen resolution data saved after "D2" of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 54, the input screen resolution data includes the number of input divisions (1 or 2), the input first and second screen horizontal resolutions (0 to 4060), and the input first and second screen vertical resolutions (0 to 1600). Is done.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S344). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler status command.

[Processer reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 81 shows the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the flag for changing the scaler setting in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'(S351). When the scaler setting changing flag is'ON'(S351: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S352. If the scaler setting changing flag is not'ON'(S351: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler set value before the change) from the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S352).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler set value storage area is an end block (-1 or 0FFFFH is stored) (S353). When the scaler set value storage area is an end block (S353: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S356. When the scaler set value storage area is not an end block (S353: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S354.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler setting change process (S354). This process is as shown in FIG. 79.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the scaler set value storage area (S355). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

In S356, the sub CPU 400 performs the setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating “setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” of the scaler set value to the scaler board SK.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S357). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler reception confirmation.

[Sub LCD control processing]
FIG. 82 shows a sub liquid crystal control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, does the sub CPU 400 indicate that the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 04H shown in FIG. 53)'? Whether or not it is determined (S361). When the source ID indicates'sub liquid crystal'(S361: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S362. When the source ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal'(S361: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception data consistency check process for controlling the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T (S362). In this process, whether or not the sub CPU 400 matches the value of the command ID included in the received data with the values of '41H' to '45H' indicating the transmission command from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL shown in FIG. Is checked and the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S364. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S365.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S364). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

In S365, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal control reception processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

[Processing when receiving sub LCD control]
FIG. 83 shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the sub liquid crystal control reception storage area (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a "startup parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)" (S372). When the reception command is'start parameter request'(S372: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S373. If the received command is not'start parameter request'(S372: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S374.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal activation parameter request (S373). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S374, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the reception command is'parameter request'(S374: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S375. When the reception command is not'parameter request'(S374: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S381.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal set value based on the parameter value included in the parameter request reception command (see D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 55) (see D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). S375). When there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal set value (S375: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S376. When there is no request to change the sub liquid crystal set value (S375: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S379.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S376).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal setting value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S377).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S378). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S379, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a status request from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL based on the value of the parameter included in the parameter request reception command (see D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). Determine. When there is a status request (S379: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S380. When there is no status request (S379: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S380). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S381, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the reception command is'status'(S381: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S382. If the receive command is not'status'(S381: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S383.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command (S382). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

In S383, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the reception command is'reception confirmation'(S383: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S384. If the reception command is not'reception confirmation'(S383: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S385.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing (S384). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

In S385, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is an "error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)". When the reception command is'error notification'(S385: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S386. If the reception command is not'error notification'(S385: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when a sub liquid crystal error occurs (S386).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound sub liquid crystal error to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL (sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or touch panel DD19T) by sound, and at the same time, outputs the sound sub liquid crystal error generation. In order to notify the error according to the light emitting mode, the LED sub liquid crystal error occurrence lighting request is made to the LED group 61 (S387). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal control.

[Processing when sub LCD activation parameter request is received]
FIG. 84 shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal start parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S391). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a'start parameter request confirmation'command to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S392). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal start parameter request.

[Sub LCD setting change process]
FIG. 85 shows a sub liquid crystal setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 takes out the setting change contents of the sub liquid crystal setting value received as an argument (S401).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402). When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S403. When the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S404.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting command transmission process (S403). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal screen resolution in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets the sub liquid crystal screen resolution (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55). Is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

In S404, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal brightness setting. When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal brightness setting (S404: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S405. When the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal brightness setting (S404: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal brightness setting command transmission process (S405). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal brightness in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and subsends a command (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) for setting the sub liquid crystal brightness. It transmits to the liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

[Processing when sub LCD status command is received]
FIG. 86 shows the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from "D1" of the received data indicating the status, and determines whether or not the status type is touch input based on the value (S411). When the status type is touch input (S411: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S412. When the status type is not touch input (S411: No), that is, when the liquid crystal setting is set, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S413.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the touch input data included in the status reception command in the touch panel input storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S412). As shown in FIG. 55, the touch input data includes an input type and input X and Y coordinates related to the touch panel DD19T. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S414.

In S413, the sub CPU 400 stores the liquid crystal setting data included in the status reception command in the sub liquid crystal setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 55, the liquid crystal setting data includes a horizontal resolution (200 to 800) and a vertical resolution (200 to 800).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S414). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal status command.

[Sub-LCD reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 87 shows the processing at the time of receiving confirmation of sub liquid crystal reception by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'(S421). When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is'ON'(S421: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S422. When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is not'ON'(S421: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal setting value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) of the sub RAM board 41 (S422).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is an end block (S423). When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is the end block (S423: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S426. When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is not an end block (S423: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S424.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S424). This process is as shown in FIG. 85.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S425). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation.

In S426, the sub CPU 400 performs the setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of setting the sub liquid crystal set value (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S427). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation.

[Projector control processing]
FIG. 88 shows the projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 indicates whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates a'projector (see ID: 03H shown in FIG. 53)'. (S431). When the source ID indicates'projector'(S4311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S432. When the source ID does not indicate'projector'(S4311: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S432). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S434. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S435.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S434). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S435, the sub CPU 400 performs projector-controlled reception processing. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector drift correction process (S436). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

[Processing when receiving projector control]
FIG. 89 shows the projector-controlled reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies received data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the projector control reception storage area (S441).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'startup parameter request (see CMD: 81H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S442). When the reception command is'start parameter request'(S442: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S443. If the received command is not'start parameter request'(S442: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S444.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process at the time of receiving the projector start parameter request (S443). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S444, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a'parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the reception command is'parameter request'(S444: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S445. When the reception command is not'parameter request'(S444: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S451.

Next, the sub CPU 400 receives a request to change the projector set value (see CMD: 82H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S445). When there is a request to change the projector set value (S445: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S446. When there is no request to change the projector set value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S449.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S446).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area (S447).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S448). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S449, the sub CPU 400 requests a status from the projector control board B23 based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command (see CMD: 82H, D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 56). Determine if there is. When there is a status request (S449: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S450. If there is no status request (S449: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S450). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S451, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the reception command is'reception confirmation'(S451: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S452. If the reception command is not'reception confirmation'(S451: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S453.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector reception confirmation reception processing (S452). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92.

In S453, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is an "error notification (see CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)". When the reception command is'error notification'(S453: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S454. If the reception command is not'error notification'(S453: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S455.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector error notification reception processing (S454). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

In S455, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a status-related command (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56). When the reception command is a status-related command (S455: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S456. If the reception command is not a status-related command (S455: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector status reception processing (S456). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing.

[Processing when projector startup parameter request is received]
FIG. 90 shows the processing at the time of receiving the projector start parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a start parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S461). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of'confirm start parameter request'to the projector control board B23.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector start-up setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘ON’ (S462). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the projector start parameter request.

[Projector setting change process]
FIG. 91 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 takes out the setting change contents of the projector setting value received as an argument (S471).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position positions A to E offset) (S472). When the setting change content is the horizontal position offset (S472: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S473. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S472: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S474.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a horizontal position offset command transmission process (S473). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the horizontal position offset (in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 88H shown) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S474, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset). When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S474: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S475. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S474: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S476.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a vertical position offset command transmission process (S475). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sets the vertical position offset (in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 8AH shown) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S476, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the focus offset (focus position offsets A to E). When the setting change content is the focus offset (S476: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S477. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S476: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S478.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S477). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and commands for setting the focus position offsets A to E (CMD: shown in the right column of FIG. 56: 8FH) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S478, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction (focus drift correction values A to E). When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S478: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S479. When the setting change content is not the focus drift correction (S478: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S480.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S479). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and commands for setting the focus drift correction values A to E (shown in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 91H) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S480, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S480: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S481. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S480: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S482.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the LED brightness setting command transmission process (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 85H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the LED brightness on the projector control board. It is transmitted to B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S482, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S483. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S484.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S483). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 86H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value. It transmits to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S484, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a contrast setting. When the setting change content is the contrast setting (S484: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S485. When the setting change content is not the contrast setting (S484: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S486.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S485). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23 to set the contrast. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S486, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a gamma setting. When the setting change content is a gamma setting (S486: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S487. When the setting change content is not the gamma setting (S486: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S488.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 8EH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S488, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the white color temperature. When the setting change content is the white color temperature (S488: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S489. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S488: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S490.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S489). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and controls the projector with a command (see CMD: 87H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the white color temperature. It transmits to the board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S490, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. When the setting change content is brightness (S490: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S491. When the setting change content is not brightness (S490: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S492.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S491). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23 to set the brightness. And send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S492, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is a test pattern (S492: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S493. If the setting change content is not a test pattern (S492: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to set the test pattern on the projector control board B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in the amusement park or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before shipping from the factory.

[Projector reception confirmation reception processing]
FIG. 92 shows the projector reception confirmation reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'(S501). When the projector setting changing flag is'ON'(S501: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S502. If the projector setting changing flag is not'ON'(S501: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception processing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector set value storage area is an end block (S503). When the projector set value storage area is an end block (S503: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S506. When the projector set value storage area is not an end block (S503: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S504.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector setting change process with the acquired setting change content as an argument (S504). This process is as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the projector set value storage area (S505). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception processing.

In S506, the sub CPU 400 performs the setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of setting the projector set value (see CMD: 82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to ‘OFF’ (S507). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception processing.

[Processing when receiving projector error notification]
FIG. 93 shows the processing at the time of receiving the projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S511).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL in order to display the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S512). ).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a sound projector error generation output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) by sound (S513). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the projector error notification.

[Processing when projector status is received]
FIG. 94 shows the projector status reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'LED temperature (see CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S521). .. When the command type is'LED temperature'(S521: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S522. When the command type is not'LED temperature'(S5211: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S523.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED temperature data included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S522). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S523, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'FAN rotation speed (see CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'FAN rotation speed'(S523: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S524. When the command type is not "FAN rotation speed" (S523: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S525.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the FAN rotation speed data included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 86H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S524). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S525, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'LED brightness (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'LED brightness'(S525: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S526. When the command type is not "LED brightness" (S525: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S527.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED luminance data included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 87H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S526). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S527, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'horizontal adjustment value'(S527: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S528. If the command type is not'horizontal adjustment value'(S527: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S529.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the horizontal adjustment value included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 88H, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S528). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S529, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'vertical adjustment value (see CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'vertical adjustment value'(S529: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S530. When the command type is not "vertical adjustment value" (S529: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S531.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the vertical adjustment value included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 89H, D1 to D5 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S530). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S531, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'focus adjustment value (see CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'focus adjustment value'(S531: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S532. If the command type is not'focus adjustment value'(S531: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S533.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the focus adjustment value included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 8AH, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. (S532). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

In S533, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of the command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'drift correction temperature'(S533: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S534. When the command type is not'drift correction temperature'(S533: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S535.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the drift temperature included as the status (parameter value, see CMD: 8BH, D1 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the acquired command in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S534). ..

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S535). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector status reception processing.

[Projector drift correction processing]
FIG. 95 shows the projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the value of the drift correction monitoring counter of the sub RAM board 41 (S541). The drift correction monitoring counter is an addition counter for measuring the timing of periodically performing correction and monitoring of the temperature drift related to the optical characteristics of the projector device B2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (corresponding to approximately 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value (S542). When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S542: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S543. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than a predetermined value (S542: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S545.

Next, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter (S543).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command (see CMD: 83H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S544). At this time, the drift correction temperature (see CMD: 83H, D1, * 1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S544 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 in FIG. 89.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'(S545). When the reception command is'drift correction temperature'(S545: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S546. If the reception command is not the'drift correction temperature'(S545: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S546). The position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E. Such a position coefficient may be transmitted as a status from the projector control board B23, may be stored in advance in the sub ROM board 42 or the like, or may be stored in advance on the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment in FIG. 124, which will be described later. A menu for inputting the position coefficient of is provided so that it can be set.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and the position coefficient (S547). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature around the lens.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S547 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S548). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S548: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S548: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S549.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S549).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S550).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S551). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

(Memory map of scaler board SK)
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, various information is stored in the ROM included in the SDRAM 712 and the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The various storage areas shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 do not show all the information used in the scaler substrate SK. For example, the control program and the like executed by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK and the work area used by the MCU 700 are not shown in FIGS. 96 and 97.

As shown in FIG. 96, the SDRAM 712 has a first unit for receiving each command in order to exchange commands with the sub-control board SS, the projector control board B23, and the sub-liquid crystal I / F board SL. ~ 3rd reception storage area, 1st to 3rd transmission storage areas for transmitting commands to each, scaler LSI setting storage area for multi-output scaler LSI 710, status storage area, flag and other storage areas, multi-output scaler LSI 710 And the scaler LSI use area of the MCU (control LSI) 700 is provided. For example, the output 1st to 4th screen horizontal resolution, the output 1st to 4th screen vertical resolution, the input 1st and 2nd screen horizontal resolution, and the output 1st and 2nd screen vertical resolution are stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area. To. The flags and other storage areas store the first to third reception completion flags, the first to third EXT reception flags, the scaler LSI setting flag, the reset request flag, the transmission cycle counter, the error management area, and the self-diagnosis storage area. These stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the ROM of the MCU 700, as the initial setting values of the scaler LSI, the number of output divisions, the number of input divisions, the output horizontal resolutions of the first to fourth screens, and the vertical resolution of the first to fourth screens of the video , Input 1st and 2nd screen horizontal resolution, input 1st and 2nd screen vertical resolution are stored, and as serial line setting values, 1st to 3rd line baud rate, 1st to 3rd line data length, 1st ~ 3rd line parity and 1st to 3rd line stops are stored, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of scaler board SK)
[Scaler board main processing by MCU700]
FIG. 98 shows the scaler substrate main processing by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 700 performs an initialization process of the scaler board SK (S561). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first reception completion flag in the storage area are ‘ON’ (S562). When the first reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S562: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S563. When the first reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S562: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S568.

Next, the MCU 700 acquires the received data (command) from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S563).

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag and other first reception completion flags in the storage area to ‘OFF’ (S564).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'scaler (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)'(S565). When the destination ID indicates'scaler'(S565: Yes), the MCU700 shifts to the process of S567. If the destination ID does not indicate'scaler'(S565: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S566.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub-device bypass transmission process (S566). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the scaler (S567). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a scaler self-diagnosis process (S568). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the scaler (S569). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

Next, the MCU 700 performs the sub-control bypass transmission process (S570). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the reset request flag in the storage area are ‘ON’ (S571). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S571: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S572. If the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S571: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S573.

Next, the MCU 700 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S572). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU700. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the MCU 700, the MCU 700 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S561) in the scaler board main process (also referred to as “reboot”). The same applies to the projector control main process S700 and the sub liquid crystal control main process S871, which will be described later.

In S573, the MCU 700 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 700 waits for a cycle of, for example, 2 msec (S574). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S562.

[1st serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 99 shows the first serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The first serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process that captures received data in response to an external request from the sub-control board BB via the first serial line while executing the scaler board main process described above. The MCU 700 is configured to execute the second serial line reception interrupt process and the third serial line reception interrupt process in the same manner as the first serial line reception interrupt process. The second serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process for capturing received data in response to an external request from the projector control board B23 via the second serial line, and the third serial line reception interrupt process is a third serial line reception interrupt process. 3 This is a communication interrupt process for capturing received data in response to an external request from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL via a serial line. The second and third serial line reception interrupt processing are substantially the same as the first serial line reception interrupt processing except that the lines are different, and therefore the illustration thereof will be omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 99, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the received data from the first serial line (sub-control board SS) is'STX (02H)'indicating the start of the data (S581). When the received data is'STX'(S581: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S582. If the received data is not'STX'(S581: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S583.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first ETX reception flag and the first reception completion flag in the storage area to ‘OFF’, and clears the first reception storage area (S582). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S583, the MCU 700 stores the received data from the first serial line (sub-control board SS) in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the received data is'ETX (03H)'indicating the end of the data (S584). When the received data is'ETX'(S584: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S585. If the received data is not'ETX'(S584: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S586.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first ETX reception flag in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S585). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S586, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first ETX reception flag in the storage area are ‘ON’. When the first ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S586: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S587. If the first ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S586: No), the MCU700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a received data sum check process (S587).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S587 is normal (S588). When the sum value is normal (S588: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S590. If the sum value is not normal (S588: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S589. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as that described in the above-mentioned sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the MCU 700 discards the data in the first serial line reception storage area (S589). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S590, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first reception completion flag in the storage area to ‘ON’. After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

[Scaler initialization process]
FIG. 100 shows a scaler initialization process by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 initializes the internal functions (S601).

Next, the MCU 700 initializes the first to third serial lines (S602).

Next, the MCU 700 acquires various initial setting values related to the input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI710 from the ROM (S603).

Next, the MCU 700 performs initial settings related to the input / output of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S604). In this process, the MCU 700 performs initial settings for DSF (α) 821 and DSF (β) 822 and select areas A to D801 to 804 of the multi-output scaler LSI710 based on the initial setting values acquired from the ROM.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the scaler LSI setting flag and the reset request flag in the storage area to ‘OFF’ (S605). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler initialization process.

[Sub-device bypass transmission process]
FIG. 101 shows the sub-device bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates'projector (30H)'(S611). When the destination ID indicates'projector'(S611: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S612. When the destination ID does not indicate'projector'(S611: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S614.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the second transmission storage area (S612).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a second serial line transmission process (S613). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub-control board SS to the projector control board B23 to the second serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-device bypass transmission process.

In S614, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates'sub liquid crystal (ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)'. When the destination ID indicates'sub liquid crystal'(S614: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S615. When the destination ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal'(S614: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the third transmission storage area (S615).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a third serial line transmission process (S616). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub-control board SS to the sub-liquid crystal I / F board SL to the third serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-device bypass transmission process.

[Processing when receiving between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 102 shows the sub-control-inter-scaler reception processing by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, in the MCU 700, the command (CMD) of the received data (hereinafter referred to as “acquired received data” in this process) acquired from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 by S563 from the sub-control board SS is ‘ It is determined whether or not the status request (see CMD: 03H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'(S621). When the command of the acquired received data is'status request'(S621: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S622. If the command of the acquired received data is not'status request'(S621: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S624.

Next, the MCU 700 registers the transmission request of the command indicating the'status' according to the output setting (D1: 01H) and the input setting (D1: 02H) of the'status request' to the sub-control board SS (S622). ).

Next, the MCU 700 stores various parameter values (D1) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S623). After that, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the scaler.

In S624, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed'(S624: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S625. If the command of the acquired received data is not "setting completed" (S624: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S626.

Next, the MCU 700 changes the setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 with the set value in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S625). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S626, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'startup parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is ‘start parameter request confirmation’ (S626: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S627. If the command of the acquired received data is not'confirm activation parameter request'(S626: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S628.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the flag scaler LSI setting flag in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S627). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S628, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is "the number of output screen division settings (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)". When the command of the acquired received data is "number of output screen division settings" (S628: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S629. When the command of the acquired received data is not "the number of output screen division settings" (S628: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S630.

Next, the MCU 700 stores the number of output screen division settings included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S629). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S630, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'output screen resolution setting'(S630: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S631. If the command of the acquired received data is not "output screen resolution setting" (S630: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S632.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the output screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S631). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S632, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is "the number of input screen division settings (see CMD: 07H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)". When the command of the acquired received data is "number of input screen division settings" (S632: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S633. When the command of the acquired received data is not "the number of input screen division settings" (S632: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S634.

Next, the MCU 700 stores the number of input screen division settings included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S633). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S634, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'input screen resolution setting'(S634: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S635. When the command of the acquired received data is not'input screen resolution setting'(S634: No), the command of the acquired received data is'status request completed (see CMD: 04H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'in the MCU700. Therefore, the process proceeds to S636.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S635).

Next, the MCU 700 registers a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'to the sub-control board SS (S636). After that, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the scaler.

[Scaler self-diagnosis process]
FIG. 103 shows the scaler self-diagnosis process by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the SDRAM 712 by the verify check (S641).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S642). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S642: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S644. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S642: No), the MCU 700 proceeds to the next process of S643.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S643).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S644).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 is normal (S645). When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 is normal (S645: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S647. If the status of the multi-output scaler LSI710 is not normal (S645: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S646.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'WDT (watchdog timer) -scaler abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S646).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the output setting of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S647).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the output setting stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the output setting of the implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same set value (S648). When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting have the same set value (S648: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S650. When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting are different setting values (S648: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S649.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'scaler output setting error'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S649).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the input settings of the multi-output scaler LSI710 (S650).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the input settings stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the input settings for the implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same set values (S651). When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting have the same set value (S651: Yes), the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process. When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting are different setting values (S651: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S652.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'scaler input setting error'as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S652). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 104 shows the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the scaler by the MCU700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S661). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting commands from the scaler board SK.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 100 or more as a predetermined value (S662). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S662: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S663. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than a predetermined value (S662: No), the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the scaler. In the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned scaler substrate main processing is configured to be performed at a cycle of 2 msec, a value of the transmission cycle counter of 100 or more is 2 msec × 100 = 200 msec or more. As a result, data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS at a cycle of approximately 200 msec, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined value of the transmission cycle counter is an arbitrary value (for example, transmission cycle counter: 50 × 2 msec). = 100 msec cycle).

Next, the MCU 700 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S663).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the scaler LSI setting flag in the storage area are “OFF” (S664). When the scaler LSI setting flag is ‘OFF’ (S664: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S665. When the scaler LSI setting flag is not ‘OFF’ (S664: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S666.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'startup parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'as transmission data for the sub-control board SS (S665). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S665, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S666, the MCU 700 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the SDRAM 712. When the error data exists in the error management area (S666: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S667. If there is no error data in the error management area (S666: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S669.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'error notification (see CMD: 05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'as transmission data to the sub-control board SS (S667). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the reset request flag in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S668). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S669, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request of a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S669: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S670. When there is no transmission request of the command indicating'reception confirmation'(S669: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S671.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'reception confirmation'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S670). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S670, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S671, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for a command indicating'status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request of a command indicating'status'(S671: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S672. If there is no request to send a command indicating'status'(S671: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S675.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 is the data related to the output setting (S672). When the data in the status storage area is the data related to the output setting (D1: 01H) (S672: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S673. When the data in the status storage area is not the data related to the output setting, that is, the data related to the input setting (D1: 02H) (S672: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S674.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating "status" related to the output setting to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S673). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S673, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S674, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating "status" related to the input setting to the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the first serial line transmission process of S676 described later. After the processing of S674, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S675, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'parameter request'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the next first serial line transmission process of S676.

Next, the MCU 700 performs the first serial line transmission process (S676). By this transmission process, various commands are transmitted from the scaler board SK to the sub-control board SS. After that, the MCU 700 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the scaler.

[Sub-control bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 105 shows the sub-control bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the second reception completion flag in the storage area are'ON'(S681). When the second reception completion flag is'ON'(S681: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S682. When the second reception completion flag is not'ON'(S681: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control'(S682). When the destination ID indicates'sub-control'(S682: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next process of S683. When the destination ID does not indicate'sub-control'(S682: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the process of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S683). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S687.

In S684, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the third reception completion flag in the storage area are ‘ON’ (S684). When the third reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S684: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S685. If the third reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S684: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control'(S685). When the destination ID indicates'sub-control'(S685: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the next processing of S686. If the destination ID does not indicate'sub-control'(S685: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once captured in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S686).

Next, the MCU 700 performs the first serial line transmission process (S687). By this transmission process, various data are transmitted from the sub device (projector control board B23, sub liquid crystal I / F board SL) to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

(Memory map of projector control board B23)
As shown in FIG. 106, various information is stored in the DRAM included in the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the EEPROM 231 and the ROM included in the control LSI 230.

As shown in FIG. 106, the DRAM of the control LSI 230 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, various flags & work areas, a general setting value storage area, a setting data storage area, and various work areas (not shown). .. For example, various flags & work areas include reception completion flag, EXT reception flag, start setting flag, horizontal position setting flag, vertical position setting flag, focus position setting flag, error management area, transmission cycle counter, status storage area, and reset. The request flag and self-diagnosis storage area are stored. In the general setting value storage area, horizontal positions A to E offset, vertical positions A to E offset, focus position offsets A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, and white color Stores temperature settings, brightness settings, gamma settings, and contrast settings. The setting data storage area stores horizontal position adjustment value, vertical position adjustment value, focus position adjustment value, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, gamma setting, and contrast setting. .. These stored information will be described later.

Further, the EEPROM 231 is provided with a basic setting value storage area. The horizontal position A to E adjustment value, the vertical position A to E adjustment value, and the focus position A to E adjustment value are stored in the basic setting value storage area. The ROM of the control LSI 230 stores an LED temperature table, a control program of the projector control board B23 (not shown), and various constant values. These stored information will be described later.

(Processing of projector control board B23)
[Projector control main processing by control LSI 230]
FIG. 107 shows the projector control main process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S691). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S692). When the reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S692: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S693. When the reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S692: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S693).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area to ‘OFF’ (S694).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates a'projector (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)'(S695). When the destination ID indicates'projector'(S695: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S696. When the destination ID does not indicate'projector'(S695: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception processing (S696). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S697). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector-to-projector transmission time process (S698). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reset request flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S699). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S699: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S700. When the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S699: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S701.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S700). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S691) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S701, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S702). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S692.

[Projector serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 108 shows the projector serial line reception interrupt processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. This process is a communication interrupt process that captures received data in response to an external request via the second serial line while executing the above-mentioned projector control main process.

As shown in FIG. 108, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the data received from the second serial line is'STX (02H)'indicating the start of the data (S711). When the received data is'STX'(S711: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S712. When the received data is not ‘STX’ (S711: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S713.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the various flags & work areas of the DRAM to ‘OFF’ and clears the reception storage area (S712). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S713, the control LSI 230 stores the received data from the second serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data is'ETX'indicating the end of the data (S714). When the received data is'ETX'(S714: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S715. When the received data is not'ETX'(S714: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S716.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and the ETX reception flag in the work area to ‘ON’ (S715). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S716, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the ETX reception flag in the work area are ‘ON’. When the ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S716: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S717. When the ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S716: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a received data sum check process (S717).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S717 is normal (S718). When the sum value is normal (S718: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S720. If the sum value is not normal (S718: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S719. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as that described in the above-mentioned sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S719). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S720, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area to ‘ON’. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

[Projector initialization process]
FIG. 109 shows the projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 initializes the internal functions (S721).

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes the second serial line (S722).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, and other common settings from the EEPROM 231 (S723).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S723 (S724).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus adjustment value A (focus on the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D) from the EEPROM 231 (S725).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the data acquired in S725 (S726). Specifically, according to the electric focus control process, a motor drive signal (excitation signal) for the focus motor 242C is output to adjust the focus to the focus position. The same applies to the process of S755 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM (S727). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

[Sub-control-Processing when receiving between projectors]
FIG. 110 shows the sub-control-projector reception processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command (CMD) of the received data acquired from the second serial line is a'status request'(S731). When the command of the received data acquired from the reception storage area of the DRAM in S693 (hereinafter referred to as "acquired received data" in this process) is "status request" (S731: Yes), the control LSI 230 is next. The process proceeds to S732. If the command of the acquired received data is not'status request'(S731: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S734.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers a command transmission request corresponding to the status (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56) according to the'status request'of the sub-control board SS (S732).

Next, the control LSI 230 stores various parameter values (see CMD: 83H, D1, * 1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S733). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the projector.

In S734, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD: 82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed'(S734: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S735. If the command of the acquired received data is not "setting completed" (S734: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S736.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector internal setting change process (S735). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111. After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S742.

In S736, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'startup parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 81H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'start parameter request confirmation'(S736: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S737. If the command of the acquired received data is not'start parameter request confirmation'(S736: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S738.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the DRAM flag and other activation setting flags in the storage area to ‘ON’ (S737). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S742.

In S738, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is a setting-related command (see CMD: 85H to 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). When the command of the acquired received data is a command related to setting (S738: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S739. If the acquired received data command is not a setting-related command (S738: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S740.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector set value storage process (S739). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S742.

In S740, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is a'test pattern (see CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'test pattern'(S740: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S741. When the command of the acquired received data is not a'test pattern'(S740: No), the control LSI 230 is because the command of the acquired received data is'status request completed (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. , S742.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a test pattern display process (S741). According to this process, when the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is performed, a test pattern for the operator to confirm the adjustment state is displayed as a projected image by the projector device B2. When displaying the test pattern, the simple test pattern is displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 as a virtual image by simulation. The display mode of this simple test pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S742). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub-control and the projector.

[Projector internal setting change process]
FIG. 111 shows a projector internal setting change process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the start setting flag in the work area are'ON'(S751). When the start setting flag is'ON'(S751: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S752. When the start setting flag is not'ON'(S751: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S757.

Next, the control LSI 230 is subjected to the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, the LED brightness setting value, the trapezoidal distortion correction value, and the white from the basic setting value storage area of the EEPROM 231 and the general setting value storage area of the DRAM. The value of the color temperature setting, the value of the brightness setting, the value of the gamma setting, and the value of the contrast setting are acquired (S752).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S752 (S753).

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is the focus position A adjustment value + the focus position offset A as the control data value of the focus position (S754).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S754 (S755).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and all the setting flags in the work area to ‘OFF’ (S756). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

In S757, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position types (A to E) are set in the various flags of the DRAM and the horizontal position setting flags in the work area. When the position type is set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S758. When the position type is not set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S760.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a horizontal position (change) adjustment value + a horizontal position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the horizontal position of the image projection (S758). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the horizontal position adjustment values A to E and the horizontal position offsets A to E. For example, if the change is (B), the horizontal position control data value is the horizontal position B adjustment value + the horizontal position B offset.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the horizontal position setting flags in the work area (S759). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S763.

In S760, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position types (A to E) are set in the various flags of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flags in the work area. When the position type is set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S761. When the position type is not set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S764.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a vertical position (change) adjustment value + a vertical position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the vertical position of the image projection (S761). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the vertical position adjustment values A to E and the vertical position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flags in the work area (S762).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the control data value acquired in S758 or S761 (S763). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

In S764, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the position type (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM and the focus position setting flag in the work area. When the position type is set in the focus position setting flag (S764: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S765. When the position type is not set in the focus position setting flag (S764: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is focus position (change) adjustment value + focus position offset (change) + focus drift correction (change) as the control data value of the focus position (S765). Note that (change) corresponds to the changed positions of the focus adjustment values A to E and the focus position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the various flags of the DRAM and the focus position setting flags in the work area (S766).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S765 (S767), as in S755. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

[Projector setting value storage process]
FIG. 112 shows the projector set value storage process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 performs the setting range determination process based on the set value data of the received data acquired from the reception storage area in S693 (S771). In this setting range determination process, it is determined whether or not the value is in the range described in the parameter column of CMD: 85H to 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and the determination result is returned as a return value.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired set value data is valid data from the return value of the determination result (S772). When the acquired set value data is valid data (S772: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S773. If the acquired set value data is not valid data (S772: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired set value is of a type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (see the basic set value, CMD: 89H, 8B, 90H shown in the right column of FIG. 56, and EEPROM shown in FIG. 106). (S773). When the acquired set value is a type to be saved in the EEPROM 231 (S773: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S774. The acquired setting value is not the type to be saved in EEPROM 231. That is, the general setting value to be saved in DRAM (CMD: 85H to 88H, 8AH, 8CH to 8FH, 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56 and DRAM shown in FIG. 106). ) Etc. (S773: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S776.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the source ID of the acquired data is a'adjustment PC (ID: 05H shown in FIG. 53)'(S774). When the source ID is'adjustment PC'(S774: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S775. If the source ID is not the'adjustment PC'(S774: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 stores the acquired set value in a designated position in the basic set value storage area (see EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) of the EEPROM 231 (S775). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process. As a result, the basic setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the EEPROM 231 according to the operation of the adjustment PC 1000.

In S776, the control LSI 230 stores the acquired set value in a designated position in the general set value storage area (see DRAM shown in FIG. 106) of the DRAM. As a result, the general setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the DRAM not only by the operation of the adjustment PC1000 but also by the operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of installation value is the horizontal position offset (S777). When the type of the installation value is horizontal position offset (S777: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S778. When the type of the installation value is not the horizontal position offset (S777: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S779.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM and the horizontal position setting flags in the work area (S778). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

In S779, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of the set value is the vertical position offset. When the type of the installation value is vertical position offset (S779: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S780. When the type of the installation value is not the vertical position offset (S779: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S781.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM and the vertical position setting flags in the work area (S780). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

In S781, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of set value is the focus position offset. When the type of the set value is the focus position offset (S781: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S782. When the type of the installation value is not the focus position offset (S781: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the position types (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM and the focus position setting flags in the work area (S782). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector set value storage process.

[Projector self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 113 shows the projector self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verification check (S791).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S792). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S792: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S794. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S792: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S793.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'self-diagnosis error (see projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57)'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S793).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S794). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor B25.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S797. If the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S795: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S796.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'LED temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S796). Specifically, the temperature sensor B25 detects the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the lens unit B21. The control LSI 230 measures each temperature through the temperature sensor B25, and when the condition in the LED temperature abnormality condition column of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57 is satisfied, the value in the status column is the error management of the DRAM. Set in the area. For example, the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G is a warning (01B (B means Bit)) when the temperature near the LED light source 240G detected by the temperature sensor B25 is 105 ° C. or higher and lower than 110 ° C. )) Is set, and if the temperature is 110 ° C. or higher, the shutdown (11B) is set.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN rotation diagnosis process (S797). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the fans 244A, 244B, and 245.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S800. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S798: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S799.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'FAN rotation abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S799). Specifically, similarly to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the FAN rotation abnormality is set according to the conditions of the FAN1 to 4 rotation abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power supply diagnosis process (S800). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage supplied to the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S803. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S801: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S802.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'voltage abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S802). Specifically, as in the case of the LED temperature abnormality described above, the voltage abnormality is set according to the voltage abnormality condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S803). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S806. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S804: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S805.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'DLP abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S805). Specifically, similarly to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the DLP abnormality is set according to the WDT-DLP condition of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not data indicating'LED temperature abnormality'(forced shutdown),' FAN rotation abnormality', or'voltage abnormality'is set in the error management area (S806). .. When data indicating any of the above abnormalities is set in the error management area (S806: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S307. When none of the data indicating the above abnormality is set in the error management area (S806: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

Next, the control LSI 230 issues a rotation stop command to the FAN 1-3 (fans 244A, 244B, 245), or a DLP control circuit 232 or the LED (R, G, B) (LED substrate 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba). To issue a drive stop command (S807). As a result, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. In the present embodiment, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped when the data indicating'LED temperature abnormality',' FAN rotation abnormality', or'voltage abnormality'is set in the error management area. The power must be turned off for recovery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the projector device B2 may be restarted when the abnormality being generated is recovered while the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped.

[Sub-control-Processing during transmission between projectors]
FIG. 114 shows the sub-control-projector-to-projector transmission processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S811). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting commands from the projector control board B23.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 125 (4 msec × 125 = 500 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S812). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (500 msec or more has elapsed since the previous transmission) (S812: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S813. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than a predetermined value (S812: No), the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S813).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the projector setting flag in the work area are ‘OFF’ (S814). When the projector setting flag is ‘OFF’ (S814: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S815. When the projector setting flag is not ‘OFF’ (S814: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S816.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'startup parameter request'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S815). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission process of S825 described later. After the processing of S815, the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S825.

In S816, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM. When the error data exists in the error management area (S816: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S817. When there is no error data in the error management area (S816: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S820.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'error notification (CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56 and FIG. 57)'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S817). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission process of S825 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the error data in the error management area is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818). When the error data is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S819. When the error data is neither the self-diagnosis abnormality nor the data indicating the DLP abnormality (S818: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags of the DRAM and the reset request flag in the work area to ‘ON’ (S819). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S825.

In S820, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request of a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S820: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S821. When there is no transmission request for the command indicating'reception confirmation'(S820: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S822.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'reception confirmation'to the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S821). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the second serial line transmission process of S825 described later. After the processing of S821, the control LSI 230 shifts to the processing of S825.

In S822, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a command transmission request corresponding to the status (see left column CMD: 85H to 8BH in FIG. 56) to the sub-control board SS. When there is a command transmission request corresponding to the status (S822: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S823. If there is no command transmission request corresponding to the status (S823: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S824.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a status transmission data creation process (S823). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 115. After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S825.

In S824, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating'parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'as transmission data for the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the next second serial line transmission process of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a second serial line transmission process (S825). By this transmission process, various commands are transmitted from the projector control board B23 to the sub-control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector.

[Status transmission data creation process]
FIG. 115 shows the status transmission data creation process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the DRAM status storage area is the LED temperature (S831). When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED temperature (S831: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S832. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED temperature (S831: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S834.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensors B25 of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B to generate temperature data (S832).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the temperature data (CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) as a parameter in the'LED temperature (CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command ( S833). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S834, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed. When the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed (S834: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S835. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the FAN rotation speed (S834: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S837.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the number of rotation pulses of FAN1 (intake fan 244A), FAN2 (intake fan 244B), and FAN3 (exhaust fan 245) as rotation pulse data (S835).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the FAN rotation pulse number as a parameter in the'FAN rotation speed (CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S836). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S837, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness. When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness (S837: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S838. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED brightness (S837: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S840.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the luminance data of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B from the DLP control circuit 232 (S838).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the LED luminance data acquired from the'LED luminance number (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command including the LED luminance setting in the status as a parameter (S839). .. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S840, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is a horizontal adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the horizontal adjustment value (S840: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S841. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the horizontal adjustment value (S840: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S843.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S841).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the horizontal position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the'horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S842). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S843, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is a vertical adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the vertical adjustment value (S843: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S844. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the vertical adjustment value (S843: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S846.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the vertical position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S844).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the vertical position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the'vertical direction adjustment value (see CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S845). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S846, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the focus adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the focus adjustment value (S846: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S847. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the focus adjustment value (S846: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S849.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S847).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the focus position A to E adjustment values as parameters in the'focus adjustment value (see CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command (S848). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S849, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature (S849: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S850. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 related to the drift correction temperature and generates drift correction temperature sensor data (S850).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a'drift correction temperature (see CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'command including the drift correction temperature sensor data in the status as transmission data (S851). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

(Memory map of sub liquid crystal I / F board SL)
As shown in FIG. 116, various information is stored in the DRAM and ROM included in the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

As shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM of the MCU 900 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, a flag area, various storage areas, and a sub liquid crystal setting storage area. For example, the reception completion flag, the EXT reception flag, and the sub liquid crystal setting flag are stored in the flag area. The transmission cycle counter, the status storage area, the reset request flag, the error management area, and the self-diagnosis storage area are stored in the various storage areas. Horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and brightness are stored in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area. These stored information will be described later.

Further, the ROM of the MCU900 stores the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the brightness as the data values of the liquid crystal initial setting area, and the baud rate (third serial line), the data length, and the parity as the serial line setting values. The stop is stored, and the diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. These stored information will be described later. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM stores various other work areas used by the MCU 900, and the ROM stores control programs and constant data executed by the MCU 900.

(Processing of sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL)
[Sub LCD control main processing by MCU900]
FIG. 117 shows the sub liquid crystal control main process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal initialization process (S861). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a touch panel input process (S862). In this process, the MCU 900 performs a predetermined operation based on an operation signal (a signal corresponding to a touch operation, a flick operation, and a pinch operation) from the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM is ‘ON’ (S863). When the reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S863: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S864. If the reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S863: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 acquires the received data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S864).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘OFF’ (S865).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'sub liquid crystal (ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)'(S866). When the destination ID indicates'sub liquid crystal'(S866: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next processing of S867. When the destination ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal'(S866: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub-control-sub-liquid crystal reception processing (S867). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process (S868). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission time process (S869). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reset request flag in various storage areas of the DRAM is ‘ON’ (S870). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S870: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S871. If the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S870: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S872.

Next, the MCU 900 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S871). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU900. The watchdog timer When the reset signal is output to the MCU 900, the MCU 900 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S861) of the sub liquid crystal control main process (also referred to as "reboot").

In S872, the MCU 900 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 900 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S873). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S862.

[Sub LCD serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. This process is a communication interrupt process that captures received data in response to an external request via the third serial line while executing the above-mentioned sub liquid crystal control main process.

As shown in FIG. 118, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the data received from the third serial line is'STX (02H)'indicating the beginning of the data (S881). When the received data is'STX'(S881: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S882. If the received data is not'STX'(S881: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S883.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the DRAM flag area to ‘OFF’ and clears the reception storage area (S882). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S883, the MCU 900 stores the received data from the third serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the received data is'ETX (03H)'indicating the end of the data (S884). When the received data is'ETX'(S884: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S885. If the received data is not'ETX'(S884: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S886.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘ON’ (S885). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S886, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM is ‘ON’. When the ETX reception flag is ‘ON’ (S886: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S887. If the ETX reception flag is not ‘ON’ (S886: No), the MCU900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a received data sum check process (S887).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S887 is normal (S888). When the sum value is normal (S888: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S890. If the sum value is not normal (S888: No), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S889. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as that described in the above-mentioned sub-device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the MCU 900 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S889). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S890, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘ON’. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

[Sub LCD initialization process]
FIG. 119 shows the sub liquid crystal initialization process of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL by the MCU 900. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 initializes the internal function (S891).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the third serial line (S892).

Next, the MCU 900 performs screen initial setting of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 based on the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the brightness stored in the ROM (S893).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the touch panel DD19T (S894).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag and the reset request flag to ‘OFF’ in the DRAM flag area and various storage areas (S895). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal initialization process.

[Processing when receiving between sub-control and sub-LCD]
FIG. 120 shows the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal reception processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the received data acquired from the third serial line in S864 is a'status request (see CMD: 43H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' (S901). When the command of the acquired received data is'status request'(S901: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S902. If the command of the acquired received data is not'status request'(S901: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S904.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request of a command indicating "status" in response to the "status request" (S902).

Next, the MCU 900 stores various parameter values included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S903). After that, the MCU 900 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

In S904, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed'(S904: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S905. If the command of the acquired received data is not "setting completed" (S904: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S906.

Next, the MCU 900 changes the setting of the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL with the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S905). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S906, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 41H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'start parameter request confirmation'(S906: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S907. If the command of the acquired received data is not'confirm activation parameter request'(S906: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S908.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM to ‘ON’ (S907). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S908, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is a'sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' command. When the command of the acquired received data is the'sub LCD screen resolution setting'command (S908: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next processing of S909. When the command of the acquired received data is not the'sub LCD screen resolution setting'command (S908: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S910.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the set value of the sub liquid crystal screen resolution of the received data acquired in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S909). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S910, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'sub liquid crystal brightness setting (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is'sub liquid crystal brightness setting'(S910: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S911. If the command of the acquired received data is not'sub LCD brightness setting'(S910: No), the command of the acquired received data is'status request completed (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)', so the MCU900 Moves to the process of S912.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the brightness setting value of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S911). According to such a process, when the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is performed, the resolution and the brightness thereof are arbitrarily changed so that the operator who visually recognizes the simple test pattern through the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can easily see the pattern. be able to.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request for a command indicating'reception confirmation'(S912). After that, the MCU 900 ends the processing at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

[Sub LCD self-diagnosis process]
FIG. 121 shows the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verification check (S921).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S922). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S922: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S924. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S922: No), the MCU900 proceeds to the next process of S923.

Next, the MCU 900 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S923).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the status (operating state) of the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL (S924).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925). When the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is normal (S925: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S927. When the status of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL is not normal (S925: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S926.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "WDT-sub liquid crystal abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S926).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the actual data (actual resolution, brightness, etc.) related to the sub liquid crystal image setting (S927).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same set value (S928). When the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same set value (S928: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S930. When the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting do not match (S928: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S929.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "sub liquid crystal screen setting error (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S929).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the temperature information (sensor temperature) based on the signal of the temperature sensor (not shown) incorporated in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S930).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sensor temperature is 100 ° C. or higher (S931). When the sensor temperature is 100 ° C. or higher (S931: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next process of S931. When the sensor temperature is less than 100 ° C. (S931: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S933.

Next, the MCU 900 sets'sub liquid crystal temperature abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S932).

Next, the MCU 900 performs an operation state determination process of the touch panel DD19T (S933).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the ON state (either a touch, flick, or pinch state) of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934). When the ON state of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S935. If the state is not detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S936.

Next, the MCU900 sets "touch panel input error (see sub-liquid crystal I / F board error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S935).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the status, the set value, or the data indicating'temperature abnormality'is set in the error management area (S936). When any of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the next process of S937. When none of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: No), the MCU900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal operation stop process (S937). As a result, the operations of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T are stopped. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

[Sub-control-sub-LCD transmission processing]
FIG. 122 shows the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU900 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter (S941). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting commands from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 50 (200 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S942). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S942: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S943. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than a predetermined value (S942: No), the MCU900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

Next, the MCU 900 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S943).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM (S944). When the error data exists in the error management area (S944: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S945. If there is no error data in the error management area (S944: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S947.

Next, the MCU 900 issues an'error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command to the sub-control board SS in the error management area (CMD: 45H, D1: error information shown in the left column of FIG. 55). (See) is added to create transmission data (S945). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reset request flag in various storage areas of the DRAM to ‘ON’ (S946). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S947, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM is ‘OFF’. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is ‘OFF’ (S947: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S948. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is not ‘OFF’ (S947: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S949.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data for the'start parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command to the sub-control board SS (S948). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S948, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S949, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a transmission request for the'reception confirmation'command to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request of the'receipt confirmation'command (S949: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S950. If there is no transmission request for the'receipt confirmation'command (S949: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S951.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data for the'reception confirmation (see CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command to the sub-control board SS (S950). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S950, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S951, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a request for transmitting a'status' command to the sub-control board SS. When there is a transmission request for the'status' command (S951: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S952. If there is no request to send the'status' command (S951: No), the MCU900 shifts to the process of S955.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the data type of the DRAM status storage area is related to touch input (S952). When the data type of the status storage area is related to touch input (S952: Yes), the MCU900 shifts to the next processing of S953. When the data type of the status storage area is not related to the touch input, that is, related to the liquid crystal setting (S952: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the process of S954.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data by adding data in the touch panel input area to the'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'command related to touch input to the sub-control board SS (S953). ). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S953, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S954, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'related to the liquid crystal setting to the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the third serial line transmission process of S956 described later. After the processing of S954, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S955, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'to the sub-control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub-control board SS by the next third serial line transmission process of S956.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a third serial line transmission process (S956). By this transmission process, various commands are transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

(Optical adjustment of projector device B2)
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a test pattern projected at the time of optical adjustment of the projector device B2. The factory inspector (also referred to as the quality assurance person) starts the application software for optical adjustment on the adjustment PC1000, and performs a predetermined operation according to the software menu to perform the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1. Alternatively, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be operated to display the test pattern TP as shown in FIG. 123 on each projection surface. FIG. 123 shows, as an example, a state in which the test pattern TP is displayed on the reflective portion D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D. The factory inspection worker can observe such a display mode of the test pattern TP from the upper display window UD1 of the gaming machine 1.

The test pattern TP is, for example, a color scheme in which SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) color bars are sprited in a circle and small circular patterns arranged at four corners are arranged on a crosshatch pattern in the background. Is.

Specifically, the factory inspector operates any of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 to be the projection target, and each time the projection target is switched. While observing the display mode of the test pattern TP, the projector device B2 can be adjusted so that the display mode is appropriate. As a result, for the projector device B2, horizontal position adjustment value, vertical position adjustment value, focus position adjustment value, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test. Optical adjustment can be performed for each item such as a pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and the like.

In the present embodiment, at the time of adjustment work such as before assembling the game machine in, for example, the identification symbols'A'to'C' are assigned to each of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. Using these identification symbols, the horizontal positions A to C adjustment values, the vertical positions A to C adjustment values, and the focus positions A to C adjustment values, which are different for each projection target, are set in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23. Other adjustment items (LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset) are performed by the gaming machine. After being assembled, it is set in SRAM 401 of the sub-control board SS. The horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, and the focus position offset can be changed by the maintenance worker at the site such as the amusement park by adjusting the offsets, which have been adjusted at the factory or the like.

On the other hand, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a test pattern TP'and the like displayed on the screen (touch panel DD19T) of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 at the time of optical adjustment of the projector device B2 in the field such as a game hall. After the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall or the like, the maintenance worker can display the test pattern TP'or the like on the touch panel DD19T which is the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 by performing a predetermined operation. .. The maintenance worker can appropriately individually adjust the optical of the projector device B2 by using such a test pattern TP'.

The test pattern TP'displayed on the touch panel DD19T is different from the test pattern TP displayed directly on the projection target, and is displayed as an operation target that can be intuitively transformed as a virtual image by simulation. In addition, the touch panel DD19T displays buttons T1 and T2 for changing the settings of horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction for each projection target, as well as trapezoidal distortion correction and LED brightness. , The button T3 and the indicator T4 for changing the settings of the white color temperature, the brightness, the contrast, and the gamma value are displayed, and the numeric keypad T5 for inputting various numerical values is also displayed.

Specifically, the maintenance worker displays the test pattern TP'or the like on the touch panel DD19T by performing a predetermined operation, and any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is projected. Operate to be the target. After that, the maintenance worker selects one of horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction by operating the buttons T1 and T2, and directly presses the test pattern TP'by touch panel operation. It is possible to make adjustments so that the display mode becomes appropriate while changing the display mode. That is, in the test pattern TP', the display position changes up, down, left and right, and the image quality changes according to the operation of the maintenance worker. As a result, with respect to the projector device B2, the settings of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction can be changed for each different projection target. At this time, the maintenance worker can also observe the actual test pattern TP because the test pattern TP is projected from the projector device B2 on the national screen mechanism D at the same time. The horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction are set in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

In addition, the maintenance worker operates the button T3, the numeric keypad T5, etc. while observing the test pattern TP along with the actual test pattern TP to correct the trapezoidal distortion, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value. It is possible to change the settings for each item such as by directly inputting numerical values. At this time, the overall shape or color tone of the test pattern TP'changes according to the operation of the maintenance worker. The values of each item such as trapezoidal distortion correction, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, and gamma value whose settings have been changed in this way are the projector set value storage area of SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the sub RAM board 41. It is set in the projector setting value storage area of.

Next, a modification of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Cooling structure of projector device)
FIG. 125 shows a first modification of the projector device. The projector device X shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. Inside the bottom plate X21 and the cover case X22, a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including a projection lens 210, LED light sources (240R, 240G, 240B) and a DMD (similar to those described above). An optical mechanism (not shown) including 241) and the like is provided, and an exhaust fan 245, heat sinks 2430 and 2431, and a heat sink 243Xa are further provided. A heat sink 243Xc is externally attached to the outside of the cover case X22 so that the entire cover case X22 is exposed. An opening X22B for guiding the irradiation light from the projection lens 210 to the outside is provided on one surface of the cover case X22 (the front surface in FIG. 125). The projector device X of the first modification is directly attached to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, and is provided so as to directly guide the irradiation light to the projection target without passing through a mirror.

An LED light source (240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba) and a DMD substrate (241a) (not shown) are provided in contact with one side (lower side in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430. Another heat radiating plate 2431 is arranged so as to overlap the other one side (upper surface in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and the two heat radiating plates 2430 and 2431 are surface-mounted by screws. A heat-conducting sheet (or heat-conducting gel) is attached to the surface where the heat-dissipating plate 2430 and the heat-dissipating plate 2431 are in contact with each other, and the heat-dissipating plate 2430 is spirally cut with a tap for fixing screws (shown in the figure). Z). A mounting hole for screwing with a screw is provided on the upper surface of the heat radiating plate 2431. Further, by removing the screw of the heat radiating plate 2431, it is possible to remove the heat pipe 243Xd and the heat sink 243Xc. The heat radiating plate 2430 is connected so as to transfer the heat generated by the LED light source or the DMD substrate to the heat sink 243Xa via the heat pipe 243Xb. The heat dissipated in the air by the heat sink 243Xa is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 245 through the exhaust port X22D provided in the cover case X22.

On the other hand, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected so as to transfer heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. The heat pipe 243Xd extends from the inside of the cover case X22 to the outside through the hole X22A provided in the cover case X22, and is connected to the heat sink 243Xc provided on the outside. That is, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected so as to receive the heat generated by the LED light source or the DMD substrate from the heat radiating plate 2430 and further transfer the heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. As a result, the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate is transferred to the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat sink 2431 and the heat pipe 243Xd, and is guided to the outside of the projector device X by the heat sink 243Xc. The heat is exhausted. Even with such an external heat sink 243Xc, the heat accumulation inside the projector device X can be effectively eliminated, and overheating of optical components such as lenses can be prevented.

FIG. 126 shows a second modification of the projector device. The projector device X'shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22, as in the case of the first modification described above, and a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including a projection lens 210 inside the bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. An optical mechanism (not shown) including an LED light source (240R, 240G, 240B) and a DMD (241) is provided, and an exhaust fan 245, a heat sink 2430, and a heat sink 243Xa, 243Xc are provided. There is. The heat sink 243Xc is arranged as follows, unlike the one according to the first modification described above.

The heat sink 243Xc is directly bonded to one side (upper side in FIG. 126) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and is provided so that heat can be directly transferred from the heat radiating plate 2430. Further, the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc is exposed to the outside through an opening X22C provided on one surface (upper surface in FIG. 126) of the cover case X22. According to such an arrangement structure of the heat sink 243Xc, the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate is efficiently transferred to the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat radiating plate 2430, and the projector device X The heat will be exhausted outside the. Even with the heat sink 243Xc in which the fin portion is exposed to the outside, the heat accumulation inside the projector device X can be effectively eliminated, and overheating of optical parts such as a lens can be prevented.

FIG. 127 shows an arrangement form of the projector device according to the third modification. Although the detailed structure of the projector device X ”shown in the figure is not shown, the same structure as the projector device X'shown in FIG. 126 described above is adopted except that a heat sink exposed to the outside is not provided. That is, in the projector device X ”, a heat radiating plate 2430 is provided so as to face the opening X22C of the cover case X22 instead of the heat sink 243Xc described above, and the upper surface of the heat radiating plate 2430 is slightly protruding from the opening X22C. It is exposed (not shown in FIG. 127). In such a projector device X, a heat sink 2430 exposed from the opening X22C of the cover case X22 is connected to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G via a metal heat conductive member Y, and is not shown with respect to the upper surface wall G4. It is attached via an attachment. The upper surface wall G4 is made of a metal plate-like member having high thermal conductivity such as stainless steel. According to the attachment structure of such a projector device X, it occurs inside the device. The heat is efficiently transferred to the upper surface wall G4 through the heat radiating plate 2430 and the heat guiding member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 itself functions as a heat radiating member. Therefore, the heat accumulation inside the projector device X "is effectively eliminated. It is possible to prevent overheating of optical parts such as lenses.

FIG. 128 shows the circuit configuration of the projector device applied to the fourth modification to the twentieth modification described later. The projector device B2 as shown in FIG. 33 is also applied to the fourth modification to the twentieth modification. Therefore, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 128, the projector device B2 applied to the fourth modification to the twentieth modification has the first temperature sensor B25a, the second temperature sensor B25b, the intake air temperature sensor B26a, as electrical components. The exhaust temperature sensor B26b and a plurality of pulse sensors B27a, B27b, B27c are included. Further, the projector device B2 supplies electric power to intake fans 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), exhaust fans 245 (FAN3), LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, DMD substrate 241a, and the like (not shown). The power supply circuit B20 is also included.

The first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b perform the same functions as the temperature sensor B25 described above. The first temperature sensor B25a is provided so as to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240R on the LED substrate 240Ra and output the temperature detection signal to the projector control substrate B23. The second temperature sensor B25b is provided so as to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240G or the vicinity of the LED light source 240B on the LED substrate 240Ga or the LED substrate 240Ba and output the temperature detection signal to the projector control substrate B23. As described above, regarding the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B, the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light source 240R tends to be relatively low. Specifically, the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a. As for the temperature sensors B25a and B25b of this type, only one of them may be provided according to the specifications. When the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b are not particularly distinguished, they are referred to as the temperature sensor B25.

The intake air temperature sensor B26a is arranged near the intake port of the intake fan 244B (FAN2), detects the temperature of the air supplied from the outside to the inside of the projector device B2 through the intake fan 244B, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. The exhaust temperature sensor B26b is arranged near the exhaust port of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), detects the temperature of the air discharged from the inside to the outside of the projector device B2 through the exhaust fan 245, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. In general, the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature sensor B26b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a. Regarding this type of temperature sensors B26a and B26b, only one of them may be provided according to the specifications. Further, the intake air temperature sensor B26a and the exhaust temperature sensor B26b may be referred to as a ventilation temperature sensor.

The pulse sensor B27a is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244A (FAN1) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN1. The pulse sensor B27b is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244B (FAN2) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN2. The pulse sensor B27c is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN3. In the present embodiment, a relatively high rotation type is used for the intake fans 244A and 244B (FAN1, FAN2), and a relatively low rotation type is used for the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3). As a result, the rotation speed detected via the pulse sensors B27a and B27b corresponding to FAN1 and FAN2 tends to be higher than the rotation speed detected via the pulse sensor B27c corresponding to FAN3. Regarding this type of pulse sensors 27a, 27b, 27c, only one or two of them may be provided depending on the specifications. The pulse sensor may be configured by, for example, a photo interrupter.

The 4th to 23rd modifications will be described below on the premise of the projector device B2 as described above. In addition, each of the following modified examples does not necessarily use all of the temperature sensor and the pulse sensor, and can be realized by using only a part of them. Further, with respect to each of the following modified examples, any modified examples can be appropriately combined unless there is a special reason that makes the combination difficult, such as the technical preconditions being broken.

FIG. 129 shows the projector control main process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as the process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 129 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 107 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S1001). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 109.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S1002). When the reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S1002: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1003. When the reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S1002: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S107.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S1003).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area to ‘OFF’ (S1004).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'projector'(S1005). When the destination ID indicates'projector'(S1005: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1006. When the destination ID does not indicate'projector'(S1005: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1007.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception processing (S1006). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 110.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S1007). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 113. The projector self-diagnosis process can also be applied as a process as shown in FIG. 130, which will be described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector-to-projector transmission time process (S1008). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 114. The sub-control-projector transmission time process can also be applied as a process as shown in FIG. 135, which will be described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not an LED temperature abnormality (shutdown), a FAN rotation abnormality, a FAN temperature abnormality, or a voltage abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1009). The LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) means an LED temperature abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown described later, and any temperature near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B is determined using the LED temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (a). Generated and stored when detected as above temperature. The FAN rotation abnormality means a FAN rotation abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown, and using the FAN temperature rotation speed control table shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that any rotation speed of FAN1 to 3 is less than the predetermined rotation speed under a predetermined temperature environment. Generated and stored when detected. The FAN temperature abnormality is generated and stored when the intake air temperature near FAN2 is detected as a predetermined temperature or higher using the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b). The voltage abnormality is generated and stored when, for example, a voltage boost of less than a predetermined specified voltage value is detected in the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20. When any of these abnormalities is written in the error management area (S1009: Yes), the control LSI 230 basically transmits an error notification command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the control LSI 230 of S1010 Move to processing. The error notification will be described later. On the other hand, when none of the abnormalities is written in the error management area (S1009: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1013. As the FAN temperature control table, the one shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later, can be applied instead of the one shown in FIG. 131 (b). Further, a FAN temperature rotation speed control table as shown in FIG. 134, which will be described later, can also be applied.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS responds by, for example, returning a status request command in response to the error notification command transmission (S1010). When the sub CPU 400 responds (S1010: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1012. When the sub CPU 400 is not responding (S1010: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1011.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after confirming that any abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1011). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1012. When the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1011: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1013.

Next, the control LSI 230 sends a rotation stop command to FAN1 to 3 and a drive stop command to the LED driver 233 for driving the DLP control circuit 232 and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (S1012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reset request flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S1013). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S1013: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1014. When the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S1013: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1015.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S1014). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S1001) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S1015, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S1016). After that, the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1002.

FIG. 130 shows a self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 130 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 113 described above so as to be a process suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128 in conjunction with the projector control main process of FIG. 129.

As shown in FIG. 130, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verification check (S1021).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S1022). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S1022: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1024. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S1022: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1023.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1023). This self-diagnosis abnormality includes an error due to waiting for a reset of the watchdog timer (WDT) described later. When the error information related to the self-diagnosis abnormality including the WDT reset wait is set, the control LSI 230 transmits a command indicating an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above. (See S817 in FIG. 135 described later), set the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 described later), and described above according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The projector initialization process (S1001) shown in FIG. 129 is executed. The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S1024). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signals from the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1027. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S1025: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1026.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'LED temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1026). Specifically, the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b detect temperatures in the vicinity of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B. By measuring each temperature through the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature based on the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131 (a). If the temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality related to a warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The warning means a warning display before the forced shutdown, and the forced shutdown causes the main operations of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and FAN1 to 3 of the projector device B2 to be abnormal such as temperature and FAN rotation speed. It means to forcibly stop according to.

For example, as the error information of the LED (R) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240R, a warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240R detected by the first temperature sensor B25a is 85 ° C. or higher and lower than 90 ° C. If the temperature is 90 ° C. or higher, forced shutdown is set. Further, the error information of the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G and the error information of the LED (B) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240B are different from the error information of the LED (R) temperature abnormality, and the generation conditions are different. A warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240G or the vicinity of the LED light source 240B detected by the temperature sensor B25b is 100 ° C. or higher and less than 105 ° C., and a forced shutdown is set when the temperature is 105 ° C. or higher. When the error information related to the LED temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). (See S817 in FIG. 135), and without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 described later), a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. (See S825 of FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN rotation diagnosis process (S1027). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the pulse sensors B27a to B27c of the FAN1 to 3.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1030. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S1028: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next processing of S1029.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'FAN rotation abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1029). Specifically, the pulse sensors B27a to B27c detect the rotation speeds of FAN1 to 3. Further, for example, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the intake air temperature of FAN2 as a reference FAN temperature. The control LSI 230 measures the respective rotation speeds through the pulse sensors B27a to B27c and also measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a, so that the FAN temperature is set to a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134. It is determined whether or not it is (for example, 32 ° C.) or less, and if the FAN temperature is not more than a predetermined temperature, any of the rotation speeds of FAN1 to 3 is individually defined as a predetermined rotation speed (for example, FAN1: 4410 rpm, FAN2. If it is less than (4410 rpm, FAN3: 3710 rpm), error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM, and if the FAN temperature is higher than the predetermined temperature, any of FAN1 to 3 If the rotation speed is less than the specific rotation speed (for example, FAN1: 6090rpm, FAN2: 4410rpm, FAN3: 4410rpm) individually specified as a harsher condition than the above-mentioned condition, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is displayed. Set in the error management area of the DRAM.

For example, based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1 is when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 4410 rpm when the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or less. , Forced shutdown is set. Further, as the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1, forced shutdown is set when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 6090 rpm when the FAN temperature is higher than 32 ° C. Based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, forced shutdown is set for the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN2 and FAN3 when the same conditions are satisfied. When the error information related to the FAN rotation speed abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (S1008). A command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 described later) without setting the reset request flag to'ON'. (See S825 in FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN temperature diagnostic process (S1030). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the intake air temperature as the FAN temperature based on, for example, the temperature detection signal from the intake air temperature sensor B26a.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031). When the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1033. When the acquired FAN temperature is not normal (S1031: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1032. For example, a temperature sensor may be installed in each of the FANs 1 to 3, and the FAN rotation speed may be controlled according to the FAN temperatures 1 to 3 detected by each temperature sensor.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'FAN temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1032). Specifically, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) in the vicinity of FAN2. The control LSI 230 measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a to determine whether or not the FAN temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b). For example, the error information indicating the abnormality related to the forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. For example, as the error information of the FAN temperature abnormality, if the FAN temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a is 67 ° C. or higher, forced shutdown is set. When such error information related to the FAN temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). (See S817 in FIG. 135), and without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 to be described later), a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. (See S825 of FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power supply diagnosis process (S1033). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage of the electric power supplied from the power supply circuit B20 of the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034: Yes), the control LSI 230 shifts to the process of S1036. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S1034: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1035.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'voltage abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1035). Specifically, for example, error information of a voltage abnormality indicating an abnormal voltage drop is set. When the error information related to such a voltage abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). Without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135, which will be described later), a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S817 in FIG. 135). See S825 in FIG. 135, which will be described later). The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S1036). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037: Yes), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S1037: No), the control LSI 230 shifts to the next process of S1038.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'DLP abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1038). When the error information related to such a DLP abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). (See S817 in FIG. 135), after setting the reset request flag to'ON'(see S818 and S819'in FIG. 135 described later), the initial projector shown in FIG. 129 described above according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The resetting process (S1001) is executed. That is, since the command indicating the error notification is created as transmission data in S1008 and the reset request flag is set to'ON', the error notification command created in S1008 is processed in S727'in FIG. 136 after rebooting. Will be sent at. At this time, the error notification command or the information indicating the error notification can be stored in the EEPROM 231. In such a case, even if a voltage change (such as an abnormality due to a drop, a break, or a rise) occurs due to a power failure or restart, the commands and information can be retained without being erased. The sub-control-projector transmission time processing and the projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

According to such a projector control main process and a projector self-diagnosis process, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in response to various abnormalities of the projector device B2, and at that time, a response from the sub-control board SS is received. If there is, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down, so that it is possible to avoid malfunction due to heat accumulation of the projector device B2 and eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

Further, even if there is no response from the sub-control board SS, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses, so that the malfunction of the projector device B2 can be reliably avoided. Can be done. In the case of a DLP abnormality, that is, in the case of error processing by the watchdog timer, a reboot (initialization process) is performed, and an error is transmitted after the reboot. In the case of this kind of DLP abnormality, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen, and it is difficult to notify the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS (for example, the communication status is not normal, transmission). It is assumed that commands and information to be created cannot be created normally). Therefore, error transmission is executed after rebooting. The DLP abnormality may be treated in the same manner as other errors, and the error related to the DLP abnormality may be transmitted before the reboot. Further, when the projector device B2 itself reboots or shuts down, communication with the sub CPU 400 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, so that the sub CPU 400 detects an abnormality and the projector from the sub CPU 400. A reboot instruction (or restart) may be given to the device B2. If the sub CPU 400 cannot receive the signal from the projector device B2 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, it is determined that the projector device B2 is likely to be executing the reboot process, and the signal is transmitted after the reboot process. When the sub CPU 400 does not receive the error notification command (that is, when a time longer than 1000 ms, for example, 5000 ms has elapsed), the sub CPU 400 controls the projector device B2 to be forcibly rebooted. Alternatively, the error may be notified.

FIG. 131 shows an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as reference tables according to the fourth modification.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the LED temperature control table, the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the LED light source 240G (LED (G)), and the LED light source 240B ( It is stipulated that the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED (B)) are different.

For example, for the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the operation is normally controlled when the LED temperature is 0 ° C. or higher and lower than 85 ° C., and the operation is controlled without stopping when the LED temperature is 85 ° C. or higher and lower than 90 ° C. However, it is controlled to perform a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen or the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and further, when the LED temperature becomes 90 ° C. or higher, the projector device B2 It is controlled to forcibly shut down the main operation. At the time of warning, the control LSI 230 performs the corresponding processing, and the command related to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 displays a projected image indicating the warning on the screen. On the other hand, in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed. At the time of forced shutdown, a command related to error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2.

On the other hand, regarding the LED light source 240G (LED (G)) and the LED light source 240B (LED (B)), if the LED temperature is 0 ° C. or higher and lower than 100 ° C., the operation is normally controlled, and the LED temperature is 100 ° C. or higher 105. Although the operation is controlled without stopping at a temperature lower than ° C., it is controlled to perform a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen or the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the LED temperature is further increased. When the temperature rises above 105 ° C., the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down. Even in the case of such a warning, the control LSI 230 performs the corresponding processing, and the command related to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 indicates the warning on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2. Further, even at the time of forced shutdown, since the command related to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. The image indicating the warning or shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and is also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. As a result, even when projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image indicating a warning or shutdown is displayed by either display means. This makes it possible to reliably notify the player and the game hall manager to that effect. At this time, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, an error occurs from the external centralized terminal board 31 of the game machine 1 to the management device of the game hall such as a hall computer or an island control computer. You may tell and notify. Further, as the display means of the present embodiment, a project evening device, a screen, a liquid crystal display device, a display device by lighting in dot units using an LED or the like, a touch panel, a flexible liquid crystal display device, an illumination array (registered trademark), a transparent liquid crystal Display, transparent screen, movable accessory, non-movable accessory, etc. can be applied. The number of projector devices, screens, and liquid crystal display devices is not particularly limited. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a security signal is externally output from the main control board MS and the payout / launch control circuit (not shown) via the external centralized terminal board 31, but from the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The security signal may be output externally.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the FAN temperature control table, the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) of FAN2 is basically targeted, and the control conditions corresponding to the FAN temperature are defined.

For example, if the FAN temperature is 0 ° C. or higher and lower than 67 ° C., the operation is normally controlled, and if the FAN temperature is 67 ° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down without warning (warning display). Is controlled by. Even during such a forced shutdown due to the FAN temperature, a command related to an error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. Will be done. Also in this case, the image indicating the warning or shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and is also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. As a result, even when projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image indicating a warning or shutdown is displayed by either display means. This makes it possible to reliably notify the player and the game hall manager to that effect. Further, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, the external centralized terminal board 31 of the game machine 1 notifies the management device of the game hall such as a hall computer or an island computer that an error has occurred. It may be notified.

According to such an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table, the LED temperature related to the LED light source 240R (LED (R)), the LED light source 240G (LED (G)), and the LED light source 240B (LED (B)) is determined. When the temperature rises to a specified temperature (for example, LED (R): 85 ° C., LED (G), (B): 100 ° C.), a warning is given because it is determined to be abnormal, and the LED temperature further rises. Even if the temperature exceeds the specified temperature (for example, LED (R): 90 ° C., LED (G), (B): 105 ° C.), or the intake air temperature (FAN temperature) near FAN2 is lower than the LED temperature. When the temperature exceeds (for example, 67 ° C.), the main operation of the light source device B2 is temporarily stopped by forced shutdown. Therefore, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the light source device B2 is appropriately avoided after notifying in advance by warning. , It is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, when the temperature of the LED (R) becomes, for example, 85 ° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G), (B) becomes higher, for example, 100 ° C. or higher, the sub An error warning is issued to the CPU 400, and the temperature of the LED (R) rises to, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or the temperatures of the LEDs (G), (B) rise to, for example, 105 ° C. or higher, or , When the intake air temperature of FAN2 is lower than the temperature (85 ° C.) at which the warning (error warning) of LED (R) is performed and becomes the specified temperature of FAN2, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, the projector device B2 operates. Is temporarily stopped by forced shutdown, so the malfunction due to heat accumulation of the projector device B2 should be notified in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400, and then appropriately avoided to eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time. Can be done. The temperature (85 ° C.) at which the warning of the LED (R) is performed is not limited to the LED (R), but is a temperature that serves as a criterion for determining the occurrence of an abnormality in the entire LED including the LED (G) and the LED (B). May be. That is, when there are a plurality of types of LEDs such as LEDs (R), LEDs (G), and LEDs (B), the presence or absence of abnormality may be determined based on the temperature of any one type of LED. The intake air temperature of the FAN 2 is a temperature that can be recognized as the temperature around the intake air fan, the temperature of the intake air fan itself, the temperature outside the projector device, the outside air temperature, or the like.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, for example, when the temperature of the LED (R) becomes 85 ° C. or higher, a warning is given to the sub CPU 400, and a warning related to error notification is given on the screen accordingly. Is projected and displayed, and an image showing a warning related to the same error notification is separately displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, when the temperature of the LED (R) rises to, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or when the intake air temperature of the FAN2 rises to, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400, and a warning is given accordingly. After the images related to different error notifications are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly stopped by the response from the sub CPU 400 to the error notification. As a result, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 is appropriately avoided after being notified in advance by the error notification related to the warning and the error notification related to the subsequent forced shutdown, and the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time can be avoided. It can be resolved. In such a case, if there is no response from the sub CPU 400 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) has elapsed, the shutdown can be forcibly performed.

FIG. 132 shows a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the fifth modification. The table shown in FIG. 132 is an improved version of the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131 (b).

In the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the intake air temperature (FAN2) and the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the exhaust temperature (FAN3) are defined to be different.

For example, the intake air temperature is controlled so as to forcibly shut down the main operation of the projector device B2 when the temperature exceeds 67 ° C., as shown in FIG. 131 (b). At the time of forced shutdown, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2. On the other hand, regarding the exhaust temperature, the operation is normally controlled until it reaches, for example, 75 ° C, which is somewhat higher than the intake temperature, and at 75 ° C or higher and lower than 80 ° C, the operation is controlled without stopping, but on the screen. It is controlled to perform a warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and further, when the exhaust temperature becomes 80 ° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down. Be controlled. Even in the case of such a warning, the control LSI 230 performs the corresponding processing, and the command related to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 indicates the warning on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2. Further, even at the time of forced shutdown, since the command related to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2.

FIG. 133 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the sixth modification. The process shown in FIG. 133 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 93 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 133, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S1041).

Next, if the projector error is a warning, the sub CPU 400 makes a display request to both of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the projector device B2 to notify the warning, while the sub CPU 400 requests the projector device B2 to perform the warning. In response to this, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is transmitted (S1042). If the projector error is not a warning, the sub CPU 400 skips the process of S1042 and shifts to the next process of S1043.

Next, if the projector error is shutdown, the sub CPU 400 makes a display request to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 notifies the sub liquid crystal display device B2 regarding the shutdown, and then the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When the display device DD19 is notified of the shutdown, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is subsequently transmitted to the projector device B2 (S1043).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a sound projector error generation output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) by sound (S1044). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the projector error notification.

By using the FAN temperature control table of FIG. 132 in combination with the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131 (a) and executing the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification of FIG. 133, for example, the LED (R) When the temperature is 85 ° C. or higher, or the exhaust temperature of FAN3 is lower than that temperature, for example, 75 ° C. or higher, an error notification related to a warning is sent to the sub CPU 400 by determining an abnormality, and the LED (R) When the temperature of the projector device B2 rises to, for example, 90 ° C. or higher, or when the intake temperature of FAN2 becomes lower than the exhaust temperature, for example, 67 ° C. or higher, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically stopped by forced shutdown. The malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided after notifying in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400, and the discomfort of the image over a long period of time can be eliminated.

FIG. 134 shows a FAN temperature rotation speed control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the seventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 134, in the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the shutdown control conditions are specified to be different based on the lower limit of the FAN rotation speed specified for each of FAN1 to 3. Further, as the FAN temperature, for example, the intake air temperature of FAN2 is applied.

For example, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is 32 ° C. or lower, for FAN1 for intake air, if the FAN rotation speed is less than 4410 rpm specified as the lower limit value, it is determined that the intake capacity is insufficient and a rotation speed error is made, and for intake air. For FAN2, when the FAN rotation speed is less than 4410 rpm specified as the lower limit value, it is judged as a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity, and for FAN3 for exhaust, the FAN rotation speed is less than 3710 rpm specified as the lower limit value. When it becomes, it is judged that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity. When the rotation speed error is determined in this way, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32 ° C., it is required to exhibit a larger intake / exhaust (ventilation) capacity. Therefore, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) becomes higher than 32 ° C., the lower limit of a part of the FAN rotation speed is raised. As a result, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32 ° C., for FAN1 for intake, if the FAN rotation speed is less than 6090 rpm specified as the lower limit value higher than the above, it is determined that the intake capacity is insufficient and the rotation speed error. When the FAN speed for intake is less than 4410 rpm, which is the same lower limit as above, it is determined that there is a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity, and for FAN3 for exhaust, the FAN speed is above. If it becomes less than 4410 rpm specified as a higher lower limit value, it is determined that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity. Even when the rotation speed error is determined in this way, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcibly shut down.

According to such a FAN temperature rotation speed control table, when the FAN temperature becomes higher than, for example, 32 ° C., the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown, and even if the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or less, such a temperature condition is established. Therefore, with respect to FAN3 for exhaust and FAN1 for intake, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the respective FAN rotation speeds. Further, when the FAN temperature is 32 ° C. or lower, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the FAN rotation speed of the intake FAN2 corresponding to the FAN temperature regardless of the temperature, so that the heat of the projector device B2 is generated. It is possible to appropriately avoid malfunctions due to accumulation according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed of the FAN3 for exhaust, while for intake regardless of the detected FAN temperature. Since the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown even according to the FAN rotation speed of the FAN2, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed for a long time. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image that extends.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by forced shutdown according to the FAN temperature of the FAN2 for intake, the FAN3 for exhaust, and the FAN rotation speed of FAN1 for intake. Therefore, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the discomfort of the image over a long period of time can be eliminated.

In addition, all of FAN1 to 3 are provided with temperature sensors, and the FAN of each FAN1 to 3 according to the airflow temperature passing through each of the FAN1 to 3 detected through the respective temperature sensors. Stop control may be performed by the number of revolutions or shutdown.

FIG. 135 shows the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as the processing according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 135 is executed in S1008 in the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process of S819 shown in FIG. 114 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 135, the processes other than S819'are indicated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the process of S819' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 135, in S819', the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM and reset request flags in the work area to'ON'. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the processing at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector. That is, in the case of a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality including an error due to waiting for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset, the reset request flag'ON is performed without immediately sending the'error notification'command indicating these abnormalities. Waiting for the reset signal to be output from the watchdog timer (WDT) in response to', and when the reset signal is output, the projector initialization process shown in Fig. 136 below is executed by rebooting. It becomes.

FIG. 136 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 136 is executed in S1001 in the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process of S727 shown in FIG. 109 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 136, the processes other than S727'are indicated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the process of S319' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, in S727', the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM, and before the projector initialization process by rebooting (restarting), a self-diagnosis error (watchdog timer (WDT)). ) Or an'error notification'command indicating a DLP error is created, the'error notification' command is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the sub-control-projector transmission time process and the projector initialization process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the LED of the projector device B2 ( Even if an abnormality occurs in R, G, B), FAN1 to 3, or the power supply circuit B20 due to a thermal factor, the operation of the projector device B2 is forced by shutdown after an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400 accordingly. Is stopped by. On the other hand, for example, if the watchdog timer is not cleared (or set to a predetermined value) and falls into an infinite loop and an abnormal process occurs, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped in this case as well, but a reboot (restart) is performed. When the watchdog timer is reset and the operation of the projector device B2 is restored, an error notification is sent to the sub CPU 400. Therefore, the sub CPU 400 is surely notified of various malfunctions of the projector device B2. It can be avoided.

As described above, when an abnormal process is performed using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen, so it is unlikely that normal operation will be guaranteed, and an early reboot ( (Reset or restart, etc.) is required. Even if an attempt is made to send a transmission command at this stage, there is a high possibility that the transmission command will not be transmitted normally. Therefore, it is desirable to control the sub CPU 400 to notify an error after rebooting. In this way, when the projector device B2 is frozen, the watchdog timer is not cleared and the time is up (including the count of the addition type and the subtraction type), so that the projector device B2 is rebooted and an error occurs after the reboot. Notification will be given. It should be noted that the reboot can also be recognized as a process of restarting. Further, when an abnormal process is performed using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that the device is frozen and it is highly likely that normal projection is difficult. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device DD19 and the game machine 1 have a high possibility of being frozen. Components (for example, frame components, panel components, front door components, cabinets, reels, levers, payout control board segment indicators and light sources (mainly LEDs), segment displays provided on the housing. Reflects the projection of the device, light source (for example, LED), main body frame member, dish unit, game machine side component, button, front panel (including liquid display device), projector device B2 component, and projector device B2. The abnormality may be notified by various constituent members such as a reflective member, a decorative member protruding from the frame, and the like. According to this, even when various abnormalities are detected except when the abnormality processing is performed by using the watchdog timer, the abnormalities are caused by the projection by the constituent members of the game machine 1 and the projector device B2 described above. Can be notified and displayed (for example, error notification, warning, warning, abnormality notification, etc.).

Further, regarding the abnormal operation of the gaming machine 1 and the projector device B2, the external communication means (external centralized terminal board 31, wireless communication means, short-range wireless communication, optical communication means, encrypted communication means, decryption communication) of the gaming machine 1 From means, encrypted and complex communication means, etc., and external communication means provided in the projector device B2, etc., playground devices (for example, hall computing, island computers, sand machines, outboxes, counting of each machine). Machines, gaming media lending devices with counters for each machine, data display, digital signage, representative lamps, call buttons, gaming media number notification means (for example, those that notify the number of gaming media by driving or emitting light from the case), The management device, peripheral devices, CR unit, etc.) may be notified that an error has occurred, and the gaming machine 1 may be used as one means by combining various of the illustrated devices, or by using a plurality of means. It is possible to combine them in various ways, such as by using the above-mentioned devices or by adopting any one of the devices, and the gaming machine 1 can communicate with the outside by using various communication forms. When such an error is notified to the outside, the manager of the game hall turns on / off the power of the game machine 1 (power interruption and power recovery, or change of setting, etc.), and the setting screen of the gaming machine. You can perform operations to eliminate errors from (setting screens for players, setting screens for amusement machines, etc.). In addition to medals and balls, various game media such as the number of game media on the data are assumed as the game medium. It can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the number of gaming media (balls held, balls, rented balls, stored balls, credits, number of throws, number of shots, number of payouts, number of foul balls, etc.) on the data increases or decreases. It should be noted that holding balls, paying balls, lending balls, and storing balls are terms applicable to various game media such as medals and balls. Further, in the case of an error in performing a reboot in the present embodiment, error information (self-diagnosis error, DLP error, reset request flag, etc.) stored before the reboot is performed at the time of restart is stored (for example, in the EEPROM. Since it is stored (stored in a storage area that is not cleared before and after rebooting, etc.), it is possible to send an error notification during the initialization process that is executed at restart, and clear various flags and work areas after the error notification (1). Part or all can be cleared, only the work area related to error notification can be cleared, etc.). Further, it is also possible to simply use the watchdog timer to determine whether or not communication between the boards or communication between the control devices is normally performed. In this case as well, abnormality detection using the watchdog timer can be performed. It can also be expressed as doing. Further, the error information transmitted to the sub CPU 400 after the projector device B2 is rebooted is transmitted at the time of the initialization process executed at the time of power-on or reboot, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to the initial error information. The error information may be transmitted in the step after the conversion process.

FIG. 137 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the ninth modification. The process shown in FIG. 137 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 137, the sub CPU 400 receives a command indicating that the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'projector'for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more. It is determined whether or not this is done (S1051). If the command has not been received for a predetermined time or longer (S1051: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1052. When some command is received within a predetermined time (S1051: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1053. At this time, if the received data is normal, the received data is transmitted at a cycle of, for example, 500 ms using a transmission cycle counter, so that the presence or absence of the received data is monitored based on 1000 ms, which is a longer time. ing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request to the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL in order to display the error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S1052). ). As a result, if there is no response from the projector device B2 even after a lapse of time such as 500 ms or more, an image or the like notifying the error of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1053, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area indicates'projector'. When the source ID indicates'projector'(S1053: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1054. When the source ID does not indicate'projector'(S1053: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S1054). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1056. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1057.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1056). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1057, the sub CPU 400 performs projector-controlled reception processing. This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 89 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector drift correction process (S1058). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 95 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

According to such a projector control process, the operation of the projector device B2 should be restored by, for example, a reboot, but the sub CPU 400 has a predetermined time longer than the transmission time interval (for example, 500 ms) of the projector device B2 (for example, 500 ms). For example, if there is no predetermined response from the projector device B2 even after 1000 ms), it is determined that some kind of malfunction has occurred in which the projector device B2 cannot be restored by rebooting, and this is indicated by an image related to error notification or the like. It can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, any malfunction of the projector device B2 can be reliably and promptly notified by error notification and then avoided. The predetermined time is not limited to 1000 ms as an example, and various times can be set, for example, if the transmission time interval in one communication is 500 ms, the time is 500 ms or more.

FIG. 138 shows a projector-controlled reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the tenth modification. In the process shown in FIG. 138, the process of S448 shown in FIG. 89 described above is changed to the process of FIG. 140 described later, and only the process of S449 is deleted. Therefore, in FIG. 138, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 89 are used, and the description thereof will be omitted, and the case of S445: No and the processing of S450 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 138, when there is no request to change the projector set value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S450. In S450, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector-controlled reception processing. In the tenth modification, the parameter request command transmitted from the projector control board B23 does not include parameter values such as setting change and status, and for example, focus position setting change including origin adjustment of focus position described later. A parameter value indicating whether or not the request is for changing the projector setting value is included. That is, a parameter request command can be transmitted from the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing, and based on the parameter value included in such a command, whether or not there is a projector setting value change request in S445. Is determined. When the parameter request command is transmitted from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing, the sub CPU 400 receives the parameter request command (or when it is received), the projector device B2 If there is a request to change the projector setting value such as adjusting the focus position, changing the projection content, moving the screen, etc., the projector setting value and the parameter can be transmitted to the projector device B2. In this way, the projector device B2 side can control the transmission timing of the command transmitted from the sub CPU 400, and the projector device B2 periodically transmits the parameter request command to the sub CPU 400. It is also possible to notify the sub CPU 400 that the command can be received. Further, the timing of transmitting the parameter request command from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 to the sub CPU 400 is set to a predetermined barrier (for example, 500 ms interval, constant interval, constant cycle, etc.), but the present invention is not limited to these. When the sub CPU 400 determines that the parameters of the projector device B2 are changed, the parameters may be transmitted to the projector control board B23. When a parameter request command is transmitted from the projector control board B23 at predetermined intervals, transmission / reception processing in one process (for example, transmission / reception processing while the projector device is running, transmission / reception processing during parameter change in the projector device, error in progress) It is conceivable that the command of the parameter request is received multiple times in the transmission / reception processing of the above, and it is assumed that the start of the transmission / reception processing in one processing and the command reception of the parameter request do not correspond one-to-one. In such a case, it is desirable that the sub CPU 400 independently transmits to the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing as described above. Regarding the parameter request command, the reception confirmation command transmitted from the projector device B2 to the sub CPU 400, or the setting completion command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the projector device B2, the commands are duplicated and have a special meaning. Unless otherwise specified, some commands may be discarded. By sending and receiving commands periodically in this way, while monitoring that the communication status is normal, unnecessary commands are discarded (or only the reception confirmation of what is received is performed, and the subsequent processing is performed. The process can be simplified by doing so.

FIG. 139 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 139 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 95 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 139, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1061). This focus position setting change request is issued when the focus position should be changed while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin described later. When there is a request to change the focus position setting (S1061: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1062. When there is no request to change the focus position setting (S1061: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1063. Regarding the movement to the focus position, a method of obtaining the focus position after incorporating the drift correction in advance and a method of moving the focus position according to the offset value without incorporating the drift correction are performed, and then the drift correction is applied. There is a method of moving the focus position, but one of the methods may be applied, or one of the methods may be appropriately selected depending on the situation. Further, the focus position may be moved by drift correction and then the predetermined focus position may be further moved depending on the situation, or the focus movement may be collectively performed from the position before the movement to the position after the movement. The focus position may be moved. As the focus control at that time, the position before the movement is grasped, the position after the movement is grasped without grasping the position before the movement, or only the movement amount is grasped. Various controls such as are conceivable.

In S1062, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41. At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1062 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1063, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is the'drift correction temperature'. When the reception command is'drift correction temperature'(S1063: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1064. If the reception command is not the'drift correction temperature'(S1063: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S1064). As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and the position coefficient (S1065). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature, as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1065 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1066). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1066: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1066: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1067.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S1067).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1068).

Next, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the focus drift correction number counter (S1069). The drift correction number counter is an addition counter for accumulating the number of times the focus position drift correction is performed in response to the focus drift correction value being rewritten by the drift correction temperature. The focus drift correction count counter is set with an initial value in the process determined to perform focus drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin described later, and 1 is added when the focus drift correction is actually performed. To. That is, when the focus drift correction is performed by returning to the focus origin, -1 is set as the initial value of the focus drift correction number counter in order to count the next focus drift correction as the first time. The initial value of the focus drift correction number counter is also set when the projector device B2 is started. Further, since the case where the focus drift correction is performed after returning the focus position to the origin is counted as the first focus drift correction, the initial value of the focus drift correction counter may be set to 0. Further, when the initial value of the focus drift correction counter is set to 0, the count when the focus drift correction is performed by returning to the focus origin may not be performed. Regarding focus drift correction, the temperature when the previous focus drift correction was performed (the temperature of the LED, fan, projector device, etc.) is compared with the temperature when the focus drift correction is performed this time, and based on the comparison result. It may be performed according to the amount of change in temperature, or it depends on the temperature at the time of (or when) the focus is moved (including the electric focus movement and the image movement by software image processing) and other predetermined conditions. The focus may be adjusted.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1070). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. As a result, the drift correction of the focus position is performed according to the drift correction temperature. The drift correction is a process of moving the drift correction temperature from the focus position before the correction by the difference amount according to the drift correction, and the drift error included in the difference amount increases as the number of times of the drift correction increases. With regard to such drift error, the focus position is once returned to the focus positions A to E (hereinafter referred to as "focus origin"), which are the reference positions for each projection surface, and then the focus is set to the position according to the adjustment value or offset. By moving the position and then moving the focus position by the difference amount according to the drift correction, the drift error accumulated up to that point is eliminated. This will be described later. Regarding the calculation of the focus position, the electric focus position offset and the focus correction value, which are necessary information for that purpose, may be transmitted from the sub CPU 400, and the projector device B2 may perform the calculation based on the information. In addition, the drift error is considered to be caused by the following factors. That is, since the electric focus adjustment according to the drift correction temperature is physically performed by making full use of the focus motor 242C, if this is performed for each change of 1 ° C., the focus motor 242C is driven and controlled extremely finely. It becomes. At this time, if the focus motor 242C is driven quickly and with high accuracy so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player while projecting an image, the possibility of so-called motor step-out occurs increases, and when the motor step-out occurs, the control circuit There will be an error between the focus position recognized on the side and the actual physical focus position. Since such a phenomenon is likely to occur when the electric focus adjustment is performed extremely finely, the electric focus is in the case of a predetermined drift correction temperature (for example, in the case of a temperature change of 1 to 5 ° C.) as described later. It can be dealt with by controlling not to make adjustments. Further, if the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is suppressed, the possibility of motor step-out may be reduced, but there is a demerit such as a long focus time, and the required focus is required when the image is continuously projected. If the electric focus adjustment is performed over time, the player will be distorted or uncomfortable with the image. It is considered that this is particularly likely to occur when a plurality of projection targets (screens) are provided and the projection targets are changed as in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the image is visually distorted (for example, during a demonstration, during darkening, in the case of a stage change for production, etc.), the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is set to the normal case. It is also possible to deal with it by using a slower speed.

FIG. 140 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 140 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 91 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 140, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the projector setting value received as an argument (S1071).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position positions A to E offset) (S1072). When the setting change content is the horizontal position offset (S1072: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1073. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S1072: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1074.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a horizontal position offset command transmission process (S1073). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command to the projector control board B23 to set the horizontal position offset. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. The horizontal position offset (horizontal image position offset) in the present embodiment is the horizontal position of the projected image in which the offset is adjusted in the horizontal direction from the reference position for each projection plane, and the entire projected image is adjusted without electric focus adjustment. Means the position where is finely adjusted in the horizontal direction.

In S1074, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a vertical position offset. When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S1074: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1075. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S1074: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1076.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a vertical position offset command transmission process (S1075). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the vertical position offset to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. The vertical position offset (vertical image position offset) in the present embodiment is the vertical position of the projected image in which the offset is adjusted in the vertical direction from the reference position for each projection plane, and the entire projected image is adjusted without electric focus adjustment. Means the position where is fine-tuned vertically. That is, since the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset control which two-dimensional position within the projection range the projected image is displayed, it is possible to move the projected image without electric focus adjustment. Is. The focus position may be moved by the electric focus adjustment, and the horizontal position and the vertical position of the projected image may be moved at the time of rendering, and the position of the projected image may be changed by soft image processing. Further, the electric focus adjustment may be performed based on the values of the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset.

In S1076, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a focus offset. When the setting change content is the focus offset (S1076: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1077. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S1076: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1079.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S1077). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S1078). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and controls the projector a command (focus position offset command) for setting the focus position offsets A to E. It is transmitted to the substrate B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1079, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction. When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S1079: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1080. When the setting change content is not focus drift correction (S1079: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1082.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S1080). This process is the same as the process of S1077, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S1081). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the focus drift correction values A to E (focus drift correction value command). Is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1082, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S1082: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1083. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S1082: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1084.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the LED brightness setting command transmission process (S1083). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1084, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1085. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1086.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S1085). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1086, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a contrast setting. When the setting change content is the contrast setting (S1086: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1087. When the setting change content is not the contrast setting (S1086: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1088.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S1087). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the contrast to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1088, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a gamma setting. When the setting change content is a gamma setting (S1088: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1089. When the setting change content is not the gamma setting (S1088: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1090.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S1089). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1090, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the white color temperature. When the setting change content is the white color temperature (S1090: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1091. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S1090: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1092.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S1091). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the white color temperature to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1092, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. When the setting change content is brightness (S1092: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1093. When the setting change content is not brightness (S1092: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1094.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S1093). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

In S1094, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is a test pattern (S1094: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1095. If the setting change content is not a test pattern (S1094: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S1095). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the test pattern to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in the amusement park or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before shipping from the factory.

FIG. 141 shows a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag of the focus is ‘ON’ (S1101). This origin adjustment flag is flag information for designating whether or not to return the focus position to the focus origin. When the origin adjustment flag of the focus is ‘ON’ (S1101: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1102. When the focus origin adjustment flag is not ‘ON’ (S1101: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

In S1102, the sub CPU 400 sets a command indicating a focus origin adjustment instruction. This command is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S1078 and the process of S1081 of FIG. 140 described above together with the focus position offset command or the focus drift correction value command.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘OFF’. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

FIG. 142 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 142 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so as to be suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 142, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the source ID of the received data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 indicates'projector'(S1110). When the source ID indicates'projector'(S1110: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1111. When the source ID does not indicate'projector'(S4311: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1118.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S1111). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the values of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 in the reception counter of the projector control reception data (S1112). This reception counter is for counting commands transmitted from the control LSI 230 in a transmission cycle of 500 ms as an example in the present embodiment. For example, if the value of the reception counter is 3 or more, it means that at least 1000 ms or more has passed since the reception counter was reset to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result obtained by the processing of S1111 (S1113). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1114. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1115.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1114). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1118.

In S1115, the sub CPU 400 performs the focus origin adjustment determination process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector-controlled reception processing (S1116). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 138 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the projector drift correction process (S1117). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 139 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1118, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the reception counter of the projector control reception data.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the reception counter of the projector control reception data is 3 or more (S1119). That is, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not at least 1000 ms or more has elapsed since the reception counter was reset. When the value of the reception counter is 3 or more and at least 1000 ms or more has elapsed (S1119: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1120. On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter is less than 2 and 1000 ms has not elapsed (S1119: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1120, the sub CPU 400 causes the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 to display an image or the like related to the error notification. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

FIG. 143 shows a focus origin adjustment determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 143, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is at the time of demo transition (at the time of receiving the demo command) (S1121). The demo means a state in which an image similar to the actual effect is displayed by the projector device B2 or the like when a predetermined time elapses without inserting a medal, and the demo command is the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 when shifting to the demo mode. The transmission process of this demo command will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. At the time of demo transition (S1121: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128. If it is not the time of the demo transition ((S1121): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1122.

In S1122, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the game state is at the start of a chance time (hereinafter, referred to as “CT”). The CT is, for example, a gaming state in which the reel screen mechanism F1 is used as a projection target and the image for production is displayed. The transition of the gaming state including this CT will be described later with reference to FIG. 152. When it is the start of CT (S1122: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128. If it is not at the start of CT, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1123.

In S1123, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting by the member menu. The member menu is called as a screen as shown in FIG. 124 when, for example, a player performs a predetermined operation (for example, a password input operation) on the touch panel DD19T, and the focus position is set on the screen of the member menu. The player can arbitrarily select whether or not to adjust the origin. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1123: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1124.

In S1124, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1124: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1125. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1124: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1126.

In S1125, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128.

In S1126, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the number of symbol fluctuations (or the number of games, the number of starts, etc.) has reached, for example, 300 times or more in the state where the origin adjustment flag of the focus is ‘OFF’. The symbol variation count means the number of times counted each time the symbol (identification information) variation display is started by rotationally driving the reels RL, RC, and RR. The number of times the symbol changes (the number of times the identification information changes and is displayed) is counted using a change number counter. When the origin adjustment flag of the focus is ‘OFF’ and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches, for example, 300 times or more (S1126: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1127. Even when the focus origin adjustment flag is ‘OFF’, if the number of symbol fluctuations is less than 300 (S1126: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1127, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the fluctuation count counter that counts the symbol fluctuation count when the origin adjustment flag of the focus is in the'OFF'state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1128).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a request to change the focus position setting in order to change the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin (S1129). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the content of returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. As a result, for example, when the screen to be projected on the image is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, respectively. The projection lens 210 can be focused while performing drift correction at the focus position according to the screen of. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to the processing of FIGS. 138 to 143, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even if the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction. By changing the setting so that the focus position returns to the focus origin once according to the game state (CT) of the above and the setting in the member menu, all the drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality due to the drift correction at an appropriate timing for the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control.

Further, even when the number of drift corrections is, for example, 30 or more as a predetermined number, the setting is changed so that the focus position returns to the focus origin at the time of drift correction, so that all the drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, even with this, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality due to the drift correction for the image projected from the projector device B2 while repeatedly performing the drift correction.

In addition, even if the number of symbol fluctuations is, for example, 300 or more as a predetermined number without returning the focus position to the focus origin, the setting is changed so that the focus position returns to the focus origin once, and the drift accumulated up to that point. Since all the errors are removed, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality due to the drift correction for the image projected from the projector device B2 by repeatedly changing the focus position.

The control subject for changing the focus position setting is not limited to the sub CPU 400, and for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 itself may change the focus position setting. In this case, the control LSI 230 automatically adjusts the focus position by monitoring the LED temperature, for example, and performing feedback control so as to perform drift correction after the focus position is once returned to the focus origin according to the LED temperature. be able to. At this time, whether or not the setting is changed with the origin adjustment of the focus position can be appropriately determined according to the flags and conditions related to the origin adjustment of the focus position.

Further, according to the present embodiment, for example, a main series of processes of the projector control process is executed in response to a command transmitted from the projector device B2 in a transmission cycle of 500 ms, and the focus position is determined by the process of S1115 in this series of processes. It is determined whether or not to adjust the origin of. Therefore, the timing at which the origin adjustment of the focus position is actually performed may be delayed from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied due to a slight time lag. The command may be immediately transmitted to the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, when it is necessary to send a command to change the focus position, the command may be sent immediately at that time. The projector device B2 can immediately adjust the origin of the focus position in response to receiving such a command, and can change the focus position while performing drift correction.

FIG. 144 shows the effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the eleventh modification. The process shown in FIG. 144 corresponds to the effect content determination process of S222 shown in FIG. 71, which is suitable for being executed while adjusting the origin of the focus position. Further, FIG. 145 shows a display example of an image projected by the projector device B2 according to the eleventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 144, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1131).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1132). In the case of an effect involving a change in the focus position (S1132: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1137. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1132: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1133.

In S1133, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1133: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1134. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1133: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1134, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1131 and then changes the effect content to an effect accompanied by a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1135).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1136).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position setting in order to project the image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once as an effect changed in the process of S1134. (S1137). As a result, as the image for production projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), when the focus position returns to the focus origin once, so-called out-of-focus occurs, and the image corresponds to, for example, an internal winning combination. The image becomes difficult to see the pattern, and then, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the image is displayed so that the pattern can be clearly seen by gradually adjusting the focus position to the position corresponding to the screen to be projected. ..

According to such an effect content determination process, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even if the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction. Since the focus position can be once returned to the focus origin in order to project an image for production that changes to a clearly visible state, all the drift errors accumulated up to that point can be removed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of image quality due to the drift correction while using the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control.

Further, the image shown in FIG. 145 is relatively changed from, for example, a state in which the initial focus is deviated and the visibility is lowered to a state in which the focus is gradually adjusted and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state in which the visibility changes due to the change in the image as a video content for directing. More specifically, as such a video expression, a predetermined production image (for example, a specific small) that notifies the player of the lottery result such as an internal winning combination, a rare role, a reach symbol, a jackpot symbol, etc. As a role (cherries, watermelons, numbers, letters, symbols, characters and other images, images, effects, etc.), the effect is to look through a telescope so that the initially blurred image gradually becomes clearer. Can be provided. At this time, since the outline and color scheme of the projected predetermined effect image are vaguely visible to the player, when performing the effect with the origin adjustment, the effect with the origin adjustment is set to, for example, 10000 ms. At the same time, if the time required for adjusting the origin in the production is, for example, 2500 ms, a common image such as a treasure box is displayed for the first 1500 ms, and the remaining 1000 ms and the end of the production (elapse of the production time for 7500 ms). The predetermined effect image described above may be displayed up to. In this way, when the origin is adjusted and the player vaguely grasps the outline and color scheme, the final display content is not known, and the notification is performed by the effect image at the timing when the outline becomes clear. You can also do it. In the production involving the origin adjustment, the timing of the origin adjustment within the production time is determined, for example, at the same time as the start of the production in 10000 ms, in the middle of the production when 5000 ms has elapsed, or when 7500 ms has elapsed. It can be changed as appropriate according to the production, such as the timing according to the end of the production, and the information regarding the timing of such origin adjustment may be stored in advance or changed as appropriate according to the situation. Or may be selected. In addition, when the production time is not predetermined (for example, when the identification symbol capable of displaying the game result to the player is stopped in response to the operation of the operation means), a treasure box or a predetermined production is performed. The timing of displaying the image is the operation of the player's operation means (for example, the operation of the stop button of the reel, the operation of the operation means for production provided in the game machine, the operation of the lever, the operation of payout, the operation of lending, 1). The displayed timing may differ depending on the operation of the bet or MAX bet, the operation of the button that can be moved to the standby position and the protruding position and can be pressed at any position, etc.), but in such a case, for example. The origin adjustment may be executed on condition that the operating means is operated while the identification symbol is changing. Then, when it is determined in advance that it is the execution period of the effect of performing the origin adjustment, the origin adjustment is executed on the condition that the operating means is operated, the origin adjustment is performed, and the above-mentioned treasure box or a predetermined effect image is performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 146 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the twelfth modification. The process shown in FIG. 146 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 144.

As shown in FIG. 146, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1142). In the case of an effect involving a change in the focus position (S1142: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1148. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1142: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1143.

In S1143, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1143: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1144. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1143: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1141 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1144, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the received command, whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination corresponding to a rare combination such as a so-called RT transition combination or a bonus combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1145. When the internal winning combination is not a specific internal winning combination (S1144: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1141 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1145, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1141 and then changes the effect content to an effect accompanied by a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1146).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1147).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position setting in order to project the image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once as an effect changed in the process of S1145. (S1148). According to this, the production content once determined is changed according to the internal winning such as a rare role having a relatively low winning probability, and the production image projected from the projector device B2 at that time is shown in FIG. 145. An image similar to the one shown will be displayed. It should be noted that such an effect content determination process may be executed only when the number of games reaches a predetermined number of times without the specific internal winning combination winning internally.

Even with such an effect content determination process, the focus position can be once returned to the focus origin when projecting an image for effect, which has a relatively low appearance frequency, and all the accumulated drift errors at that time can be removed. Therefore, deterioration of image quality due to drift correction can be suppressed.

FIG. 147 shows the effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the thirteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 147 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 144 or FIG. 146.

As shown in FIG. 147, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1151).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1152). In the case of an effect involving a change in the focus position (S1152: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1157. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1152: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1153.

In S1153, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1153: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1154. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1153: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1151 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1154, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the effect content determined by the process of 1151 is an effect accompanied by darkening of the image. The effect accompanied by the darkening of the image means, for example, an effect in which the image is temporarily darkened at the time of switching the projection target from one screen to another screen. In the case of an effect accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1155. When the effect is not accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1151 and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1155, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ while setting the effect content determined in the process of S1151.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1156).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position setting in order to project a relatively dark image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once when the image is darkened. (S1157). According to this, when the image is darkened due to the switching of the screen, the image projected from the projector device B2 is displayed as an image that looks relatively dark and the out-of-focus state cannot be visually recognized. .. It should be noted that such an effect content determination process may be executed only when the image is simply darkened to a predetermined level without switching the screen.

According to such an effect content determination process, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin in a specific effect state of darkening of an image whose out-of-focus is difficult for the player to understand, and all the accumulated drift errors at that time are removed. As a result, deterioration of image quality due to subsequent drift correction can be suppressed.

FIG. 148 shows a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS as a table according to the 14th modification.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 is effectively applied as a data value according to the state of temperature change. Whether or not it is specified in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or more, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value A is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is applied as it is as a data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature. That is, when there is a relatively rapid temperature change, the drift correction temperature is valid as it is as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value.

On the other hand, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C., the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature becomes 0 ° C. as the applicable data valid value B when the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. , + 11 ° C. or higher and -11 ° C. or lower, it is applied as it is as the applicable data valid value B. That is, when the temperature changes relatively slowly, the drift correction temperature is not valid as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ± 11 ° C., and the temperature. Drift correction will not be performed if the difference is within the temperature range of ± 11 ° C. The temperature change per minute in the present embodiment is, for example, the temperature measured at a predetermined time (for example, a time not limited to 1 minute, which may be obtained by time management by a real-time clock or the like). Is added, the average value obtained by dividing the total value of the added temperatures by the number of measurements, and the maximum and minimum values of the temperatures measured at a predetermined time are obtained, and the value between the maximum and minimum values and the previous drift correction are obtained. The result of comparison with the temperature at the time of performing the above (or the temperature at the time of turning on the power, etc.) may be obtained as the temperature change per minute.

FIG. 149 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the 14th modification. The process shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 95 or 139 described above, and is partially improved as a process using the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 149, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1161). When there is a request to change the focus position setting (S1161: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1163. When there is no request to change the focus position setting (S1161: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1162.

In S1162, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (approximately corresponding to 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value. The drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, an addition counter for measuring time for monitoring a temperature change per minute. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1163. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than a predetermined value (S1162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1165.

In S1163, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1164). At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1164 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1165, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is the'drift correction temperature'. When the reception command is'drift correction temperature'(S1165: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1166. If the reception command is not the'drift correction temperature'(S1165: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

In S1166, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position. As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 refers to the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148 based on the temperature change per minute, and selects a data value of the drift correction temperature effective as the focus drift correction value (S1167). At this time, for example, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or higher, the drift correction temperature is selected as it is as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. On the other hand, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C., the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C. as the data valid value B if the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. If it is selected and is +11 ° C. or higher and -11 or lower, it is directly selected as the data valid value B.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the drift correction temperature and the position coefficient selected as the data valid value (S1168). As described above, the focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature (drift correction temperature). At this time, if 0 ° C. is selected as the effective data value, the focus drift correction value becomes 0, and the drift correction is not performed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1168 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1169). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1169: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1169: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1170.

In S1170, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and saves the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1171).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1172).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1173). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. As a result, when the drift correction temperature is selected as a data valid value other than 0, the drift correction of the focus position is performed.

According to such a projector drift correction process, for example, a temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid is set according to a temperature change per minute, and the drift correction may or may not be performed even at the same drift correction temperature. Yes, drift correction is performed appropriately according to the temperature change situation. This also makes it possible to reduce the drift error accumulated for each drift correction as much as possible, and thus effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS as a table according to the fifteenth modification. This drift compensation temperature table corresponds to a modification of the drift compensation temperature table shown in FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, the drift depends on whether or not the demo is being displayed in addition to the state of temperature change. Whether or not the correction temperature is effectively applied as a data value is specified in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, when the temperature change per minute is 10 ° C. or more (in the case of temperature change a) with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25 in a case other than during the demo display, the data valid value A is set. The specified drift compensation temperature is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is applied as it is as a data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from a predetermined reference temperature. That is, when there is a relatively rapid temperature change while projecting a predetermined image according to the game state, for example, as an effect display other than during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value. It is valid as it is.

On the other hand, even when the demo is not displayed, the data is valid when the temperature change per minute is less than 10 ° C. (in the case of temperature change b) for the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25. The drift correction temperature specified as the value B'is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is 0 ° C. as the applicable data valid value B'when the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 6 ° C. If it is detected at + 6 ° C or higher and -6 ° C or lower, it is applied as it is as the applicable data valid value B'. That is, when the temperature changes relatively slowly except during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is effective as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value as long as the temperature difference from the reference temperature does not exceed ± 6 ° C. However, the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ± 6 ° C.

Further, when the demo is being displayed, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 regardless of the temperature change per minute. According to this, the drift correction temperature becomes 0 ° C. as the applicable data valid value B when the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0 ° C. to ± 11 ° C. , + 11 ° C. or higher and -11 ° C. or lower, it is applied as it is as the applicable data valid value B. That is, since it is not necessary to project an image with high image quality even after drift correction during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is focused unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ± 11 ° C. It is not valid as a data value for calculating the drift correction value, and the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ± 11 ° C. for the temperature difference.

FIG. 151 shows a demo command transmission process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS as the process according to the fifteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 151 is sequentially executed in, for example, the medal reception / start check process of S103 shown in FIG. 59 described above, or in order with each process shown in FIG. 59.

As shown in FIG. 151, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted (including a state in which the BET button can be operated) (S1181). When the medal can be inserted (S1181: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next process of S1182. If the medal cannot be inserted (S1181: No), the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1182, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the error flag is '1'. The error flag is flag information for indicating whether or not there is a communication error or the like between the main control board MS and its connection board, and if there is an error, "1" is set. When the error flag is '1' (S1182: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S1188. When the error flag is "0" instead of "1" (S1182: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1183.

In S1183, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the demo command transmission flag is '1'. The demo command transmission flag is flag information for indicating whether or not the demo command can be transmitted to the sub-control board SS, and is set to "1" when the demo command can be transmitted. When the demo command transmission flag is '1' (S1183: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S1186. When the demo command transmission flag is "0" instead of "1" (S1183: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1184.

In S1184, the main CPU 300 sets the initial value of the demo command transmission timer. The demo command transmission timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the waiting time until the demo command is transmitted, and a numerical value corresponding to the waiting time such as 30s or 60s is set as an initial value.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the demo command transmission flag to '1' (S1185).

Next, the main CPU 300 subtracts 1 from the value of the demo command transmission timer (S1186).

Next, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the value of the demo command transmission timer is '0' (S1187). When the value of the demo command transmission timer is '0' (S1187: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1188. When the value of the demo command transmission timer is not '0' (S1187: No), the main CPU 300 shifts to the next processing of S1188.

In S1188, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not an error such as a communication error is occurring between the main control board MS and the connection board thereof. If an error is occurring (S1188: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S1192. If no error is occurring (S1188: No), the main CPU 300 proceeds to the next process of S1189.

In S1189, the main CPU 300 generates demo command data, and stores the generated demo command data in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored demo command data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS in the data transmission process (command transmission process) of S127 shown in FIG. 60. As a result, a demo image is projected from the projector device B2 as a demo display.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the demo command transmission flag to '0' (S1190).

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the error flag to '0' (S1191). After that, the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1192, the main CPU 300 sets the error flag to '1' and ends the demo command transmission process. In this case, the demo is not displayed because an error is occurring.

According to the projector drift correction process using the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG. 150 depending on whether or not the demo is displayed, the temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid differs depending on whether or not the demo is displayed. While the invalid temperature range is relatively wide during the demo display, the invalid temperature range is relatively narrow or the invalid temperature range itself disappears except during the demo display. That is, the frequency of drift correction can be changed not only by the drift correction temperature but also by the demo display, and the frequency of drift correction can be suppressed even if the state of the demo display becomes long, so that the accumulated drift error can be obtained for each drift correction. It can be reduced as much as possible, and the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2 can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 152 shows the transition of the gaming state according to the 16th modified example.

As shown in FIG. 152, the gaming machine 1 as a pachislot machine has a plurality of gaming states, and the plurality of gaming states include, as an example, a normal gaming state and a bonus gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "BB"). ), Chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "CZ"), ART gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "ART"), and chance time (hereinafter referred to as "CT").

For example, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a transition lottery to CZ, BB, etc. is performed according to the internal winning combination, and when the transition lottery is won, the transition to CZ, BB, or the like is performed. In this normal gaming state, for example, the front screen mechanism E1 is used to display an image for production.

BB is a game state in which a so-called regular bonus is repeatedly performed until the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number, and while shifting from CZ, ART or CT depending on the internal winning combination, a normal game state is performed according to a predetermined end condition. In addition to the above, a lottery for adding the number of ART games and a lottery for the first hit of ART are performed, and when these lottery are won, the number of ART games is added or the game is shifted to ART. For example, in the normal gaming state or in the BB that has transitioned from CZ, the image for production is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1, and in the BB that has transitioned from ART, the image for production is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1. In the BB of the ART addition zone shifted from CT, the image for production is displayed while appropriately switching the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1.

The CZ shifts from the normal gaming state according to the internal winning combination, while performing a transition lottery to CT via ART, BB, or ART, and when the transition lottery is won, a game that shifts to ART, BB, or CT. It is in a state. In this CZ, for example, the front screen mechanism E1 is used to display an image for production.

The ART refers to a state in which the sub CPU 400 notifies the reel stop operation so that the internal winning combination is won or not won in favor of the player, and this AT is combined with the so-called replay high probability state (RT). It is a game state controlled by. During ART, the internal winning combination can be won so as to increase the number of medals won without reducing it as much as possible. Therefore, as the number of ART games increases, more medals can be obtained. The ART shifts from BB, CZ or CT according to the internal winning combination, while the transition lottery to BB or CT is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the ART shifts to BB or CT. In this ART, for example, a fixed screen mechanism D is used to display an image for production. For example, in the case of shifting from ART to CT, if a game is played for the purpose of aligning a specific symbol combination during the replay high probability state, and a lottery capable of aligning the specific symbol combination is won, ART. It is possible to add the number of games and the number of CT sets.

In CT, for example, the winning probability of small wins such as bells, watermelons, cherries, etc. does not change, but regardless of the internal wins, it is possible to win any small win depending on the stop operation by the player's so-called push. In addition, it is a gaming state in which the reels are controlled, and the maximum value (maximum number of slip displays) of the number of slip frames is basically set to 1, for example, for one or a plurality of reels during CT. By the way, in the game state other than CT, the maximum value of the number of sliding frames is 4. The CT shifts from ART according to the internal winning combination, while the transition lottery to ART, the additional lottery for the number of ART games, and the additional lottery for the number of CT sets are performed, and when these lottery are won, the CT shifts to ART. Or add the number of ART games and the number of CT sets. Such CT continues for the number of games in addition to the number of games specified. In this CT, an image for directing is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1.

In this way, at the start of each gaming state, the screen to be projected by the projector device B2 is appropriately switched. Then, in particular, at the start of CT in which an image is projected onto a specific screen (reel screen mechanism F1), the focus position is once returned to the focus origin and then the focus position is changed while performing drift correction. It has become. As a result, all the drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, with respect to the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing drift correction during the electric focus control, image quality deterioration due to drift correction can be effectively suppressed each time the CT is performed.

The plurality of gaming states are not limited to these, and may include, for example, a state in which the winning probability of transitioning to CZ is high or a low probability even in the normal gaming state, and other states. Similarly, the gaming state may include states having different probabilities of shifting to a more advantageous gaming state.

FIG. 153 shows a focus adjustment frequency setting table stored in the sub ROM board 42 of the sub control board SS as a table according to the 17th modification.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the focus adjustment frequency setting table, the number of symbol fluctuations since the origin adjustment (readjustment) of the previous focus position was performed according to the case where the focus position change frequency is relatively high and the case where the focus position is changed low. Is specified to request a setting change to perform the next origin adjustment when, for example, reaches 150 times or 300 times. The case where the focus position is changed relatively frequently corresponds to, for example, the CT described above using FIG. 152, and the case where the change frequency is relatively low corresponds to a gaming state other than during such CT. Equivalent to. During CT, there is a possibility of hitting the BB of the ART addition zone, so the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high. In addition, in FIG. 153, as an example, it is determined whether or not to perform origin adjustment (re-adjustment) on the condition of the number of symbol fluctuations, but in addition, for example, the number of winnings of a rare small winning combination and the rare small It may be stipulated to determine whether or not to perform the next origin adjustment on the condition of the specific number of times the effect is executed from the winning combination, the elapsed time since the previous origin adjustment was performed, or the like. Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a so-called pseudo BB, since it may fluctuate 150 times or more during the BB, it may be applied as a case where the change frequency is relatively high in the BB.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process of the sub-control board SS according to the 17th modification. The process shown in FIG. 154 is a process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, and corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIGS. 144, 146, or 147.

As shown in FIG. 154, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect content, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1202). In the case of an effect involving a change in the focus position (S1202: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1208. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1202: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1203.

In S1203, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1203: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1204. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1203: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content determined in the process of S1201 and then shifts to the process of S1209.

In S1204, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific small combination such as a rare small combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific small combination (S1204: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1205. When the internal winning combination is not a specific small combination (S1204: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1209.

In S1205, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1201 and then changes the effect content to an effect according to the winning of a specific small winning combination accompanied by a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1206).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus drift correction number counter to -1 as an initial value (S1207).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests to change the focus position setting in order to project the image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin once as an effect changed in the process of S1205. (S1208). As a result, as the image for production projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), when the focus position returns to the focus origin once, so-called out-of-focus occurs and corresponds to a specific small role. The image becomes difficult to see, and then, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the design corresponding to a specific small role can be clearly seen by gradually adjusting the focus position to the position corresponding to the screen to be projected. An image like this is displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the gaming state is a bonus (BB) (S1209). When the gaming state is the bonus (BB) (S1209: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1210. When the gaming state is not the bonus (BB) (S1209: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1212.

In S1210, the sub CPU 400 further determines whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode of the ART addition zone during the bonus. In the effect mode in the BB of the ART addition zone, the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately switched, so that the change frequency (number of fluctuations) of the focus position is relatively high (more) than in the other effect modes. )Become. Then, in the case of the effect mode of the ART addition zone during the bonus (S1210: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1211. If it is not in the effect mode of the ART addition zone during the bonus (S1210: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1212.

In S1211, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to'high'. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “high” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is referred to. As a result, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 150 times since the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) of the focus position was performed last time, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin by readjustment and then performs drift correction. While doing this, the image is projected while changing the focus position. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect content determination process.

On the other hand, in S1212, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to'low'. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “low” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is referred to. As a result, when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times, which is more than the previous 150 times, after the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) of the focus position is performed last time, the sub CPU 400 temporarily returns the focus position to the focus origin by readjustment. Then, the image is projected while changing the focus position while performing drift correction. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect content determination process.

According to the effect content determination process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, the change frequency is changed in a specific game state (effect mode) in which the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high as the screen is switched. Since the focus position is more likely to be adjusted to the origin than in the effect mode in other gaming states where there is relatively little, the focus adjustment error that accumulates with each change in the focus position is also reduced according to the frequency of changes in the focus position. As a result, deterioration of the image quality of the image due to the focus adjustment error can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 155 shows the focus origin adjustment determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as the process according to the 18th modification. The process shown in FIG. 155 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 143.

As shown in FIG. 155, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is at the time of demo transition (at the time of receiving the demo command) (S1221). At the time of demo transition (S1221: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228. If it is not the time of the demo transition ((S1221): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1222.

In S1222, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the gaming state is at the start of CT. When it is the start of CT (S1222: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228. If it is not at the start of CT, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next processing of S1223.

In S1223, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting by the member menu. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1223: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1224.

In S1224, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether or not the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S1224: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1225. When the number of drift corrections is less than a predetermined value (S1224: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1226.

In S1225, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228.

In S1226, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not a condition according to the change frequency of the focus position, that is, a predetermined condition according to the change frequency of the focus position defined in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is satisfied. .. For example, when the frequency of change of the focus position is "high" and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 150 times since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time, or when the frequency of change of the focus position is "low". When the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times (S1226: Yes) since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the next process of S1227. On the other hand, even if the focus position change frequency is "high", the previous origin adjustment or the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 150 times, or even if the focus position change frequency is "low", from the previous origin adjustment. When the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 300 (S1226: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1227, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the fluctuation count counter that counts the fluctuation count of the focus position when the origin adjustment flag of the focus is in the'OFF'state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to ‘ON’ (S1228).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a request to change the focus position setting in order to change the focus position while performing drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin (S1229). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the content of returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. As a result, for example, when the screen to be projected on the image is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, respectively. The projection lens 210 can be focused while performing drift correction at the focus position according to the screen of. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to such a focus origin adjustment determination process, the condition for adjusting the origin of the focus position is switched according to the frequency of changing the focus position, and the focus adjustment error can be appropriately reduced, which is caused by the focus adjustment error. Deterioration of image quality of images can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a communication sequence at the time of activation of the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the 19th modification.

As shown in FIG. 156, when the communication between the projector device B2 and the sub-control board SS is established at the time of starting the gaming machine 1, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 issues a command for requesting start parameters to the sub-control board SS. It is transmitted to the CPU 400. The sub CPU 400 that has received the start parameter request command transmits the start parameter request confirmation command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the start parameter request confirmation command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the LED brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the LED brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the LED brightness specified by the command. At this time, according to the LED brightness setting command, for example, 100% brightness is specified as the default value as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the LED brightness setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the keystone distortion correction command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the keystone distortion correction command, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the keystone distortion correction value specified by the command. At this time, according to the keystone distortion correction command, for example, 40 is specified as the default value (trapezoidal distortion correction value) of the keystone distortion correction as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the keystone distortion correction command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the white color temperature setting command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the white color temperature setting command controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the white color temperature specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the white color temperature, for example, 1 is specified as the default value of the white color temperature, as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the white color temperature command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the horizontal image position offset, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the offset value of the horizontal image position specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the horizontal image position offset, the value of the horizontal image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the horizontal image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the command for setting the vertical image position offset to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the vertical image position offset, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the offset value of the vertical image position specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the vertical image position offset, the value of the vertical image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the vertical image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the brightness setting command controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the brightness setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the brightness setting command, for example, 50 is specified as the default value of brightness as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the brightness setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the contrast setting command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the contrast setting command controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the contrast setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the contrast setting command, for example, 50 is specified as the default value of the contrast as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the contrast setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the gamma setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the gamma setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the gamma setting command, for example, 1 is specified as the default value of the gamma value as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the electric focus position offset, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the offset value of the electric focus position specified by the command. At this time, according to the command for setting the electric focus position offset, the value of the electric focus position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as shown in FIG. 157. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the electric focus position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. This ends the communication sequence at startup.

As described above, at the time of activation, the communication sequence as shown in FIG. 156 is performed as one set. A command for requesting a start parameter may be transmitted from the projector device B2 during such a communication sequence, but in this case, the sub CPU 400 discards the command. Further, if the reception confirmation command transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400 does not show the correct reception result, it is retransmitted by the retry process until the correct reception result is shown, for example, up to 10 times.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a communication sequence between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the 19th modification during normal operation.

As shown in FIG. 158, during the normal operation of the projector device B2, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (R)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (R)", the control LSI 230 uses the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a as the LED temperature (R) and indicates the LED temperature (R) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “LED temperature (G)” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (G)", the control LSI 230 uses the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (G) and indicates the LED temperature (G) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “LED temperature (B)” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (B)", the control LSI 230 uses the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (B) and indicates the LED temperature (B) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “intake fan temperature” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "intake FAN temperature", the control LSI 230 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the intake FAN temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the intake temperature sensor B26a of the FAN 2 as the intake FAN temperature. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “FAN1 rotation speed” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request "FAN1 rotation speed" transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN1 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a of the FAN1 as the FAN1 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “FAN2 rotation speed” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request "FAN2 rotation speed" transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN2 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27b of the FAN2 as the FAN2 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 159) of the status request “FAN3 rotation speed” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request "FAN3 rotation speed" transmits a command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN3 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27c of the FAN3 as the FAN3 rotation speed. To do.

After that, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for completing the status request to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits a command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence in the normal operation of the projector device B2 is completed.

As described above, the communication sequence during normal operation as shown in FIG. 158 is performed as one set every 30s, for example, after the end of the communication sequence at startup. In such a communication sequence, when a reception confirmation command that does not show a correct reception result is transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the status request command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the control LSI 230, for example, it is correct up to 10 times. The reception confirmation command is retransmitted by the retry process until the reception result is shown.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a communication sequence at the time of screen switching between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the 19th modification. The screen switching time referred to here means after the screen to be projected is changed from one screen to another.

As shown in FIG. 160, at the time of screen switching, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for setting the electric focus position offset to the control LSI 230. According to the command for setting the electric focus position offset, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the electric focus position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. As a result, the focus position is offset with respect to the focus origin of the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the electric focus position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for setting the horizontal image position offset to the control LSI 230. According to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the horizontal image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. .. As a result, the horizontal image position is offset adjusted with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the horizontal image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for setting the vertical image position offset to the control LSI 230. According to the command for setting the vertical image position offset, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the vertical image position offset held by the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. .. As a result, the vertical image position is offset with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the vertical image position offset transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400 again. After that, the parameter request command is retransmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command (see FIG. 161) of the status request “drift correction temperature” to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "drift correction temperature", the control LSI 230 transmits a command (see FIG. 161) indicating the drift correction temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the temperature sensor B25 as the drift correction temperature.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for completing the status request to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command transmits a command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the control LSI 230 that has transmitted the command then transmits the parameter request command (see FIG. 161) to the sub CPU 400 again.

After that, the sub CPU 400 that has received the parameter request command transmits a command for ordering the electric focus drift correction to the control LSI 230. As a result, in the projector device B2, the focus position offset-adjusted with respect to the focus origin is compensated and adjusted by drift correction based on the drift correction temperature indicated by the above-mentioned command. Then, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that has received the command confirms reception. Command is sent to the sub CPU 400. This ends the communication sequence at the time of screen switching.

As described above, the communication sequence at the time of screen switching is performed as a set of procedures as shown in FIG. 160 when the screen to be projected is changed. In such a communication sequence, when a reception confirmation command that does not show a correct reception result is transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400, the reception confirmation command is executed by retry processing until the correct reception result is shown, for example, up to 10 times. Is retransmitted.

According to such a communication sequence, the focus position is offset adjusted each time the screen is switched, and the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by drift correction according to the temperature, so that the focus is adjusted in a situation where the temperature changes. Frequent adjustments can also suppress image distortion and deterioration of image quality, and can continuously project high-quality images while switching screens.

Further, since the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the screen is switched, the image is projected from the projector device B2 to the appropriate horizontal and vertical projection positions for each screen. It is possible to perform image correction physically and softly.

Further, since the focus position varies depending on the temperature condition of the projector device B2 although the offset is adjusted, it takes a predetermined time to acquire the temperature from the projector device B2 in order to perform the drift correction at the time of screen switching. .. That is, depending on this predetermined time, it is assumed that the screen is switched even while the temperature is acquired from the projector device B2. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned communication sequence at the time of screen switching, the offset adjustment of the horizontal image position and the vertical image position is performed after the focus position is offset adjusted, and then the focus position is readjusted by the drift correction. Since the drift correction is finally performed by taking a step-by-step procedure, even if the screen switching operation is frequently performed, the image distortion can be suppressed with high accuracy. High-quality images can be continuously projected.

FIG. 162 shows the main control main process executed on the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the 20th modification.

In the pachinko machine, when the power is turned on, the main CPU of the main control board first performs the initial setting process (S1231). In this process, the main CPU performs processes such as access permission to the main RAM, backup restoration, and initialization of the work area. Next, the main CPU updates the initial value random number (S1232). In this process, the main CPU updates the initial random number counter value.

Next, the main CPU performs a special symbol control process (S1233). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the special symbol game and the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU performs a normal symbol control process (S1234). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the normal symbol game and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU performs control processing of the symbol display device (S1235). In this process, the main CPU performs display control of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the variable display of the normal symbol based on the execution results of the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process.

Next, the main CPU performs a game information data generation process (S1236). In this process, the main CPU generates game information data to be transmitted to a hall computer or the like of a game store, and stores the game information data in the main RAM.

Next, the main CPU performs a storage / game state data generation process (S1237). In this process, the main CPU generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control board of the pachinko machine based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM. To do. After that, the main CPU returns to the process of S1232 and repeats the process after S1232 described above.

FIG. 163 shows a system timer interrupt process executed on the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the 20th modification.

In the pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even while the main process is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU executes the system timer interrupt process as shown in FIG. 157 according to the clock pulse generated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

As shown in FIG. 157, the main CPU saves the data (information) of each register (S1241). Next, the main CPU performs random number update processing (S1242). In this process, the main CPU updates various random value values extracted from the jackpot determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the fall determination counter, the fluctuation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. ..

The jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at periodic timings such as 2 ms in order to ensure fairness.

Next, the main CPU performs the switch input detection process (S1243). In this process, the main CPU detects winning or passing through various starting ports, various winning ports, and a ball passing detector.

Next, the main CPU performs a timer update process (S1244). Specifically, the main CPU is a timer for various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control board and the sub control board, and a large winning opening opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening. Perform update processing.

Next, the main CPU performs command output processing (S1245). In this process, the main CPU transmits various commands such as a winning command, a variation command, and a demo command to the sub CPU of the sub control board. For example, the demo command is transmitted when a predetermined time elapses without firing the game ball after the end of the change of the special symbol (for example, when the state in which the game is not performed continues for 3 minutes or more).

Next, the main CPU performs game information output processing (S1246). In this process, the main CPU outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control board, the sub control board, the payout / launch control circuit, and the like to the hall computer of the game store.

Next, the main CPU restores the data of each register saved in S1241 (S1247). After that, the main CPU ends the system timer interrupt process.

Even in such a pachinko machine, by mounting the projector device B2 or the like, the same effect as that of the above-mentioned pachislot machine can be exhibited.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, a pachislot machine and a pachinko machine have been described as typical examples of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, and can be applied to, for example, an enclosed gaming machine. Further, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines and slot machines in addition to the gaming machines mentioned above.

Further, it goes without saying that the numerical values, information, components and the like shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention. For example, a value or number may include 0, and may even include negative or positive values.

For example, in the present embodiment, there are various conditions such as the number of counts and the number of executions, and there is a process of determining the number of executions and the execution time (execution period) which is the execution period, but the numerical value is limited in any of them. It is not something that is done. For example, when it is a condition that it is executed three times or more, it may be a condition that it is executed once or more or 0 times or more depending on the initial value. This is defined as the number of executions being 3 times or more as a predetermined condition, and when determining whether or not it has been executed 3 times or more, from a software point of view, it is basically whether or not it has been executed. As long as it can be determined, it is necessary to determine whether it is 1 or 0 in the information theory (coding theory) as a condition. On the contrary, the same applies to the case of determining whether or not the execution is performed, and it is determined whether the information theory (coding theory) is 0 or 1.

In other words, determining the presence or absence of execution is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution unit is 1 or 0, which sets the flag to "ON" when executed and the flag is set. Even when determining whether or not it is "ON", as a result, whether or not there is a signal input that sets the flag to "ON" (whether or not the signal has been received once or multiple times, input It is equivalent to determining whether or not there was, whether or not it was output, etc.). From this, even when determining the presence or absence of a flag, the number of executions itself is not counted, but it is synonymous with determining the number of executions (counting number, counting result, interrupting number, etc.) as a unit. , The determination of the flag and the determination of the number of times can be executed by essentially the same comparison calculation process.

The same applies when determining the time. For example, when determining the execution time, it is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution time is 1 or 0, so the determination depends on the presence or absence of the flag. It can be executed by a simple comparison operation process. However, when the determination is performed using a flag or a variable, it may be determined by negative logic that the value is 0 when the value is 0, and the value may be determined as none when the value is 1.

Further, when the gaming machine is started, the backlight may be turned off until communication is established, for example, in order to prevent an afterimage phenomenon from occurring in the sub liquid crystal display device.

Further, since the movable screen is not returned to the standby position at the time of error notification, the error notification image may be projected according to the screen to be projected at that time.

Further, the projector device of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of projecting onto a plurality of screens, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projector device includes one screen or a plurality of screens. It suffices if it can be projected onto either screen. The projection target is not limited to the screen, for example, the accessory, the board, the front panel, the outer frame, the main body frame, the cabinet, the upper plate, the lower plate, the player, the ceiling above the gaming machine, and the passage from the gaming machine. Various projection forms such as projection toward the ceiling can be considered. Further, as the projection method, for example, various methods such as so-called rear project evening, front project evening, a rear projector that reflects the projected light, and a front projector that reflects the projected light can be applied. It is possible, and a combination of a plurality of these different methods may be used.

Further, the intake fan and the exhaust fan in the present embodiment are ventilation means capable of ventilating the inside of the projector device by rotating their components. That is, the ventilation means includes an intake means or an exhaust means, and the control for the intake means (conditions for shutdown and warning, etc.) in the present embodiment is also applicable to the exhaust means, and is applicable to the exhaust means. Control can also be applied to the intake means.

<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is a so-called pachislot machine. The gaming machine 3001 can be played using coins, medals, gaming balls, tokens, and other gaming media such as cards that are given or given to the player and that store game value information. , Hereinafter, it will be described assuming that a medal is used. The gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment of the present invention has a configuration common to that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but description of the same configuration will be omitted as appropriate. Further, the same configuration as that of the first embodiment shall be indicated by the same reference numerals as those used in the first embodiment.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 3001 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 3001, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 3001, respectively. Further, the expression relating to such a direction is also used in the case of indicating a projector device or the like which is a part of the gaming machine 3001.

Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIG. 164, the appearance of the gaming machine 3001 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 3002. The housing 3002 is a metal cabinet 3003 having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the gaming machine, an upper door mechanism 3004 arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet 3003, and a lower surface arranged on the lower front surface of the cabinet 3003. It has a door mechanism 3005.

Further, the upper surface wall 3006 of the cabinet 3003 is formed with two openings 3007 penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. Then, a wooden plate member 3008 is attached to the upper surface wall 3006 so as to close each of the two openings 3007.

As shown in FIG. 165, the upper door mechanism 3004 and the lower door mechanism 3005 are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 3003. The upper door mechanism 3004 and the lower door mechanism 3005 are provided with exterior panels attached so that the upper and lower portions of the openings in the cabinet 3003 can be closed. The upper door mechanism 3004 has an upper display window 3009 in the central portion. The upper display window 3009 is provided with a transparent panel 3010 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism 3005 is provided with a main display window 3011 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet 3003 is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window 3011. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The reels RL, RC, RR can visually recognize the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR through the main display window 3011.

A transparent panel made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window 3011 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window 3011, a substantially horizontal first pedestal portion 3012a, a second pedestal portion 3012b, and a third pedestal portion 3012c are formed. The first pedestal portion 3012a located on the right side of the main display window 3011 is provided with a medal insertion slot 3013 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot 3013 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot 3013 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion 3012b located on the left side of the main display window 3011 is provided with a maximum BET button 3014 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button 3014 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A sub display device 3015 is provided on the third pedestal portion 3012c located on the front side of the main display window 3011. The sub-display device 3015 displays, for example, the number of medals paid out and the number of remaining medals credited when a prize is established. Since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 3001 is usually 50, the sub-display device 3015 displays the number of credits of 50 or less. When 50 medals, which is the maximum number of medals, are credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet 3021.

On the front side of the maximum BET button 3014, a start lever 3016 is provided to rotate and drive the reels RL, RC, and RR by the operation of the player and to start the variable display of the symbol in the main display window DD4. The start lever 3016 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever 3016 and on the front side of the sub display device 3015, there are three stop buttons 3017L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , 3017C, 3017R are provided.

A C / P button 3018 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button 3014. The C / P button 3018 switches the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button 3018 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 3021 (cancellation shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism 3005. The paid-out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit 3022.

A lumbar panel 3019 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever 3016 and the stop buttons 3017L, 3017C, 3017R. The lumbar panel 3019 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the lumbar panel 3019, a name representing the model of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker 3020L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet 3021, and a speaker 3020R is provided on the right side. The speakers 3020L and 3020R notify the player of various information about the game by sounds such as voice and music. A sub liquid crystal display device 3023 is arranged on the left side of the main display window 3011. The sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 is a so-called touch panel 3023T in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitance type that detects contact with a part of the human body (fingertip or the like) or an electrostatic pen and outputs the detection signal. It may be of a method of detecting contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputting the detection signal, or of another method or structure (in-cell structure or the like). In the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 and the touch panel 3023T can be used to perform optical adjustment of the projector device as described above.

The sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and on the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games played as the game progresses is displayed, and the player can use the sub liquid crystal display device 3023. A message or input key for requesting selection or input is displayed.

In the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) according to the effect related to the game on the display screen. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing accessory, a jog dial, a push button, or the like may be attached as a dedicated attachment. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 can be omitted by allocating its function to the display unit 3080 or the like described later. Further, a sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 may be arranged on the right side of the main display window 3011. As such another sub-liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided on the back side thereof, and a display surface is provided with a transparent and decorated panel capable of producing an effect. May be formed.

FIG. 166 is a front view showing the inside of the cabinet 3003 in which the display of the upper door mechanism 3004 and the lower door mechanism 3005 of the gaming machine 3001 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 166, the inside of the cabinet 3003 is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate 3030. That is, the intermediate support plate 3030 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet 3003 into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism 3004 in the cabinet 3003, and accommodates the display unit 3080 and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism 3005 in the cabinet 3003. The reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 3001, and the like are integrally held behind the lower door mechanism 3005 together with the lower door mechanism 3005, and are housed in the above-mentioned lower space.

The display unit 3080 is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate 3030 in the cabinet 3003. The display unit 3080 is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit 3100 that emits irradiation light for displaying an image and a screen device 3090 that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit 3100 is irradiated.

Further, the screen device 3090 is arranged with a front screen mechanism 3091 that is irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit 3100, and a sub-control board 3200 is arranged in the lower space. The sub-control board 3200 controls the irradiation unit 3100 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory to display an image as a visual effect.

A power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet 3003. Further, a sub-relay board SN is provided above the sub-control board 3200.

(Display unit)
In FIG. 167 (a), only the upper door mechanism 3004 and the display unit 3080 are shown. As described above, the display unit 3080 is composed of an irradiation unit 3100 and a screen device 3090, and ventilation ports 3024a and 3024b having a plurality of small holes are provided on the upper part of the exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004.

FIG. 167 (b) is a diagram showing a display unit 3080 (that is, a state in which the upper door mechanism 3004 is removed from the upper door mechanism 3004 and the display unit 3080 shown in FIG. 167 (a)). As shown in the figure, the display unit 3080 has a housing having an opening formed in the front. This housing is composed of a projector cover 3101 forming the upper part of the irradiation unit 3100 and a screen device 3090. The projector cover 3101 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen device 3090.

A reflector holding portion 3102 is formed in the central portion of the front surface of the projector cover 3101, and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism 3004 is opened. The mirror mechanism 3105, which will be described later, is attached to the reflector holding portion 3102 so that the interval thereof can be adjusted. Thereby, the reflection angle of the optical mirror 3106 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the irradiation unit 3100 can be finely adjusted. Further, an exhaust port 3103a is arranged at the left end on the front side of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101, and an intake port 3103b is arranged at the right end on the front side of the upper surface. For such a configuration, when the projector cover 3101 is mounted on the cabinet 3003 and the upper door mechanism 3004 is closed (that is, the game machine 3001 is in use), it is shown in FIG. 167 (a). The ventilation port 3024a on the upper part of the exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004 communicates with the exhaust port 3103a arranged at the left end on the front side of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101, and the ventilation port 3024b on the upper part of the exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004 communicates with the projector cover 3101. It is positioned so as to communicate with the intake port 3103b arranged at the right end on the front side of the upper surface of the above surface.

FIG. 168 is a plan view of the irradiation unit 3100 shown in FIG. 167 (b). An exhaust port 3103a is arranged at the left end on the front side of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101, and an intake port 3103b is arranged at the right end on the front side of the upper surface. The reflector holding portion 3102 provided at the center of the front surface of the projector cover 3101 is arranged so as to slightly project from the main body of the projector cover 3101.

FIG. 169 shows a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 3100 along the XX-XX line shown in FIG. 168.

Here, the irradiation unit 3100 reflects the irradiation light from the projector device 3300, which is arranged in front of the projector device 3300, in the direction of the projector device 3300, which emits the irradiation light forward, and the screen device 3090, which is arranged obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism 3105 and a projector cover 3101 accommodating a projector device 3300 and a mirror mechanism 3105.

The projector device 3300 is attached to the projector cover 3101 while being exteriorized by the case 3402, and is arranged in the cabinet 3003. The projector device 3300 is attached to the projector cover 3101 via a horizontally arranged flat upper pedestal, a lower pedestal, and the like.

The projector device 3300 includes a projector control board 3310 and an optical mechanism 3330. The optical mechanism 3330 emits the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B and reflected by the DMD 3333 (Digital Micromirror Device) toward the front mirror mechanism 3105 via the lens unit 3332 and the like. It is configured. The projector device 3300 will be described in detail later.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the projector device 3300 and the mirror mechanism 3105 are housed in the projector cover 3101. The lower surface 3109 of the projector device 3300 has an inclined surface inclined upward from the rear to the front in the front portion thereof.

As shown in FIG. 169, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light, and the fixed screen mechanism according to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is a fixed screen mechanism similar to D. Further, the front screen mechanism 3091 has the same configuration as the front screen mechanism E1 according to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 17, and is provided so as to be rotatable between the front exposed position and the front standby position. ing. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism 3091 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism 3091 covers the fixed screen mechanism 3120 from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism 3091. It is possible.

When the front screen mechanism 3091 is moved to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism 3120. That is, when the front screen mechanism 3091 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism 3091 becomes a projection target of the projector device 3300. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism 3091 is arranged in the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 becomes a projection target of the projector device 3300.

The reel screen mechanism 3130 shown in FIG. 169 is a reel screen mechanism similar to the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 18, and rotates between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. It is provided as possible. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism 3130 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism 3130 covers the fixed screen mechanism 3120 from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism 3130. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism 3130 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism 3120. That is, when the reel screen mechanism 3130 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism 3130 becomes a projection target of the projector device 3300. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism 3130 is arranged in the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 becomes a projection target of the projector device 3300.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a projector device 3300 and a projector cover 3101.

The irradiation unit 3100 shown in FIG. 170 (a) is composed of a projector cover 3101 and a projector device 3300. An exhaust port 3103a is arranged at the left end on the front side of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101, and an intake port 3103b is arranged at the right end on the front side of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101. Here, when the mounting screw of the top cover 3110 attached to the upper surface of the projector cover 3101 is removed to remove the top cover 3110, and further, the mounting screw of the upper pedestal described above is removed to remove the upper pedestal, FIG. 170 (b) ), It can be seen that the projector device 3300 is housed in the projector cover 3101.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 170 (b), when the mounting screw of the lower pedestal described above is removed to remove the lower pedestal and the projector cover 3101, the projector device is as shown in FIG. 170 (c). 3300 is taken out.

The projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 170 (c) is exteriorized by a case 3402 as described above. Further, on the side surface of the case 3402, a ventilation port 3404b having a plurality of holes is provided, and an air flow path and an intake port 3103b in the projector cover 3101 and a ventilation port 3024b provided in the exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004 are provided. Air is taken into the projector device 3300 from the outside of the game machine 3001 via the game machine 3001. Although the details will be described later, an intake fan (an intake fan 3210 described later) for taking in external air is installed in the air flow path in the projector cover 3101.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 170 (c), a vent 3404a having a plurality of similar holes is provided on the side surface facing the side surface of the case 3402 provided with the vent 3404b described above. A configuration in which air is discharged from the inside of the projector device 3300 to the outside of the game machine 3001 through the air flow path and the exhaust port 3103a in the projector cover 3101 and the ventilation port 3024a provided in the exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004. It has become. Although details will be described later, exhaust fans (exhaust fans 3342a and 3342b, which will be described later) are installed in the vicinity of the vent 3404a inside the projector device 3300.

Further, an opening 3403 is formed in the case 3402 of the projector device 3300, and the irradiation light emitted from the optical mechanism 3330 of the projector device 3300 passes through the opening 3403 and is provided to the front mirror mechanism 3105. ..

In this embodiment, the projector device 3300 is arranged so that the original upper surface of the projector device 3300 is on the lower side (that is, in an upside-down positional relationship).

(System configuration of gaming machine 3001)
As shown in FIG. 171, the game machine 3001 includes a main control board MS, a sub control board 3200, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, and a scaler board SK as main boards included in the system. It includes a projector control board 3310, a sub liquid crystal I / F board SL, and a screen drive control board CS. Power is supplied to the main control board MS, the sub control board 3200, and the like when the power switch DE2 is turned on from the power supply board DE1 of the power supply device DE.

The gaming machine 3001 is provided with an improved projector device 3300 and the like, and the sub-control board SS and the projector control board B23 of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment are used as the sub-control board 3200 and the projector control board 3310, respectively. .. Since the components other than these have the same configuration as that of the gaming machine 1, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the game machine 3001, as in the game machine 1, as known components, a 7-segment display 30 for digital display, an external centralized terminal board 31 for connecting an external display, a graphic board 40, and a sub RAM are used. Board 41, sub ROM board 42, selector 50 for medal identification, door open / close monitoring switch 51, BET switch 52, checkout switch 53, start switch 54, stop switch board 55, setting key type switch 56, LED board 60, production It is provided with an LED group 61 for decoration, a speaker group 62 for production, a 24h door monitoring unit 63, and a door monitoring switch 64. Description of these known components will be omitted.

The sub-control board 3200 is a board mainly for controlling the effect associated with the game of the gaming machine 3001. The sub-control board 3200 is connected to the sub-relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: for board-to-board), and the sub-relay board SN and the scaler board SK are connected to each other via a harness H. Various signals are exchanged in both directions with these.

As described above, the gaming machine 3001 includes an intake fan 3210 in the projector cover 3101, and further includes a pulse sensor 3211. The sub-control board 3200 receives a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 from the pulse sensor 3211 as a rotation speed detection signal and stores it in the sub-RAM board 41.

FIG. 172 shows the circuit configuration of the sub-control board 3200 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 172, the sub-control board 3200 has a sub CPU 3201, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real-time clock (RTC: Real Time Lock) 402 which is a date and time timing circuit, and is replaced. As a possible expansion card, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic substrate 40 has a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (video memory) 441.

Further, the sub CPU 3201 transmits, for example, a signal for displacing the projection surface of the front screen mechanism 3091 to the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 through the sub-relay board SN and the screen drive control board CS. .. Further, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a video signal for displaying an image on the projector device 3300, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, or the like to the projector control board 3310 or the sub liquid crystal I / F board SL through the scaler board SK.

Further, the sub CPU 3201 controls the drive of the intake fan 3210, receives the pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 from the pulse sensor 3211 as the rotation speed detection signal, and stores it in the sub RAM board 41.

FIG. 173 shows the circuit configuration of the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment.

The projector control board 3310 shown in FIG. 173 includes a control LSI 3311, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 3312, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 3313, and an LED driver 3314. As shown in FIG. 173, the optical mechanism 3330 of the projector device 3300 includes a lens unit 3332, and further, as components arranged around the lens unit 3332, R (red), G (green), and B (blue). ) Is provided with LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B and DMD3333 that emit each color light. Further, a focus mechanism or the like for adjusting the focus of the projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 is provided.

The control LSI 3311 controls the DLP control circuit 3313 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub-control board 3200 received via the relay board 3301. Further, the control LSI 3311 controls the focus mechanism 3332a of the lens unit 3332 to move the projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 in the optical axis direction based on the command from the sub-control board 3200 received via the relay board 3301. As a result, the focus is adjusted when the irradiation light is projected.

The focus mechanism 3332a is the same mechanism as the focus mechanism 242 of the lens unit B21 in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 24, and the projection lens 3332b is the gaming machine of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 24. It has the same configuration as the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 in 1. The focus mechanism 3332a is for focusing on the fixed screen mechanism 3120 of the screen device 3090 and the front screen mechanism 3091 displaced with respect to the projector device 3300 while changing the focal length of the projection lens 3332b.

The EEPROM 3312 stores data related to the setting / adjustment of the projector device 3300 by the control LSI 3311. Although not particularly shown, the control LSI 3311 has a built-in ROM in which a control program or the like is stored and a DRAM used in a work area related to setting / adjustment of the projector device 3300.

The DLP system of the projector device 3300 mainly includes a DLP control circuit 3313, an LED driver 3314, and LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B, and DMD 3333 of the optical mechanism 3330.

The DMD3333 is an integrated mirror corresponding to pixels corresponding to the display resolution on the main surface of the semiconductor chip. The DMD3333 is configured so that each mirror is tilted by + 10 ° or −10 ° along a diagonal axis with respect to the main surface due to the electrostatic field action of the memory element directly under each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD3333 is switched between an ON state (a state of reflecting light in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state of reflecting light outside the predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 3333 is in the ON state, the light incident from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B through the dichroic mirror or the like (not shown) is guided to the lens unit 3332 again through the dichroic mirror or the like, while being turned off. In this state, the light incident from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B through the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected in a direction other than the lens unit 3332.

The DLP control circuit 3313 controls the LED driver 3314 that drives the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B, and DMD3333 in a time-divided manner via a dichroic mirror or the like that does not show the light of each RGB color from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B. To be incident on. At this time, the DLP control circuit 3313 turns the mirror corresponding to which pixel into the ON state or the OFF state at which timing according to the projected image, that is, which color of the RGB light has which timing. Determines whether to reflect in a predetermined direction, and controls the ON / OFF state of each mirror of the DMD3333. When the light incident through the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected in a direction other than the lens unit 3332, the direction of the lens unit 3332 even if the reflected light is subsequently reflected again in the projector device 3300. The light incident on the dichroic mirror or the like may be controlled to be reflected in a direction other than the lens unit 3332 so as not to travel to the lens unit 3332.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 3313, the light reflected by the DMD 3333 in a predetermined direction travels to the lens unit 3332, passes through the projection lens 3332b, and is incident on the mirror mechanism 3105, and finally by the mirror mechanism 3105. It is guided to the projection target by reflection. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the accessory to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

As shown in FIG. 173, the projector device 3300 further includes a temperature sensor 3341, an exhaust fan 3342, and a pulse sensor 3343.

The temperature sensor 3341 has the same function as the temperature sensor B25 described above, and includes, for example, a thermistor. The temperature sensor 3341 collectively represents a plurality of temperature sensors. The temperature sensor 3341, for example, detects the temperature near the LED light source 3331R and outputs the temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310, and detects the temperature near the LED light source 3331G and the temperature sensor 3341a to the projector control board 3310. It includes a temperature sensor 3341b that outputs a temperature detection signal, and a temperature sensor 3341c that detects a temperature near the LED light source 3331B and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310. For example, these temperature sensors 3341a, 3341b, 3341c are arranged on or near the corresponding LED substrates 3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba, respectively.

Further, the temperature sensor 3341 further detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 and outputs the temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310, and detects the temperature near the lens unit 3332 and the temperature sensor 3341d to the projector control board 3310. Includes a temperature sensor 3341e that outputs a temperature detection signal.

The temperature sensors 3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d described above are examples of temperature detecting means provided in the vicinity of an optical element such as an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) or DMD3333, or in the vicinity of the optical element. Such a temperature detecting means includes the optical element itself, and may include an object provided with the optical element. For example, when the temperature detecting means is provided on the optical element itself, when the temperature detecting means is provided on the substrate provided with the optical element, when the temperature detecting means is provided near the position where the optical element is arranged, the optical element is provided. When the temperature detecting means is provided in the vicinity of the substrate provided with the optical element, when the temperature detecting means is provided inside the object (for example, the projector) provided with the optical element, the temperature changes according to the amount of heat generated by the optical element. This may include the case where the temperature detecting means is provided at a position where the temperature of various structures such as the air, the substrate, and the electronic circuit can be detected.

In the present embodiment, the temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c) that detect the temperature of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the temperature sensor that detects the temperature of the lens unit 3332 detect the temperature in units of 1 ° C. .. That is, the unit (temperature change unit) at which the temperature detected by these temperature sensors changes is 1 ° C.

On the other hand, the temperature sensor that detects the temperature of the DMD3333 detects the temperature in units of 0.25 ° C. That is, the unit (temperature change unit) at which the temperature detected by this temperature sensor changes is 0.25 ° C.

Due to such a configuration, the temperature change related to the DMD 3333 can be detected with higher accuracy than the temperature change related to the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the lens unit 3332. The temperature change related to the DMD 3333 includes a temperature change around the DMD 3333, a temperature change of the DMD 3333, a temperature change of the adjacent exhaust fan 3342, or a temperature change around the exhaust fan 3342, and includes the temperature change in the projector device 3300 or. It may include a temperature change of the projector device 3300. Further, in order to grasp such a temperature change, the arrangement position of the temperature sensor 3341d can be adjusted, or another temperature sensor can be used.

The exhaust fan 3342 includes two exhaust fans, that is, an exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) and an exhaust fan 3342b (FAN5).

The pulse sensor 3343 is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the two pulse sensors, that is, the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4), to the projector control board 3310 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN4. The pulse sensor 3343a and the pulse sensor 3343b provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3342b (FAN5) to the projector control board 3310 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN5. Including. The pulse sensor may be configured by, for example, a photo interrupter.

As shown in FIG. 173, the power supply circuit 3302 supplies power to the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B via the LED driver 3314. Further, although omitted in FIG. 173, the power supply circuit 3302 also supplies electric power to the exhaust fan 3342, the lens unit 3332, the DMD 3333, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the projector device 3300 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device 3300 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism 3105, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. As a result, the display unit 3080 provided with the projector device 3300 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and can be easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet 3003 of the gaming machine 3001.

(Processing of main control board MS and scaler board SK)
As described above, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment includes the same main control board MS and the scaler board SK as the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and basically, the main control board MS. The processing by the scaler board SK is also the same as that of the gaming machine 1.

(Processing of sub-control board 3200)
As described above, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment includes a sub-control board 3200 different from the sub-control board SS of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, but basically, the first The same processing as that of the sub-control board SS of the embodiment is performed. Hereinafter, the processing of the sub-control board 3200 will be appropriately described when the processing is different from that of the sub-control board SS.

(Processing of projector control board 3310)
In the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is used, and the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 21 and 128). On the other hand, in the game machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, a projector device 3300 different from the projector device B2 of the first embodiment is adopted, and the projector control board 3310 included in the projector device 3300 also has the first embodiment. It is different from the projector control board B23 included in the projector device B2 of the above. In the following description, the processing of the projector control board 3310 will be described by improving a part of the processing described above as the processing suitable for the projector device B2 shown in FIG. 128.

(DMD temperature judgment)
Next, the temperature determination regarding the DMD3333 of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 shows the projector device 3300 with a part of the case 3402 removed. Here, for convenience of explanation, the projector device 3300 is shown upside down from the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 170 (c), that is, upside down from the state in which the projector device 3300 is arranged in the gaming machine 3001.

The case 3402 of the projector device 3300 is composed of an upper case 3402a and a lower case 3402b. In FIG. 174, the lower case 3402b is removed and the upper case 3402a is shown. Further, on the side surface of the upper case 3402a, a vent 3404a having a plurality of holes is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 174, two exhaust fans (3342a and 3342b) are arranged inside the projector device 3300. Further, a heat sink 3410 is arranged between the two exhaust fans (3342a and 3342b) and the ventilation port 3404a. The heat sink 3410 is configured to surround a part of the heat pipe 3411.

With such a configuration, the heat inside the projector device 3300 is released to the outside through the vents 3404a by the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b), and the heat collected through the heat pipe 3411 or the like is also a heat sink. When the 3410 receives the wind from the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b), it is discharged to the outside through the vent 3404a.

Further, the lens unit 3332 is arranged in the vicinity of the two exhaust fans (3342a and 3342b). The projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 is held by the lens holder 3412. A lens cover 3413 is attached to the front end of the lens unit 3332, and a filter 3414 is held in the opening of the lens cover 3413.

The projector control board 3310 is arranged and fixed inside the projector device 3300 as shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 175 is a bottom view of the projector device 3300 from which the lower case 3402b has been removed as seen from below, as shown in FIG. 174. In the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 175, the fan covers covering the two exhaust fans (3342a and 3342b) are removed, and the projector control board 3310 is transparently shown by a dotted line.

As shown in FIG. 175, a vent 3404a is provided at the left end of the upper case 3402a, and a vent 3404b is provided at the right end of the upper case 3402a. A heat sink 3410 is arranged on the right side of the vent 3404a (inside the projector device 3300), and two exhaust fans (3342a and 3342b) and a lens unit 3332 are arranged on the right side thereof.

The heat pipe 3411 connected to the heat sink 3410 extends over the entire length of the heat sink 3410 in the longitudinal direction, and further bends under the heat sink 3410 and extends over the entire length of the projector device 3300 in the longitudinal direction.

A DMD 3333 is arranged on the right side of the exhaust fan 3342b, and the DMD heat sink 3417 is held in close proximity to the DMD 3333. The optical case 3418 is provided with an opening (or a transmitting portion) through which the irradiation light from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B, the irradiation light to the DMD3333, and the reflected light from the DMD3333 pass, and further, the reflection from the DMD3333. An opening (or transmission) is provided to provide light to the lens unit 3332.

The DMD3333 is connected to the optical case 3418 with a DMD heatsink 3417 separated from it, but the DMD heatsink 3417 also has an opening (or a transmission portion), and the irradiation light from the DMD3333 is the DMD heatsink 3417 and the optical It is provided inside the optical case 3418 via an opening or the like of the case 3418.

A temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310 is arranged between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333. The temperature sensor 3341d is held, for example, by being placed on the projector control board 3310 at this position. Further, the temperature sensor 3341d may be held at an arbitrary position between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333, for example, at any position in the spatial region 3416. In this example, it is held on the projector control board 3310, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The temperature sensor 3341d is intended to detect the temperature of the DMD 3333, but since it cannot be directly arranged on the DMD substrate, it is close to the temperature of the DMD 3333, which is between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333. The temperature sensor 3341d is arranged at a position suitable for detecting the temperature (inside the projector device 3300, a position "downstream" of the DMD 3333 from the flow of the air flow path P4 described later).

Between the exhaust fan 3342a and the lens unit 3332 (lens holder 3412), a temperature sensor 3341e that detects the temperature near the lens unit 3332 and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310 is arranged.

FIG. 176 is a rear view of the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 175 as viewed from the rear. Unlike FIG. 175, the projector control board 3310 is shown as an entity.

As shown in FIG. 176, a vent 3404a is provided at the left end of the upper case 3402a, and a vent 3404b is provided at the right end of the upper case 3402a. The heat sink 3410 is arranged on the right side of the vent 3404a (inside the projector device 3300), and the exhaust fan 3342b and the lens unit 3332 are arranged on the right side thereof. A heat pipe 3411 is connected to the heat sink 3410 as described above.

A DMD3333 is arranged on the right side of the exhaust fan 3342b, and the L-shaped DMD heat sink 3417 is held close to the DMD3333 so as to transfer the heat of the DMD3333, and is connected to the optical case 3418.

As described above, the temperature sensor 3341d is held by the projector control board 3310 between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333. Further, the temperature sensor 3341d may be held at an arbitrary position between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333, for example, at any position in the spatial region 3416.

FIG. 177 is a bottom view of the state in which the projector device 3300 is arranged on the irradiation unit 3100 as viewed from below, and is for explaining the air flow in the irradiation unit 3100 and the projector device 3300. Here, for convenience of explanation, the lower surface 3109 and the two duct covers (3421a and 3421b) are removed from the irradiation unit 3100 (see FIG. 178), and the lower case 3402b and the projector control board are used for the projector device 3300. The 3310 is shown with it removed.

When the external air is forcibly taken into the irradiation unit 3100 of the game machine 3001 from the intake port 3103b of the projector cover 3101 by the intake fan 3210, the taken-in air is taken into the air flow path formed by the projector cover 3101. (Through the space P5 indicated by the dotted line), the air is guided to the vent 3404b provided in the upper case 3402a of the projector device 3300, and is guided to the inside of the projector device 3300.

The air taken into the projector device 3300 from the vent 3404b passes through the surface of the optical case 3418 and the heat sink 3410 by the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) and the exhaust fan 3342b (FAN5) in the projector device 3300. It is forcibly discharged to the outside of the vent 3404a provided in the upper case 3402a of the projector device 3300. Such an air flow in the projector device 3300 is indicated by an arrow as an air flow path P4.

The air discharged to the outside of the vent 3404a is guided toward the exhaust port 3103a of the projector cover 3101 along the air flow path formed by the projector cover 3101 (through the space P6 indicated by the dotted line), and from there. It is discharged to the outside.

By forming such a U-shaped air flow as a whole, the air flow passing through the projector device 3300 is effectively formed, and efficient heat exhaust is performed. The flow of air (air flow path P4) passing through the projector device 3300 cools the optical case 3418 and DMD3333 from the surface (outside), and inside the projector device 3300 stored in the heat sink 3410 by heat conduction by the heat pipe 3411 or the like. (For example, the heat generated from the DMD3333) is taken away. That is, the heat generated in the projector device 3300 is exhausted by the flow of air passing through the projector device 3300.

The intake fan 3210 is an example of an intake means for sending external air, and such an intake means is the air formed by the projector cover 3101 of the game machine 3001 like the intake fan 3210 of the present embodiment. The external air may be indirectly taken in through the flow path, or the external air may be directly taken in and sent to the projector device 3300.

FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of a state in which the projector device 3300 is arranged on the irradiation unit 3100 as viewed from diagonally below. Two duct covers (3421a and 3421b) are arranged between the lower surface 3109 of the irradiation unit 3100 and the projector cover 3101.

By attaching the duct cover 3421b to the projector cover 3101, an air flow path from the intake fan 3210 to the ventilation port 3404b of the upper case 3402a is formed without a gap, and the intake fan 3210 effectively allows the external air to be used in the projector device. It will be sent to 3300. On the other hand, by attaching the duct cover 3421a to the projector cover 3101, an air flow path from the ventilation port 3404a of the upper case 3402a to the front of the exhaust port 3103a of the projector cover 3101 is formed without a gap, and the exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) are formed. ) Allows the air inside the projector device 3300 to be effectively sent to the outside.

The space from the intake port 3103b of the projector cover 3101 to the intake fan 3210 and the space near the exhaust port 3103a of the projector cover 3101 where the air flow path is not formed by the duct cover 3421a are the lower surface of the projector device 3300. By attaching the 3109 to the projector cover 3101, the air flow paths are connected to the air flow paths formed by the duct covers, respectively, and an air flow path having a high degree of airtightness is formed as a whole.

FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the projector device 3300 from which the lower case 3402b has been removed, as viewed from the rear side. In the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 179, the fan cover covering the two exhaust fans (3342a and 3342b), the projector control board 3310, and the optical case 3418 are shown in a removed state.

Under the optical case 3418, a base (eg, metal) 3419 is placed, which is connected to the heat pipe 3411 to achieve effective heat dissipation.

Three LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) are arranged on the base 3419. Here, to explain the arrangement of the LED light source 3331B as an example, as shown in FIG. 179, the heat plate 3331Bb is arranged on the base 3419, and the LED substrate 3331Ba is attached to the heat plate 3331Bb. On the LED substrate 3331Ba, an LED light source 3331B and a temperature sensor 3341c that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 3331B and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control substrate 3310 are arranged.

Further, a cover 3331Bc is arranged on the LED substrate 3331Ba in order to connect to the optical case 3418, but the display is omitted here for convenience of explanation. The cover 3331Bc has the same shape as the cover 3331Gc displayed for the LED light source 3331G.

Here, the arrangement of the LED light source 3331B has been described, but the same applies to the LED light source 3331G and the LED light source 3331R. The LED light source 3331G and the temperature sensor 3341b are arranged on the LED substrate 3331Ga, and the LED light source 3331R is arranged on the LED substrate 3331Ra. And the temperature sensor 3341a are arranged.

In the present embodiment, the LED light sources are arranged as the LED light source 3331B, the LED light source 3331G, and the LED light source 3331R from the side closer to the DMD3333, but such an arrangement is only an example.

(Shutdown temperature setting / DMD temperature peak hold / screen inversion function)
Next, the shutdown temperature setting function of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment, the peak hold function of the DMD3333 temperature, and the screen inversion function will be described.

As described above, the projector device 3300 of the game machine 3001 according to the present embodiment includes a temperature sensor 3341d that detects a temperature near the DMD 3333, and is based on the relationship between the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d and the shutdown temperature. The main parts of the projector device 3300 are forcibly stopped (forced shutdown). The shutdown temperature can be set, for example, from the sub-control board 3200.

Further, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment has a function of storing (peak holding) the MAX temperature among the temperatures detected by the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 described above.

Further, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment has a function (screen inversion function) of rotating and projecting an image according to the gaming machine on which the projector device 3300 is mounted. Further, such rotation of the image corresponds to the designation from the sub-control board 3200. Note that the rotation of the image includes, for example, forward rotation, vertical inversion, horizontal inversion, vertical inversion + horizontal inversion, and the like.

The processing related to each of the above functions will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 189.

FIG. 180 shows the projector control main process by the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310 in the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 180 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 129 described above in order to realize the above-mentioned function by the projector device 3300.

As shown in FIG. 180, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 3311 performs a projector initialization process (S2001). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 109.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S2002). When the reception completion flag is ‘ON’ (S2002: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2003. When the reception completion flag is not ‘ON’ (S2002: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2007.

Next, the control LSI 3311 acquires reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S2003).

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets various flags of the DRAM and the reception completion flag in the work area to ‘OFF’ (S2004).

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'projector'(S2005). When the destination ID indicates'projector'(S2005: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2006. When the destination ID does not indicate'projector'(S2005: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2007.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs the sub-control-projector reception processing (S2006). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 110.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S2007). This process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a process at the time of transmission between the sub-control and the projector (S2008). This process corresponds to the process shown in FIG. 114. Further, the process shown in FIG. 135 can be used.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not an LED temperature abnormality (shutdown), a FAN rotation abnormality, a DMD temperature abnormality, or a voltage abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S2009). The LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) means an LED temperature abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown described later. For example, using an LED temperature control table as shown in FIG. 131 (a), any one of the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B is used. Is generated and stored when the temperature of is detected as higher than the specified temperature.

The FAN rotation abnormality means a FAN rotation abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown, and is generated when the FAN rotation speed of either FAN4 or FAN5 is detected as less than a predetermined rotation speed using the FAN rotation speed control table shown in FIG. 187. -Stored.

In the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when there is a FAN temperature abnormality, the FAN temperature abnormality is written in the error management area of the above-mentioned DRAM, but in the gaming machine 3001 of the second embodiment, the FAN temperature abnormality is described. Do not manage.

The DMD temperature abnormality means a DMD temperature abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown or the like, and is generated and stored when the temperature near DMD3333 is equal to or higher than the shutdown temperature (DMD temperature threshold) stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311. To. Since the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 is arranged between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333 and is arranged downstream of the air flow path P4 formed in the projector device 3300, the exhaust fan 3342b The temperature in the vicinity will be detected. Therefore, such detection of DMD temperature abnormality also has a meaning of complementing the detection of FAN temperature abnormality which is not managed in the second embodiment.

The voltage abnormality is generated and stored when, for example, a voltage boost of less than a predetermined specified voltage value is detected in the power supplied from the power supply circuit 3302.

When any of these abnormalities is written in the error management area (S2009: Yes), since the control LSI 3311 basically transmits an error notification command to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200, the control LSI 3311 of S2010 Move to processing. The error notification process will be described later. On the other hand, when none of the abnormalities is written in the error management area (S2009: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2013.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 responds by, for example, returning a status request command in response to the error notification command transmission (S2010). When the sub CPU 3201 responds (S2010: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2012. When the sub CPU 3201 is not responding (S2010: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2011.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after confirming that any abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S2011). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S2011: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2012. When the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2011: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2013.

Next, the control LSI 3311 transmits a rotation stop command to the FAN4 and FAN5, and sends a drive stop command to the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 that drives the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). .. As a result, the main operation of the projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM and the reset request flag in the work area are ‘ON’ (S2013). When the reset request flag is ‘ON’ (S2013: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2014. When the reset request flag is not ‘ON’ (S2013: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2015.

Next, the control LSI 3311 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S2014). The watchdog timer reset wait is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing (or setting a predetermined value) the watchdog timer and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 3311. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 3311, the control LSI 3311 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S2001) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S2015, the control LSI 3311 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 3311 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S2016). After that, the control LSI 3311 shifts to the processing of S2002.

181 and 182 show the projector self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310 in the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The processes shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 are obtained by improving a part of the processes shown in FIG. 130 described above in order to realize the above-mentioned functions by the projector device 3300.

As shown in FIG. 181, the control LSI 3311 writes, for example, '55AAH' as a diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by verification check (S2021).

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S2022). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S2022: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2024. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S2022: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the next process of S2023.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets'self-diagnosis abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2023). This self-diagnosis abnormality includes an error due to waiting for a reset of the watchdog timer (WDT) described later. When the error information related to the self-diagnosis abnormality including the WDT reset wait is set, the control LSI 3311 transmits a command indicating an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above. (For example, the process shown in S817 of FIG. 135), the reset request flag is set to'ON'(for example, the process shown in S818 and S819'in FIG. 135), and the error notification is sent. The indicated command is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, the projector initialization process (S2001) shown in FIG. 180 described above is executed in response to the reset signal from the watchdog timer.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S2024). In this process, the control LSI 3311 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signals from the temperature sensor 3341a, the temperature sensor 3341b, and the temperature sensor 3341c.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S2025). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S2025: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2027. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S2025: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next process of S2026.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets'LED temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2026). Specifically, the temperature sensor 3341a, the temperature sensor 3341b, and the temperature sensor 3341c detect temperatures in the vicinity of the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B, respectively. The control LSI 3311 measures each temperature through these temperature sensors, and determines, for example, whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature based on the LED temperature control table as shown in FIG. 131 (a). If the temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality related to a warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The warning means a warning display before the forced shutdown, and the forced shutdown is the operation of the main parts such as the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B, FAN4, and FAN5 of the projector device 3300, such as temperature and FAN rotation speed. It means to forcibly stop according to the abnormality of.

When the error information related to the LED temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example). , The process as shown in S817 of FIG. 135), without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(for example, the process as shown in S818 and S819' of FIG. 135), sub-control the command indicating the error notification. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the board 3200 (for example, the process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and FAN5 is stopped, and the drive of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180). A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, in S2027, the control LSI 3311 detects the LED light source 3331R with the highest value (LED temperature (MAX)) of the LED temperature stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 and the corresponding temperature sensor 3341a. The current temperature (current temperature) near the LED light source 3331R is compared, and if the current temperature is higher than the LED temperature (MAX), the current temperature is stored as the LED temperature (MAX). Such a maximum temperature update process is similarly performed for the LED light sources 3331G and 3331B.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a FAN rotation diagnosis process (S2028). In this process, the control LSI 3311 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the pulse sensors 3343a and 3343b of the FAN4 and FAN5.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S2029). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S2029: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2031. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S2029: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2030.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets'FAN rotation abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2030). Specifically, the pulse sensors 3343a and 3343b detect the rotation speeds of FAN4 and FAN5. For each rotation speed, based on the FAN rotation speed control table of FIG. 187, if the rotation speed of either FAN4 or FAN5 is less than a predetermined rotation speed (for example, 4410 rpm), error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is indicated. Is set in the error management area of the DRAM.

When the error information related to the FAN rotation speed abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (S2008). For example, without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(for example, the process shown in S818 and S819' in FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is subordinated. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the control board 3200 (for example, the process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and FAN5 is stopped, and the drive of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180). A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs DMD temperature diagnosis processing (S2031). In this process, the control LSI 3311 acquires the DMD temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor 3341d.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired DMD temperature is normal (S2032). When the acquired DMD temperature is normal (S2032: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2034. When the acquired DMD temperature is not normal (S2032: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2033.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets'DMD temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2033). Specifically, the temperature sensor 3341d detects the temperature near the downstream side of the DMD 3333. The control LSI 3311 measures the temperature through the temperature sensor 3341d to determine whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the shutdown temperature stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311, and if it is equal to or higher than the shutdown temperature, the control LSI 3311 is involved in forced shutdown. The error information indicating the abnormality is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The shutdown temperature is the default value of 50 ° C. in this example, but can also be set between 1 ° C. and 128 ° C. Further, shutdown control execution enablement / non-executability information (information indicating whether or not forced shutdown control is performed based on the shutdown temperature) is stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311, and a set to the error management area is set based on the shutdown control execution feasibility / rejection information. It is also possible to control whether or not to do so.

When such error information related to the DMD temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example). , The process as shown in S817 of FIG. 135), without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(for example, the process as shown in S818 and S819 of FIG. 135), sub-control the command indicating the error notification. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the board 3200 (for example, the process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and FAN5 is stopped, and the drive of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180). A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, in S2034, the control LSI 3311 was detected for the DMD 3333 by the highest value (DMD temperature (MAX)) of the DMD temperature stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 and the corresponding temperature sensor 3341d. The current temperature (current temperature) near DMD3333 is compared, and if the current temperature is higher than the DMD temperature (MAX), the current temperature is stored as the DMD temperature (MAX).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs the lens temperature diagnosis process in S2035 of FIG. 182. In this process, the control LSI 3311 acquires the lens temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor 3341e.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired lens temperature is normal (S2036). When the acquired lens temperature is normal (S2036: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2038. When the acquired lens temperature is not normal (S2036: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next process of S2037.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets'lens temperature abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2037). Specifically, the temperature sensor 3341e detects the temperature near the lens unit 3332. The control LSI 3311 measures the temperature through the temperature sensor to determine whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature based on the lens temperature control table as shown in FIG. 188. If the temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature. The error information indicating the abnormality related to the warning or the forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM.

A warning means a warning display before a forced shutdown occurs. Further, it may be controlled to perform image correction based on the measured temperature. When the temperature of the lens becomes high, the image is distorted. Therefore, it is confirmed whether or not the image actually projected by the projector device 3300 is distorted, and if the distortion is generated, this is corrected. For example, in response to a request for setting change from the projector device 3300, a focus offset command, a focus drift correction value command, or the like is transmitted from the sub-control board 3200 to the projector device 3300, and image correction is realized. Further, at this time, the projector device 3300 transmits the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 3341e to the sub-control board 3200, and a focus offset command, a focus drift correction value command, or the like is generated based on this value. Good.

The forced shutdown means that the main operations of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the FAN4 and FAN5 of the projector device 3300 are forcibly stopped according to an abnormality such as temperature and FAN rotation speed.

In such a lens temperature diagnosis, when error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set, the control LSI 3311 issues a command indicating an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above. Created as transmission data (for example, processing as shown in S817 of FIG. 135), without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(for example, processing as shown in S818 and S819' of FIG. 135), the error. A command indicating a notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, a process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and FAN5 is stopped, and the drive of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180). A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

On the other hand, when error information indicating an abnormality related to a warning is set in the lens temperature diagnosis, the control LSI 3311 transmits a command indicating an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above. (For example, the process shown in S817 of FIG. 135), without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(for example, the process shown in S818 and S819'in FIG. 135), the error notification is sent. The indicated command is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the sub control board 3200, an error display request is made to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S512 in FIG. 93), but the normal process is repeated in the projector device 3300.

Next, in S2038, the control LSI 3311 detects the lens unit 3332 with the highest value (lens temperature (MAX)) of the lens temperature stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 and the corresponding temperature sensor 3341e. The current temperature (current temperature) near the lens unit 3332 is compared, and if the current temperature is higher than the lens temperature (MAX), the current temperature is stored as the lens temperature (MAX).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a projector power supply diagnosis process (S2039). In this process, the control LSI 3311 detects the operating voltage of the electric power supplied from the power supply circuit 3302 of the projector device 3300.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device 3300 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S2040). When the operating voltage of the projector device 3300 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S2040: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2042. When the operating voltage of the projector device 3300 is less than the specified voltage (S2040: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next process of S2041.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets'voltage abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2041). Specifically, for example, error information of a voltage abnormality indicating an abnormal voltage drop is set. When the error information related to such a voltage abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example). The sub-control board issues a command indicating the error notification without setting the reset request flag to'ON'(for example, the process shown in S818 and S819' in FIG. 135) without setting the reset request flag to'ON'. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of 3200 (for example, the process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and FAN5 is stopped, and the drive of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180). A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S2042). In this process, the control LSI 3311 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313 is normal (S2043). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313 is normal (S2043: Yes), the control LSI 3311 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313 is not normal (S2043: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next process of S2044.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets'DLP abnormality'as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2044). When the error information related to such a DLP abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example). After setting the reset request flag to'ON'(for example, processing such as S818 and S819' in FIG. 135), the above-described process is performed according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The projector initialization process (S2001) shown in FIG. 180 is executed.

That is, since the command indicating the error notification is created as transmission data in S2008 and the reset request flag is set to'ON', the error notification command created in S2008 is the process of S727'in FIG. 136 after rebooting. Will be sent at. At this time, the error notification command or the information indicating the error notification can be stored in the EEPROM 3312. In such a case, even if a voltage change (such as an abnormality due to a drop, a break, or a rise) occurs due to a power failure or restart, the commands and information can be retained without being erased. After that, the control LSI 3311 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

According to such a projector control main process and a projector self-diagnosis process, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 3200 in response to various abnormalities of the projector device 3300, and at that time, a response from the sub-control board 3200 is received. If there is, the circuit and fan of the projector device 3300 are stopped (forced shutdown is performed) according to the occurrence of the abnormality, so that the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device 3300 is avoided and it takes a long time. The unpleasantness of the image is eliminated, and it is possible to safely project a high-quality image with a high image visual effect.

Further, even if there is no response from the sub-control board 3200, the operation of the projector device 3300 is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses, so that the malfunction of the projector device 3300 is surely avoided. Safe projection of high-quality images is ensured. In the case of a DLP abnormality, that is, in the case of error processing by the watchdog timer, a reboot (initialization process) is performed, and an error is transmitted after the reboot. In the case of this kind of DLP abnormality, there is a high possibility that the projector device 3300 is frozen, and it is difficult to notify the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the communication status is not normal, transmission). It is assumed that commands and information to be created cannot be created normally). Therefore, error transmission is executed after rebooting. The DLP abnormality may be treated in the same manner as other errors, and the error related to the DLP abnormality may be transmitted before the reboot.

Further, when the projector device 3300 itself reboots or shuts down, communication with the sub CPU 3201 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, so that the sub CPU 3201 detects an abnormality and the projector from the sub CPU 3201 A reboot instruction (or restart) may be given to the device 3300. If the sub CPU 3201 cannot receive the signal from the projector device 3300 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or longer, it is determined that the projector device 3300 is likely to be executing the reboot process, and the signal is transmitted after the reboot process. When the sub CPU 3201 does not receive the error notification command (that is, when a time longer than 1000 ms, for example, 5000 ms has elapsed), the sub CPU 3201 controls the projector device 3300 to be forcibly rebooted. Alternatively, the error may be notified.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the temperature of the DMD 3333 and the output data of the temperature sensor 3341d. The temperature sensor 3341d, which is arranged near the DMD 3333 and detects the temperature near the DMD 3333, outputs output data as shown in FIG. 183, for example, according to the detected temperature (in FIG. 183, the output data is in hexadecimal). It is expressed).

When the output data of the temperature sensor 3341d is 000h, the DMD temperature is 0.0 ° C. When the output data is 320h, the DMD temperature is 50 ° C. When the output data is 7FFh, the DMD temperature is 128 ° C. Will be done. However, when the output data of the temperature sensor 3341d is not in the range of 000h to 7FFh (for example, when it is FFCh or 800h, this indicates a negative temperature), it is treated as 0 ° C.

184 and 185 show a projector setting change process by the sub-control board 3200 in the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The processes shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 are obtained by improving a part of the processes shown in FIG. 140 described above in order to realize the above-mentioned functions by the projector device 3300.

In the projector control process started at predetermined intervals by the sub-device task (see FIG. 73) of the sub-control board 3200, when a command (parameter request: setting change) is received from the projector device 3300, the projector control reception process is started. (See FIG. 137), and when it is determined that the acquired command from the projector device 3300 is a projector setting change request in the projector control reception processing, this projector setting change processing is activated (see FIG. 138). ).

As shown in FIG. 184, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 extracts the setting change contents of the projector setting value received as an argument (S2071).

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S2072). When the setting change content is the horizontal position offset (S2072: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2073. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S2072: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2074.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a horizontal position offset command transmission process (S2073). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and gives a command to the projector control board 3310 to set the horizontal position offset. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process. The horizontal position offset (horizontal image position offset) in the present embodiment is the horizontal position of the projected image in which the offset is adjusted in the horizontal direction from the reference position for each projection plane, and the entire projected image is adjusted without electric focus adjustment. Means the position where is finely adjusted in the horizontal direction.

In S2074, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a vertical position offset. When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S2074: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2075. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S2074: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2076.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a vertical position offset command transmission process (S2075). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the vertical position offset in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the vertical position offset to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process. The vertical position offset (vertical image position offset) in the present embodiment is the vertical position of the projected image in which the offset is adjusted in the vertical direction from the reference position for each projection plane, and the entire projected image is adjusted without electric focus adjustment. Means the position where is fine-tuned vertically. That is, since the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset control which two-dimensional position within the projection range the projected image is displayed, it is possible to move the projected image without electric focus adjustment. Is. The focus position may be moved by the electric focus adjustment, and the horizontal position and the vertical position of the projected image may be moved at the time of rendering, and the position of the projected image may be changed by soft image processing. Further, the electric focus adjustment may be performed based on the values of the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset.

In S2076, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a focus offset. When the setting change content is the focus offset (S2076: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2077. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S2076: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2079.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S2077). This process is, for example, the same process as that shown in FIG. 141. After that, the sub CPU 3201 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S2078). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and controls the projector a command (focus position offset command) for setting the focus position offsets A to E. It transmits to the substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2079, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction. When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S2079: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2080. When the setting change content is not the focus drift correction (S2079: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2082.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process (S2080). This process is the same as the process of S2077. After that, the sub CPU 3201 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S2081). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sets the focus drift correction values A to E (focus drift correction value command). Is transmitted to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2082, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S2082: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2083. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S2082: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2084.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs the LED brightness setting command transmission process (S2083). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2084, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S2084: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2085. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S2084: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2086.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S2085). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2086, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a contrast setting. When the setting change content is the contrast setting (S2086: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2087. When the setting change content is not the contrast setting (S2086: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2088.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S2087). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the contrast to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2088, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a gamma setting. When the setting change content is a gamma setting (S2088: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2089. When the setting change content is not the gamma setting (S2088: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2090.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S2089). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the gamma value to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2090, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the white color temperature. When the setting change content is the white color temperature (S2090: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2091. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S2090: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2092.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S2091). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the white color temperature to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2092, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. When the setting change content is brightness (S2092: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2093. When the setting change content is not brightness (S2092: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2094.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a brightness command transmission process (S2093). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the brightness in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the brightness to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2094, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is a test pattern (S2094: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2095. When the setting change content is not a test pattern (S2094: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2096 shown in FIG. 185.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S2095). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the test pattern in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and transmits a command for setting the test pattern to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2096, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the shutdown temperature setting. When the setting change content is the shutdown temperature setting (S2096: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2097. When the setting change content is not the shutdown temperature setting (S2096: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2098.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a shutdown temperature setting transmission process (S2097). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the shutdown temperature in the projector set value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the preset shutdown temperature of the DMD 3333, and gives a command to the projector control board 3310 to set the shutdown temperature. Send to. The shutdown temperature transmitted to the projector control board 3310 is, for example, provided to the sub-control board 3200 in advance as data, or is provided to the sub-control board 3200 by an input operation on the gaming machine 3001.

The projector control board 3310 stores the shutdown temperature (shutdown control threshold value) received in this way in the DRAM of the projector control board 3310. Further, the shutdown control execution enablement / non-executability information indicating whether or not the shutdown control is performed based on the shutdown temperature can also be stored in the DRAM. The shutdown temperature and the shutdown control execution enablement / non-executability information are stored in the DRAM as described above, and are erased when the power of the gaming machine 3001 is turned off. The timing at which the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control execution enable / disable information are stored is the timing at which the projector setting change processing shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 is executed. Basically, the projector setting value is set from the projector control board 3310. This is the case when a change request (see CMD: 82H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) is made. The projector control board 3310 may make this change request at startup. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2098, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the screen inversion setting. When the setting change content is the screen inversion setting (S2098: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2099. When the setting change content is not the screen inversion setting (S2098: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a screen inversion setting process (S2099). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 sets the screen inversion setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 to the preset screen inversion setting (or to the screen inversion setting selected according to a predetermined condition). A command for rewriting and setting the screen inversion is transmitted to the projector control board 3310. The screen inversion setting transmitted to the projector control board 3310 is, for example, provided to the sub-control board 3200 in advance as data, or is provided to the sub-control board 3200 by an input operation on the gaming machine 3001.

The projector control board 3310 can store the screen inversion setting thus received in, for example, the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

Such a projector setting change process is basically executed when a maintenance worker in the amusement park or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device 3300 before shipping from the factory. , In order to store the above-mentioned shutdown temperature and shutdown control execution enable / disable information in the DRAM, it can be executed at the time of startup or at any other timing.

In the above, the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control execution enablement / non-executability information are stored in the DRAM of the projector control board 3310 by the projector setting change processing, but these information are initialized by the projector initialization processing.

FIG. 186 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310 in the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 186 is a partial improvement of the process shown in FIG. 136 described above in order to realize the above-mentioned function by the projector device 3300.

The process of S2121 corresponds to S721 of FIG. 109, and the process of S2122 corresponds to S722 of FIG. 109.

In S2123, the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control execution enable / disable information are initialized. In this process, the contents of the DRAM of the projector control board 3310 are initialized to a predetermined shutdown temperature and a predetermined shutdown control execution enablement / non-execution information. The initial values set in this way are, for example, (shutdown temperature, shutdown control execution enablement / disapproval information) = (50 ° C., possible) or (shutdown temperature, shutdown control execution / disapproval information) = (-, no) Is.

The processing of S2124 to S2127 corresponds to S723 to S726 of FIG. 109, and the processing of S2128 corresponds to S727'of FIG. 136.

In the present embodiment, the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control execution enable / disable information are set to be stored in the DRAM of the projector control board 3310 by an external control means such as the sub CPU3201 of the sub control board 3200. Settings can be made by various other external control means.

For example, the main control board MS of the gaming machine 3001 and other controllers / control means included in the gaming machine 3001 can function as the external control means. Further, an external control means such as the projector device 3300 and the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the sub-relay board SN, a setting control means that can be attached to the projector device 3300, and the like can also function as the external control means.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 stores the DMD temperature (MAX) indicating the maximum value of the DMD temperature after the power of the gaming machine 3001 is turned on. On the other hand, the DMD3333 has a shorter life when it is in a high temperature environment. Therefore, regarding the quality of the DMD3333, for example, whether or not it can be recycled, the DMD temperature (MAX) and the operating time (or energization) of the gaming machine 3001 are determined. It can be judged from the time). The DMD temperature (MAX) stored in the EEPROM 3312 can be reset at a factory or the like as needed. The above-mentioned environment in which the temperature is high may include a case where the temperature is higher than the shutdown temperature at which the forced shutdown occurs, and a case where the temperature does not reach the forced shutdown but becomes a certain high temperature.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to determine whether or not the projector device 3300 can be recycled from the operating time (or energization time) of the gaming machine 3001 and the DMD temperature (MAX). Here, the operating time can be grasped by the game machine 3001 storing the energization time of the game machine, the measurement of the operating time by the RTC, and the like, and the projector device 3300 has the energizing time of the projector device 3300. By storing these values and grasping these values as the operating time (or energizing time), it can be used as an index (reference) for determining whether or not the projector device 3300 is recyclable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it may be determined whether or not to notify the replacement time of the projector device 3300 due to long-term use by the above-mentioned criteria for determining whether or not the projector device is recyclable. Further, it is common to think that the operating time and the energizing time are different times, but since it is considered that the DMD3333 of the projector device 3300 is always operating at the time of energizing, the operating time of the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300. It is also possible to think of it as the energizing time of the gaming machine 3001 and the projector device 3300.

The operating time of the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300 grasped in this way can be configured so as not to be reset by the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the screen inversion setting is stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310, and the screen inversion setting is, for example, "0: forward rotation" or "1: upside down". , "2: Invert left and right", "3: Invert upside down + Invert left and right" are included.

FIG. 189 shows what kind of image is projected on the screen from the projector device 3300 according to the screen inversion setting described above. FIG. 189 (a) shows an original image 3430 represented by the original image data, and FIGS. 189 (b) to 189 (e) show projectors from the projector device 3300 of the present embodiment, respectively. An image projected on a screen virtually provided in front of the device 3300 is shown. In the gaming machine 3001 of the present embodiment, the image from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 and projected onto the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like, but here, the image from the projector device 3300 is used as it is. It shall be projected on a virtual screen.

Further, in the gaming machine 3001 of the present embodiment, the projector device 3300 is arranged so that the original upper surface is on the lower side (see FIG. 170 (c)), but FIGS. 189 (b) to 189 (e). In the above, it is assumed that the projector device 3300 is arranged in the original posture, which is upside down in the arrangement direction. Further, in FIGS. 189 (b) to 189 (e), when the original image 3430 composed of the characters “ABC” shown in FIG. 189 (a) is projected on the above-mentioned virtual screen, the screen is projected. Is shown as a transparent image seen from the opposite side of the projection plane.

Here, in FIG. 189 (b), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “0: forward rotation”, and the original image 3430 shown in FIG. 189 (a) is projected as it is on the screen projection surface. When viewed from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, as shown in the image 3430a, it is visually recognized as a left-right inverted image (because it is viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface, it is inverted left-right).

In FIG. 189 (c), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “1: upside down”, and the original image 3430 shown in FIG. 189 (a) is projected upside down on the screen projection surface. When viewed from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, as shown in the image 3430b, the image is visually inverted (inverted left and right because it is viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface) and inverted vertically.

In FIG. 189 (d), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “2: left / right inversion”, and the original image data shown in FIG. 189 (a) is projected on the screen projection surface in the left / right inversion. When viewed from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, as shown in the image 3430c, the image is visually recognized as the same image as the original image 3430 (the left-right inverted image is further inverted left-right because it is viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface). To.

In FIG. 189 (e), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “3: upside down + left / right inversion”, and the original image 3430 shown in FIG. 189 (a) is upside down on the screen projection surface. When the image is projected horizontally inverted and viewed from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, as shown in the image 3430d, the horizontally inverted image is further horizontally inverted because it is viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface). It is visually recognized as an image.

In the gaming machine 3001 of the present embodiment, since the projector device 3300 is arranged in the posture as shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, for example, the image projected on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like is in the correct rotation direction for the player. The initial value of the screen inversion setting is set to "3: upside down + left / right inversion" so as to be visually recognized in. In this case, the screen inversion setting can be said to be a so-called "Ceiling + Mirror" setting from the relationship between the posture of the projector device 3300, the rotation direction of the original image 3430, the mirror mechanism 3105, and the front screen mechanism 3091.

The projector control board 3310 of the projector device 3300 controls the rotation direction when projecting an image based on the screen inversion setting described above. Further, such video inversion can be realized by, for example, control of the DMD 3333 by the DLP control circuit 3313, control of the video signal by the control LSI 3311 or the DLP control circuit 3313, or the like. Further, the projector device 3300 may be a projector that can be selected to rotate the image in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(Anti-smoke design)
Next, the smoke design for the optical case 3418 of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 190 is an exploded perspective view showing a part of the projector device 3300 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 190, the optical case 3418 is composed of an optical case main body 3418a and an optical case top 3418b that closes an upper opening of the optical case main body 3418a.

As described above, the optical case body 3418a has openings (3418c, 3418d, 3418e) through which the irradiation light from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B passes, the irradiation light to the DMD3333, and the reflected light from the DMD3333. An opening (not shown) for passing through is provided, and an opening 3418f for providing the reflected light from the DMD 3333 to the lens unit 3332 is provided. In FIG. 190, the display of the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B and the mirrors is omitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 179 and its description in which the display of the optical case 3418 is omitted, the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B are arranged on the LED substrates 3331Ra, 3331Ga, and 3331Ba, respectively, and the LED substrates 3331Ra, 3331Ga, and 3331Ba are arranged. Heat plates 3331Rb, 3331Gb, and 3331Bb are attached to the heat plates, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 179, covers (3331Rc, 3331Gc, 3331Bc) are arranged between the LED substrate (3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba) and the corresponding openings of the optical case body 3418a, respectively. The intrusion of dust (that is, smoke (for example, smoke such as cigarettes), dust, etc.) into the openings (3418c, 3418d, 3418e) of 3418a is effectively blocked.

Further, in order to prevent dust (smoke, dust, etc.) from entering between the DMD 3333 and the DMD heat sink 3417, between the DMD heat sink 3417 and the optical case main body 3418a, and between the lens unit 3332 and the optical case main body 3418a. If necessary, a member for enhancing the airtightness, such as a sheet-shaped sponge, is arranged. Such a member also has an effect of preventing the parts on both sides of the member from coming into contact with each other and absorbing vibration.

Further, such a member is, for example, an elastic member made of resin, but is not limited thereto. FIG. 190 shows the sponge 3333a disposed between the DMD 3333 and the DMD heat sink 3417.

FIG. 190 also shows a state in which the optical case top 3418b is removed from the optical case body 3418a. A recess 3418g is formed at the end of the upper opening of the optical case body 3418a over the entire circumference of the opening, and when the optical case top 3418b is attached to the upper part of the optical case body 3418a, the optical case body The concave portion 3418g of the 3418a engages with the convex portion 3418h (see FIG. 191) formed on the lower surface of the optical case top 3418b corresponding to the shape of the concave portion 3418g, thereby increasing the degree of sealing inside the optical case 3418 and dust. The invasion of (smoke, dust, etc.) is effectively blocked.

FIG. 191 shows a cross section of the optical case 3418 along the cut plane XY shown in FIG. 190. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), when the optical case top 3418b is attached to the upper part of the optical case main body 3418a, the convex portion 3418h formed on the lower surface of the optical case top 3418b is formed in the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a. It will be engaged (fitted) over the entire circumference of the recess 3418 g.

FIG. 191B shows a state in which the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b is engaged with the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a.

FIG. 192 is an enlarged view of a portion of the circle XZ shown in FIG. 191 (b). FIG. 192 shows a state in which the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b is engaged with the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a.

Further, in FIG. 192, a space exists between the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b and the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a, and the member 3418i formed in a shape along the concave portion 3418g is arranged therein. The 3418i is sandwiched between the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b and the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a, and is pressed in some cases.

By arranging such a member 3418i between the convex portion 3418h and the concave portion 3418g, the degree of sealing of the optical case 3418 can be further increased, and the intrusion of dust (smoke, dust, etc.) is effectively prevented. .. As described above, in order to exhaust the heat generated by the projector device 3300, an air flow (air flow path P4) passing through the projector device 3300 is formed, and the optical case 3418 is in the air flow. You will always be exposed. Therefore, increasing the degree of sealing of the optical case 3418 and preventing the intrusion of dust (smoke, dust, etc.) is important in terms of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

Further, such a member 3418i also has an effect of preventing contact between the convex portion 3418h and the concave portion 3418g and absorbing vibration. The member 3418i is, for example, an elastic member made of resin, but is not limited thereto.

Further, in FIG. 192, a protruding portion 3418j is formed at the tip of the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b. With such a protruding portion 3418j, the member 3418i is held more firmly by the convex portion 3418h and the concave portion 3418g, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the 3418j shifts and moves with the passage of time. Further, the presence of the protruding portion 3418j can further increase the degree of sealing of the optical case 3418.

Such a protruding portion 3418j may be provided on the side of the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a. Further, in addition to the protruding portion 3418j provided on the convex portion 3418h, two protruding portions having vertices at opposite positions deviated from the vertices of the protruding portion 3418j are provided on the concave portion 3418g, and the members 3418i are staggered at these three vertices. It may be configured to be pressed by the force and held in a wavy shape.

(Dust cover)
Next, the structure of the dust-proof cover of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 shows the projector device 3300 with a part of the case 3402 removed. Here, for convenience of explanation, the projector device 3300 is shown upside down from the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 170 (c), that is, upside down from the state in which the projector device 3300 is arranged in the gaming machine 3001.

The case 3402 of the projector device 3300 is composed of an upper case 3402a and a lower case 3402b, and is shown in FIG. 193 with the lower case 3402b removed upward. Further, the lens cover 3413 and the filter 3414 are shown in a state of being removed from the lens unit 3332.

The lens cover 3413 is fitted to the shape of the filter 3414 at the bottom (in the figure, it is shown to be located above the lens cover 3413, but here it is referred to as the "bottom" according to the top and bottom of the gaming machine 3001). A filter holding portion 3413a is provided, and the filter 3414 is held by being fitted into the filter holding portion 3413a. The lens cover 3413 holding the filter 3414 in the filter holding portion 3413a is moved along the arrow shown in FIG. 193 and attached to the front end portion of the lens unit 3332. With such a configuration, since the lens cover 3413 covers the front surface of the lens unit 3332, the projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 is protected from dust (smoke, dust, etc.).

After the lens cover 3413 is attached to the lens unit 3332, the lower case 3402b is attached to the upper case 3402a.

FIG. 194 shows the projector device 3300 in a state where the lower case 3402b is attached to the upper case 3402a in this way. From the opening 3420 of the lower case 3402b shown in FIG. 193, it can be seen that a part of the lens cover 3413 and the filter 3414 held by the filter holding portion 3413a are arranged so as to be exposed from the projector device 3300.

Further, the upper part of the lens cover 3413 (in the figure, it is shown to be arranged on the lower side of the lens cover 3413, but here, it is expressed as "upper part" according to the upper and lower sides of the gaming machine 3001) is the lower case 3402b. It is stored in the protrusion 3421 of the lens.

With such a configuration, a part of the lens cover 3413 is housed inside the projector device 3300, and the influence from the outside of the projector device 3300 is minimized. Further, the filter 3414 is held by the filter holding portion 3413a so that it slightly protrudes to the outside of the projector device 3300 (see FIG. 175). As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the filter 3414 due to the air flow (air flow path P4) inside the projector device 3300.

Further, when an impact is received from the front of the lens cover 3413 (front of the projector device 3300), the protruding portion 3421 of the lower case 3402b that stores the upper portion of the lens cover 3413 comes into contact with a member that is immediately adjacent to the impact. Can be absorbed to protect the lens unit 3332 and the like.

(LED temperature error 1)
Next, the temperature error determination regarding the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the like of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described.

The projector device 3300 detects the temperature near the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) by the temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c) arranged on the LED substrate (3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba), and sets the temperature near the previous temperature. Controls to perform a warning or forced shutdown when the difference from the current temperature is greater than or equal to a predetermined temperature difference.

Such error determination is performed by the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 195 and 196. The projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 is a modification of the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182. The projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 differs from the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 only in the LED temperature diagnosis process (S2024'). The description will be given with reference to FIG. 197, and the description of other processes will be omitted.

FIG. 197 shows the LED temperature diagnostic process (S2024') shown in FIG. 195. In this process, the same process is performed individually for each of the LEDs, but here, one LED (LED light source 3331R, LED substrate 3331Ra) will be described.

The control LSI 3311 acquires the current temperature (LED temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341a in S2141. Since the temperature sensor 3341a is arranged on the LED substrate 3331Ra, the temperature near the LED light source 3331R is detected.

Next, the control LSI 3311 acquires the previous LED temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341a from the DRAM in S2142. The previous LED temperature is, for example, the temperature acquired as the "current LED temperature" at the timing of the previous LED temperature diagnosis process. However, the temperature acquired as the "current LED temperature" in the LED temperature diagnosis process executed at the timing retroactive by a predetermined time or the timing before the predetermined number of detections may be acquired as the "previous LED temperature".

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2143 whether or not the condition of the following equation 1 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature-Previous LED temperature> Current LED temperature * x / 100 ... (Equation 1)

When the condition of Equation 1 is not satisfied (S2143: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2147. When the condition of the condition of Equation 1 is satisfied (S2143: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next process of S2144.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2144 that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires a warning. That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of Equation 1 means that the current LED temperature has risen by more than the reference temperature (x% of the current LED temperature) from the previous LED temperature. .. As a result, when the LED temperature rises sharply, the event is warned as abnormal. Here, in order to determine a sudden rise, a temperature at a predetermined ratio (x%) of the current LED temperature is set as a reference temperature.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2145 whether or not the condition of the following equation 2 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature-Previous LED temperature> Current LED temperature * (x + α) / 100 ... (Equation 2)

When the condition of Equation 2 is not satisfied (S2145: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2147. When the condition of the condition of Equation 2 is satisfied (S2145: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2146.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2146 that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires forced shutdown. That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of Equation 2 means that the current LED temperature has risen by more than the reference temperature (x + α% of the current LED temperature) from the previous LED temperature. The reference temperature here is set based on a ratio that is α% higher than the ratio (x%) determined in the treatment of S2143, indicating that the abnormality is more serious. As a result, when the LED temperature rises sharply, the event can be regarded as abnormal and the LED can be forcibly shut down. In this case, instead of the forced shutdown, it may be controlled to give a warning (warning) in the same manner as the processing of S2144 (in this case, the warning message can indicate that the abnormality is more serious). ..

Further, in order to determine an abnormality requiring such forced shutdown, the current LED temperature reaches a predetermined temperature instead of using a reference temperature based on a predetermined ratio (for example, x + α%) of the current LED temperature. If this happens, it can be judged as abnormal.

Next, the control LSI 3311 stores the current LED temperature acquired in S2147 in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311 as the previous temperature or in association with the acquisition time.

Here, the error determination is performed using the values of x and α indicating the ratio, but such values of x and α can be set from the sub-control board 3200 side (for example, by the projector setting change process). It can be stored in advance in the EEPROM 3312 or the like of the control LSI 3311.

When the control LSI 3311 has an LED temperature abnormality that requires forced shutdown or warning in the LED temperature diagnosis process, the LED temperature abnormality is generated as error data in the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2026 of the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIG. (Shutdown)'and'LED temperature abnormality (warning)' are set.

When the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 writes the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) in the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2009 shown in FIG. 180. When it is determined that the data is present (S2009: Yes) and the sub CPU3201 responds to the error notification command transmission (S2010: Yes), a rotation stop command is transmitted to FAN4 and FAN5, and the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED light source are transmitted. A drive stop command is sent to the LED driver 3314 that drives the 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when an LED temperature abnormality (warning) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 indicates an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above. A command is created as transmission data, and a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200. As a result, in the sub control board 3200, an error display request is made to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, and information indicating that an LED temperature abnormality has occurred is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

In this example, the temperature error determination regarding the LED is controlled so as to be performed by the control LSI 3311, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 may control the temperature error. In this case, for example, the sub CPU 3201 controls to perform the above determination by acquiring the current LED temperature from the projector device 3300 and comparing it with the previous LED temperature stored on the gaming machine 3001 side. be able to.

By such temperature error determination regarding the LED, it is not necessary to change the temperature setting regarding the LED according to the environment in which the gaming machine is installed, and it is possible to always perform the abnormality determination based on the current temperature.

(LED temperature error 2)
Next, another temperature error determination regarding the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described.

The projector device 3300 detects the temperature near the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) by the temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c) arranged on the LED substrate (3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba), and sets the temperature near the previous temperature. Controls to perform a warning or forced shutdown when the difference from the current temperature is greater than or equal to a predetermined temperature difference.

Such error determination is performed by the same projector self-diagnosis process as in FIGS. 195 and 196. The difference between the projector self-diagnosis process of this time and the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 is that the LED temperature diagnosis process (S2024'') is performed instead of the LED temperature diagnosis process (S2024'). Therefore, this process will be described here with reference to FIG. 198, and the other processes will be omitted.

FIG. 198 shows the above-mentioned LED temperature diagnosis process (S2024 ″). In this process, the same process is performed individually for each of the LEDs, but here, one LED (LED light source 3331R, LED substrate 3331Ra) will be described.

The control LSI 3311 acquires the current temperature (LED temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341a in S2161. Since the temperature sensor 3341a is arranged on the LED substrate 3331Ra, the temperature near the LED light source 3331R is detected.

Next, the control LSI 3311 acquires the previous LED temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341a in S2162 from the DRAM. The previous LED temperature is, for example, the temperature acquired as the "current LED temperature" at the timing of the previous LED temperature diagnosis process. However, the temperature acquired as the "current LED temperature" in the LED temperature diagnosis process executed at the timing retroactive by a predetermined time or the timing before the predetermined number of detections may be acquired as the "previous LED temperature".

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2163 whether or not the condition of the following equation 3 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature-Previous LED temperature> Upper limit temperature- (Current LED temperature * Current LED temperature / correction value y) ... (Equation 3)

When the condition of Equation 3 is not satisfied (S2163: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2167. When the condition of the condition of Equation 3 is satisfied (S2163: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2164.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2164 that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires a warning (warning). That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of Equation 3 means that the current LED temperature has risen by more than the reference temperature from the previous LED temperature. As a result, when the LED temperature rises sharply, the event is warned as abnormal.

Here, the reference temperature is a value obtained by subtracting the permissible change amount from the reference change amount, and the reference change amount is a predetermined temperature, for example, 5 ° C. The permissible amount of change is the current LED temperature * the current LED temperature / correction value y. The correction value y is, for example, a value such as 2000, 1000, 500, and the permissible change amount thus obtained becomes a larger value as the current LED temperature increases, and as a result, the reference temperature is the current LED. The higher the temperature, the smaller the value.

Therefore, in this temperature error determination, as the current LED temperature becomes higher, a warning is given in response to a smaller temperature change. A minimum value (for example, 1 ° C.) is set for the reference temperature, and when the value obtained by subtracting the permissible change amount from the reference change amount is smaller than the minimum value, the minimum value is set as the reference temperature.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2165 whether or not the condition of the following equation 4 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature> Upper limit of LED temperature ... (Equation 4)

When the condition of Equation 4 is not satisfied (S2165: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the process of S2167. When the condition of the condition of the equation 4 is satisfied (S2165: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2166.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2166 that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires forced shutdown. That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of the equation 4 means that the current LED temperature has reached a predetermined upper limit temperature. As a result, when the LED temperature rises and exceeds a predetermined temperature, the event can be regarded as abnormal and the LED can be forcibly shut down. In this case, instead of forced shutdown, it may be controlled to give a warning (warning) in the same manner as the processing of S2164 (in this case, the warning message indicates that the upper limit temperature has been exceeded. Can be done).

Next, the control LSI 3311 stores the acquired current LED temperature in S2167 in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311 as the previous temperature or in association with the acquisition time.

Here, the error determination is performed using the reference change amount, the correction value y value, and the upper limit temperature, but these values may be set from the sub-control board 3200 side (for example, by the projector setting change process). , It can be stored in advance in the EEPROM 3312 or the like of the control LSI 3311.

When the control LSI 3311 has an LED temperature abnormality that requires forced shutdown or warning in the LED temperature diagnosis process, the LED temperature abnormality is generated as error data in the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2026 of the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIG. (Shutdown)'and'LED temperature abnormality (warning)' are set.

When the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 writes the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) in the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2009 shown in FIG. 180. When it is determined that the data is present (S2009: Yes) and the sub CPU3201 responds to the error notification command transmission (S2010: Yes), a rotation stop command is transmitted to FAN4 and FAN5, and the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED light source are transmitted. A drive stop command is sent to the LED driver 3314 that drives the 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when an LED temperature abnormality (warning) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 indicates an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above. The command is created as transmission data, and the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 without setting the reset request flag to'ON'. As a result, in the sub control board 3200, an error display request is made to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, and information indicating that an LED temperature abnormality has occurred is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

By such a temperature error determination regarding the LED, the upper limit of the allowable temperature change (difference between the current LED temperature and the previous LED temperature) is set smaller as the current LED temperature rises (that is,). The higher the current LED temperature, the more sensitive it is to small temperature changes), and it is possible to accurately detect abnormalities in parts such as LED light sources that increase as the temperature rises.

If the upper limit temperature- (current LED temperature * current LED temperature / correction value y) <lower limit error temperature (temperature difference), the current LED temperature-previous LED temperature> lower limit error temperature. If the determination is made and a YES determination is obtained, it is possible to determine that the abnormality requires warning of the LED temperature. On the other hand, the current temperature> the lower limit error temperature (LED temperature) may be determined, and if a YES determination is obtained, it may be determined that the abnormality requires a warning of the LED temperature.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the relationship between the current LED temperature and the reference temperature (that is, the reference change amount-permissible change amount) in the above-mentioned temperature error determination will be described with reference to the example.

FIG. 199 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the current LED temperature and the reference temperature, and shows patterns for the three correction values y. Here, the reference change amount is 5 (° C.), and the minimum value is 1 (° C.).

FIG. 199 (b) is a graph showing the table shown in FIG. 199 (a). As can be seen from this graph, the reference temperature becomes a small value as the current LED temperature rises, and the transition of the reference temperature can be controlled to a desired pattern by changing the correction value y. When the correction value y is reduced, a more severe reference temperature is set with respect to the current rise in the LED temperature.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the current LED temperature is 20 ° C., when the temperature rises by 4 ° C. in the next temperature detection, the temperature is 24 ° C. Although it is not determined, if the current temperature is 50 ° C, and the temperature rises by 4 ° C in the next temperature detection, it will be 54 ° C (regardless of the correction value y of any value in FIG. 199 (b)), such as an LED light source. Since there is concern about serious damage to the LED, an abnormality will be notified by a warning or the like.

(Exhaust fan speed error)
Next, the rotation speed error determination regarding the exhaust fan (3342a (FAN4), 3342b (FAN5)) of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described.

The projector device 3300 detects the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the exhaust fan (3342a, 3342b) by two pulse sensors (3343a, 3343b), and warns or forces according to the change of the FAN rotation speed at different timings. Control to shut down.

Such error determination is performed by the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 200 and 201. The projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 200 and 201 is a modification of the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182. The projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 200 and 201 differs from the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 only in the FAN rotation diagnosis process (S2028'). The description will be given with reference to FIG. 202, and the description of other processes will be omitted.

FIG. 202 shows the FAN rotation diagnostic process (S2028') shown in FIG. 200. In this process, the same process is performed individually for each of the exhaust fans, but here, one exhaust fan (3342a (FAN4)) will be described.

The control LSI 3311 acquires the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) detected at startup by the pulse sensor 3343a from the DRAM of the control LSI 3311 in S2181.

Next, the control LSI 3311 acquires the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) detected by the pulse sensor 3343a as the current FAN rotation speed in S2182.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2183 whether or not the condition of the following equation 5 is satisfied.
FAN rotation speed at startup * z1> Current FAN rotation speed ... (Equation 5)

If the condition of Equation 5 is not satisfied (S2183: No), the control LSI 3311 ends the FAN rotation speed diagnosis process. When the condition of the condition of the equation 5 is satisfied (S2183: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2184.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2184 that the current FAN rotation speed is an abnormality requiring a warning (warning). That is, the fact that the current FAN rotation speed satisfies the condition of the equation 5 means that the current FAN rotation speed is lower than the reference rotation speed based on the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup. As a result, when the FAN rotation speed drops to a predetermined level, the event is warned (warning) as abnormal.

Here, the reference rotation speed is a value obtained by multiplying the FAN rotation speed at startup by a predetermined magnification z1. z1 is a numerical value such as 80% (0.8).

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2185 whether or not the condition of the following equation 6 is satisfied.
FAN rotation speed at startup * z2> Current FAN rotation speed ... (Equation 6)

When the condition of Equation 6 is not satisfied (S2185: No), the control LSI 3311 ends the FAN rotation speed diagnosis process. When the condition of the condition of Equation 6 is satisfied (S2185: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2186.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2186 that the current fan speed is an abnormality that requires forced shutdown. That is, the fact that the current FAN rotation speed satisfies the condition of the equation 6 means that the current FAN rotation speed is lower than the reference rotation speed based on the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup. As a result, when the FAN rotation speed drops to a predetermined level, the event can be forcibly shut down as an abnormality. In this case, it may be controlled to give a warning (warning) as in the process of S2184 instead of the forced shutdown.

Here, the reference rotation speed is a value obtained by multiplying the FAN rotation speed at startup by a predetermined magnification z2. z2 is, for example, a numerical value such as 70% (0.7), which is smaller than z1.

Here, the error determination was performed using the predetermined magnification z1 and the predetermined magnification z2, but these values can be set from the sub-control board 3200 side (for example, by the projector setting change processing) or the EEPROM 3312 of the control LSI 3311. Etc. can be stored in advance.

When the control LSI 3311 has a FAN rotation abnormality that requires forced shutdown or warning in the FAN rotation speed diagnosis process, the control LSI 3311 performs the FAN rotation as error data in the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2030 of the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIG. Set an error (shutdown)'or'FAN rotation error (warning)'.

When a FAN rotation abnormality (shutdown) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 writes the FAN rotation abnormality (shutdown) to the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2009 shown in FIG. 180. When the sub CPU3201 responds to the error notification command transmission (S2010: Yes), a rotation stop command is transmitted to the FAN4 and FAN5, and the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED are used. A drive stop command is sent to the LED driver 3314 that drives the light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when a FAN rotation abnormality (warning) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 indicates an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above. The command is created as transmission data, and the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 without setting the reset request flag to'ON'. As a result, in the sub-control board 3200, an error display request is made to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023, and information indicating that a FAN rotation abnormality has occurred is output to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023.

The storage of the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup is executed, for example, in the projector initialization process, and this process will be described with reference to FIG. 203. The projector initialization process shown in FIG. 203 is a modification of the projector initialization process shown in FIG. 186. In the projector initialization process of FIG. 203, a FAN rotation speed acquisition process (S2201) at startup is added as compared with the projector initialization process of FIG. 186. Therefore, this process will be described here. , The description of other processes will be omitted.

In the projector initialization process of FIG. 203, the FAN rotation speed acquisition process at startup is performed in S2201. In this process, the same process is performed individually for each of the exhaust fans, but here, one exhaust fan (3342a (FAN4)) will be described.

In the process of acquiring the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup, the control LSI 3311 has the pulse sensor 3343a within a predetermined period after the projector device 3300 is started (for example, the timing after the power is turned on to the control LSI 3311 or the FAN 4). The rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) detected by the above is acquired and stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311.

Here, the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3342a detected by the pulse sensor 3343a within a predetermined period after the start is started in consideration of, for example, the rise when the FAN4 starts to rotate. Therefore, the number of rotations having the highest value among the number of rotations within a predetermined period can be set. In addition to this, the FAN rotation speed at startup can be grasped by various criteria. For example, the average value of the number of rotations within a predetermined period after starting, the number of rotations detected after a predetermined period has passed since starting, and then at a predetermined timing are taken as the FAN rotation speed at startup. You can also do it.

Further, for example, the FAN rotation speed is detected in each of the continuous minute sections immediately after the FAN4 is activated, and the difference between the FAN rotation speed in one section and the FAN rotation speed in the next section is equal to or less than a predetermined value (that is,). , The timing at which the stable rotation state is entered), the detected FAN rotation speed can be used as the FAN rotation speed at the time of activation.

In addition, the unit of the rotation speed is generally rpm, and the comparison is performed in units of the rotation speed of 1 minute (or the rotation speed converted into the rotation speed of 1 minute), but it is the same as the current FAN rotation speed. Any time range of rotation speed may be used as long as the comparison is made based on the number of rotation speeds in the time range.

Due to such FAN rotation speed error determination, even if the fan rotation speed decreases due to aging deterioration, variation, etc., a warning or forced shutdown is performed according to the change from the FAN rotation speed stored at the time of startup. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inadvertently replacing the fan.

For example, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), when the warning is configured based on the FAN rotation speed on the specifications, if the FAN rotation speed on the specifications is 5000 rpm and the predetermined magnification is 80%, the warning threshold value is set. Is 4000 rpm. Here, assuming the state of the fan before deterioration over time, the FAN rotation speed at startup is 5000 rpm according to the specifications, and a warning is issued when the current FAN rotation speed drops to 4000 rpm. That is, at this point, the grace rotation speed until the warning is 1000 rpm.

Next, assuming the state of the fan after aging deterioration, it is assumed that the FAN rotation speed at the time of starting is 4500 rpm. At this time, since the threshold value of the warning is the same as that before the deterioration over time, the grace rotation speed until the warning is 500 rpm. In such a situation, if the current FAN rotation speed drops by 500 rpm due to factors such as dust and foreign matter, a warning is issued there, and the fan is replaced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), when a warning is given based on the FAN rotation speed at startup, if the predetermined magnification is also 80%, the warning threshold value is the FAN rotation speed at startup. * 0.8. Here, assuming the state of the fan before aging deterioration, the FAN rotation speed at startup is 5000 rpm according to the specifications, and the warning threshold is set to 4000 rpm based on the FAN rotation speed (5000 rpm) at startup. .. Therefore, a warning is given when the current FAN speed drops to 4000 rpm. That is, at this point, the grace rotation speed until the warning is 1000 rpm.

Next, assuming the state of the fan after aging deterioration, it is assumed that the FAN rotation speed at the time of starting is 4500 rpm. At this time, the warning threshold is set to 3600 rpm based on the FAN rotation speed (4500 rpm) at startup. In such a situation, if the current FAN rotation speed drops by 500 rpm due to factors such as dust and foreign matter mixed in, a warning is not issued in that state, unlike the case shown in FIG. 204 (a) described above. Since the warning threshold has a grace rotation speed of 900 rpm, the warning is issued only when the current FAN rotation speed drops by 900 rpm from the FAN rotation speed at startup.

In this way, by setting the warning threshold value based on the FAN rotation speed at startup, the warning threshold value (forced shutdown) according to the aged deterioration and variation of the fan is set, and unnecessary fan replacement is reduced. Can be done. On the other hand, the above method of setting the warning threshold value based on the FAN rotation speed at startup can also be expressed as having different grace rotation speeds until warning according to the decrease in fan rotation speed. is there.

(Screen reversal function 2)
As described above, the projector device 3300 of the game machine 3001 according to the second embodiment adjusts the image to the game machine on which the projector device 3300 is mounted in response to the setting change process from the sub-control board 3200. It has a screen reversal function that rotates and projects (the rotation of the image includes, for example, forward rotation, vertical reversal, horizontal reversal, vertical reversal + horizontal reversal, etc.). Here, another screen inversion function according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 205 shows a side view of the gaming machine 3001', which is a modified example of the gaming machine 3001, and the side wall of the cabinet 3003 is removed. Further, in FIG. 205, for convenience of explanation, a projector device 3300 for projecting an image, a mirror mechanism 3105 for reflecting an image projected from the projector device, a front screen mechanism 3091 for projecting an image from the projector device 3300, and the like. However, each is shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 205, the gaming machine 3001'is a modified example having basically the same configuration and function as the gaming machine 3001, and is the uppermost position (position A) of the gaming machine 3001', and is irradiated. The projector device 3300 is housed in the unit 3100, and the image emitted from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 arranged on the lower front side and projected onto the front screen mechanism 3091.

However, unlike the game machine 3001, in the game machine 3001', the projector device 3300 can be installed at the lowermost position (position B) of the screen device 3090, and when an image is emitted from the projector device 3300. , The image is projected on the screen mechanism 3091'arranged on the front upper side of the projector device 3300.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 3001', the projector device 3300 can be installed at a position (position C) in the lower space of the cabinet 3003, and when an image is emitted from the projector device 3300, the image is displayed on the projector device 3300. It is projected on the screen mechanism 3091'' arranged on the lower front side of the screen.

As described above, in the gaming machine 3001'shown in FIG. 205, the projector device 3300 can be arranged at various positions (positions A to C) of the gaming machine 3001', and various images and the like related to the production of the game can be displayed. It can be displayed in a mode. The projector device 3300 projects an image onto a corresponding screen mechanism based on the rotation direction (that is, the rotation direction of the image) specified according to such various installation positions.

The installation position of the projector device 3300 shown in the gaming machine 3001'is only an example, and the projector device 3300 can be installed at various other positions.

When the projector device 3300 is installed at position A, as described above, the projector device 3300 is housed in the irradiation unit 3100 so that the original upper surface is on the lower side (see FIG. 170), and the filter of the lens cover 3413. The holding portion 3413a is arranged below the projector device 3300, passes through the filter 3414 held by the filter holding portion 3413a, and is irradiated with irradiation light (image) (see FIG. 193). The irradiation light thus irradiated is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105, and the irradiation light (image) reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 is projected onto, for example, the front screen mechanism 3091, and the game projected on the front screen mechanism 3091. The player sees the image or the like related to the production of the above from the front direction of the game machine 3001'.

At this time, in the projector device 3300, as described above, the screen inversion setting is set to "3: upside down + left / right inversion". That is, since the projector device 3300 arranged at the position A in the gaming machine 3001'is stored in a posture that is upside down from the original posture of the projector device 3300 as described above, the image to be irradiated is turned upside down. There is a need. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 and projected onto the front side of the front screen mechanism 3091, and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the game machine 3001'(the front side of the screen mechanism 3091). Therefore, it is necessary to invert the image to be irradiated left and right. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189 (e).

When the projector device 3300 is installed at the position B, the projector device 3300 is housed in the irradiation unit 3100 so that the original upper surface is directly on the upper side, and the filter holding portion 3413a of the lens cover 3413 is placed on the upper side of the projector device 3300. The irradiation light (image) is irradiated (in the upward direction) through the filter 3414 which is arranged and held in the filter holding portion 3413a. The irradiation light thus irradiated is projected onto, for example, the screen mechanism 3091', and the player sees the image related to the production of the game projected on the screen mechanism 3091' from the front direction of the gaming machine 3001'. Become.

At this time, in the projector device 3300, the screen inversion setting is set to "2: left / right inversion" as described above. That is, since the projector device 3300 arranged at the position B in the gaming machine 3001'is stored in the original posture of the projector device 3300 as described above, it is not necessary to turn the image to be irradiated upside down. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 3300 is projected on the rear side of the screen mechanism 3091', and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the game machine 3001'(the front side of the screen mechanism 3091'). It is necessary to flip the image to be left and right. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189 (d).

The screen mechanism 3091'displays an image or the like related to the production of the game as a liquid crystal display screen, and also receives the irradiation light of the projector device 3300 at the position B on the back surface as the rear projector screen of the game machine 3001'. A liquid crystal film capable of providing an image or the like to the front surface is provided. The liquid crystal film can also be configured as a transmissive panel, and the front screen mechanism 3091 behind it, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 exposed when the front screen mechanism 3091 moves, and the reel screen in response to a predetermined signal. The image projected on the mechanism 3130 can be visually recognized by the player.

When the projector device 3300 is installed at position C, the projector device 3300 is housed in the irradiation unit 3100 so that the original upper surface is on the lower side, and the filter holding portion 3413a of the lens cover 3413 is on the lower side of the projector device 3300. The irradiation light (image) is irradiated (downwardly) through the filter 3414 held in the filter holding portion 3413a. The irradiation light thus irradiated is projected onto, for example, the screen mechanism 3091'', and the player sees the image related to the production of the game projected on the screen mechanism 3091'' from the front direction of the gaming machine 3001'. It will be.

At this time, as described above, the projector device 3300 is set to the screen inversion setting of "3: upside down + left / right inversion". That is, since the projector device 3300 arranged at the position C in the gaming machine 3001'is stored in an upside-down posture from the original posture of the projector device 3300 as described above, the image to be irradiated is turned upside down. There is a need. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 3300 is projected on the rear side of the screen mechanism 3091'', and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the game machine 3001'(the front side of the screen mechanism 3091''). , It is necessary to flip the image to be irradiated left and right. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189 (e).

The screen mechanism 3091 ″ is a screen arranged in place of the lumbar panel 3019 configured as a decorative panel as described above, and has the same function as the screen mechanism 3091 ″ described above.

As described above, for the projector device 3300 installed in the gaming machine 3001', the corresponding screen inversion setting is performed according to the installation position of the projector device 3300. For example, it is determined whether or not to flip the screen flip setting upside down depending on whether the projector device 3300 is arranged in the original posture or in the opposite posture. Further, when the irradiation light is reflected from the projector device 3300 by the mirror mechanism, it is determined to invert the screen inversion setting horizontally, but the left / right inversion setting is not limited to such a case, and the screen is described above. It is determined that the screen inversion setting is horizontally inverted even in the case of a so-called rear projection configuration such as projection on the mechanism 3091'(position B) or projection on the screen mechanism 3091'' (position C). To. In addition, when the mirror mechanism and the rear projection configuration are combined, it is possible to prevent the left-right reversal as a result of requiring the left-right reversal twice.

It should be noted that such a screen inversion setting is set in the projector device 3300 by the projector setting change process by the sub-control board 3200 described above (see FIGS. 184 and 185).

For example, in S2098 of the projector setting change process shown in FIG. 185, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 determines whether or not the setting change content is the screen inversion setting, and the setting change content is the screen inversion setting (S2098: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 performs the screen inversion setting process in S2099. In this process, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command for setting the screen inversion to the projector control board 3310.

When the projector control board 3310 of the projector device 3300 receives a command for performing the screen inversion setting from the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200, the projector control board 3310 stores the screen inversion setting in the EEPROM 3312 or the like, and the image related to the production is stored from the sub control board 3200. When there is a command to perform irradiation such as, the rotation direction of the image is determined by referring to the screen inversion setting stored in the EEPROM 3312 or the like, and then the DLP control circuit 3313 or the like is controlled and the optical mechanism 3330 of the image is used. Irradiate.

It should be noted that such a screen inversion setting is set by a hall menu or the like displayed (by a predetermined special operation) when the gaming machine 3001'is started, and is set from the sub-control board 3200 by the above-mentioned projector setting change process. Instructed by the projector device 3300. Further, the screen inversion setting may be configured to be stored in advance in the sub ROM board 42 or the sub RAM board 41 of the sub control board 3200.

Further, in the case where the projector device 3300 can be installed at a plurality of such positions, the sub-control board 3200 or the like has a connection terminal or a connector for connecting to the projector device 3300 at each installation position (of the projector device 3300). If so, the sub-control board 3200 automatically determines the installation position of the projector device 3300 by determining whether or not these connection terminals and connectors are connected to the projector device 3300, and determines the installation position of the projector device 3300. Based on this, it is also possible to control the corresponding screen inversion setting.

The gaming machine 4001 shown in FIGS. 206 and 207 is a pachinko machine that realizes the same functions as the screen inversion setting by the sub-control board 3200 and the projector device 3300 described above. A projector device having the same configuration and function as the projector device 3300 is shown as the projector device 4300. As described above, in the present embodiment, the screen reversing function 2 described above can be applied to the pachinko machine.

FIG. 206 shows a perspective view of the gaming machine 4001. In this gaming machine 4001, the main body frame 4002 is attached to the holding frame 4011, and the top decoration 4009 and the first screen mechanism (first projection area) 4141 are arranged on the front frame 4007 held by the main body frame 4002. Further, a second screen mechanism (second projection area) 4121 is arranged below the first screen mechanism 4141. The left side decorative member 4023 is arranged on the left side of the first screen mechanism 4141 and the second screen mechanism 4121, and the right side decorative member 4021 is arranged on the right side of the first screen mechanism 4141 and the second screen mechanism 4121.

The player operates the firing handle 4079 to launch a game medium (pachinko ball) to execute the game. In addition, the player plays the game while watching the effects displayed on the first screen mechanism 4141 and the second screen mechanism 4121, the video related to the game, and the like.

FIG. 207 is a diagram schematically showing a side surface of the gaming machine 4001, and a part of the internal structure including the projector device 4300 is shown transparently. The projector device 4300 installed at the position D provides the player with an image or the like related to the production by projecting the image as it is on the back surface of the first screen mechanism 4141. Similar to the screen mechanism 3091'and the screen mechanism 3091'' shown in FIG. 205, the first screen mechanism 4141 displays an image or the like related to the production of the game as a liquid crystal display screen, and is located at position D as a rear projector screen. It is provided with a liquid crystal film capable of receiving the irradiation light of the projector device 4300 on the back surface and providing an image or the like to the front surface of the game machine 4001.

The gaming machine 4001 shown in FIG. 207 also shows a state in which the projector device 4300 is installed at the position E. The projector device 4300 installed at the position E irradiates the mirror mechanism 4145 with irradiation light, and the irradiation light reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 is projected onto the back surface of the second screen mechanism 4121. As a result, the player is displayed with an image or the like related to the production. The second screen mechanism 4121 is similar to the screen mechanism 3091 ′ and the screen mechanism 3091 ″ shown in FIG. 205.

In the gaming machine 4001 shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the projector device 4300 can be arranged at either the position D or the position E. For example, the projector device 4300 is installed at the position D to display the image projected from the projector device 4300 on the first screen mechanism 4141, and the second screen mechanism 4121 does not use the projector device 4300 as the liquid crystal display screen. It can be configured to display video.

When the projector device 4300 is installed at position D, the projector device 4300 is housed in the holding frame 4011 so that the original upper surface is on the lower side, and the lens cover 4413 (corresponding to the lens cover 3413 of the projector device 3300). The filter holding portion 4413a (corresponding to the filter holding portion 3413a of the projector device 3300) becomes the lower side of the projector device 4300 and passes through the filter 4414 (corresponding to the filter 3414 of the projector device 3300) held by the filter holding portion 4413a. Then, the irradiation light (image) is irradiated (downward). The irradiation light thus irradiated is projected onto the first screen mechanism 4141 as described above.

At this time, the screen inversion setting of the projector device 4300 is set to "3: upside down + left / right inversion". That is, since the projector device 4300 arranged at the position D in the gaming machine 4001 is stored in a posture upside down from the original posture of the projector device 4300 as described above, it is necessary to turn the image to be irradiated upside down. There is. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 4300 is projected on the rear side of the first screen mechanism 4141, and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the game machine 4001 (the front side of the first screen mechanism 4141). It is necessary to flip the image to be irradiated left and right. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 4300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189 (e).

When the projector device 4300 is installed at position E, the projector device 4300 is housed in the holding frame 4011 so that the original upper surface is on the lower side, and the lens cover 4413 (corresponding to the lens cover 3413 of the projector device 3300). The filter holding portion 4413a (corresponding to the filter holding portion 3413a of the projector device 3300) becomes the lower side of the projector device 4300 and passes through the filter 4414 (corresponding to the filter 3414 of the projector device 3300) held by the filter holding portion 4413a. Then, the irradiation light (image) is irradiated (downward). The irradiation light thus irradiated is projected onto the second screen mechanism 4121 via the mirror mechanism 4145 as described above.

At this time, in the projector device 4300, the screen inversion setting is set to "1: upside down". That is, since the projector device 4300 arranged at the position E in the gaming machine 4001 is stored in a posture upside down from the original posture of the projector device 4300 as described above, it is necessary to turn the image to be irradiated upside down. There is. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 4300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 and projected onto the rear side of the second screen mechanism 4121, and the projected image is projected from the front direction of the game machine 4001 (the front side of the second screen mechanism 4121). Since it is visually recognized by a person, the image to be irradiated is flipped horizontally twice, but as a result, it is the same as the process in which the left-right flip is not performed. After all, the screen inversion setting of the projector device 4300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189 (c).

In this way, the projector device 4300 is set to reverse the screen according to the installation position of the projector device 4300. Such a screen inversion setting is set in the projector device 4300 by the projector setting change process by the sub-control board 4200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 3200) as in the case of the gaming machine 3001'(see FIGS. 184 and 185).

When the projector control board 4310 (control LSI 4311) of the projector device 4300 receives a command for performing the screen inversion setting from the sub CPU 4201 of the sub control board 4200, the projector control board 4310 (control LSI 4311) stores the screen inversion setting in the EEPROM 4312 or the like from the sub control board 4200. When there is a command to irradiate the image or the like related to the production, the rotation direction of the image is determined by referring to the screen inversion setting stored in the EEPROM 4312 or the like, and then the DLP control circuit 4313 or the like is controlled to control the optical mechanism 4330. Is used to irradiate the image.

Further, the projector device 4300 may be a projector that can be selected to rotate the image in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(Screen reversal function 3)
As described above, the projector device 3300 of the game machine 3001 according to the second embodiment adjusts the image to the game machine on which the projector device 3300 is mounted in response to the setting change process from the sub-control board 3200. It has a screen reversal function that rotates and projects (the rotation of the image includes, for example, forward rotation, vertical reversal, horizontal reversal, vertical reversal + horizontal reversal, etc.). Here, another screen inversion function according to the present embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine 4001'shown in FIG. 208 is a modification of the gaming machine 4001 shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, and members having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals. The gaming machine 4001 is configured to install one projector device 4300 at either position D or position E, whereas the gaming machine 4001'has two projector devices (4300a, 4300b) at position D. , And position E at the same time. Further, in such a gaming machine 4001', there may be a region where the projection range of the projector device 4300a at the position D and the projection range of the projector device 4300b at the position E overlap.

Both of the projector devices (4300a, 4300b) have the same configurations and functions as the projector device 4300, and the sub-control board 4200'of the gaming machine 4001'is basically the same as the sub-control board 4200 described above. However, it differs from the sub-control board 4200 in that it individually communicates with the two projector devices (4300a, 4300b).

Further, on the sub-control board 4200', the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 209 is performed so as to determine the rotation direction of the image according to the projector device that projects the image. This effect content determination process is a modification of the effect content determination process (S222) executed by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS shown in FIG. 71.

As shown in FIG. 209, the sub CPU 4201'of the sub control board 4200'(corresponding to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) is produced according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is determined (S2221).

Next, the sub CPU 4201'selects a projector device that projects the determined effect content (S2222).

It is determined whether or not the selected projector device is the first projector (for example, the projector device 4300a shown in FIG. 208) (S2223). If the selected projector device is not the first projector (S2223: No), the sub CPU 4201'shifts to the process of S2226. When the selected projector device is the first projector (S2223: Yes), the sub CPU 4201'moves to the next process of S2224.

In S2224, the sub CPU 4201'determines the image to be projected by the first projector. Next, in S2225, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the first projector is determined. As described above, the screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 4300a by the projector setting change processing by the sub-control board 4200'. As shown in FIG. 208, the projector device 4300a is installed at the position D in an upside-down position, and the irradiation light from the projector device 4300a is projected onto the first screen mechanism 4141 configured as the rear projector screen. Therefore, the screen inversion setting is set to "3: upside down + left / right inversion".

Next, the sub CPU 4201'determines whether or not the selected projector device is a second projector (for example, the projector device 4300b shown in FIG. 208) (S2226). If the selected projector device is not the second projector (S2226: No), the sub CPU 4201'ends the effect content determination process. When the selected projector device is the second projector (S2226: Yes), the sub CPU 4201'moves to the next process of S2227.

In S2227, the sub CPU 4201'determines the image to be projected by the second projector. Next, in S2228, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the second projector is determined. As described above, the screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 4300b by the projector setting change processing by the sub-control board 4200'. As shown in FIG. 208, the projector device 4300b is installed at the position E in an upside-down position, and the irradiation light from the projector device 4300a is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 and then configured as a rear projector screen. Since it is projected on the second screen mechanism 4121, the screen inversion setting is set to "1: upside down".

The sub-control board 4200'can set screen inversion for each projector device (4300a, 4300b) based on the designation information of the rotation direction of the image determined by the effect content determination process (FIG. 6). 184, see FIG. 185). When the control LSI 4311'of the projector control board 4310'of the projector device (4300a, 4300b) stores this screen inversion setting in a DRAM or the like and receives a command from the sub-control board 4200' to irradiate an image or the like related to the production. , The rotation direction of the image is determined with reference to the screen inversion setting stored in the DRAM or the like, and then the DLP control circuit 4313'etc. (corresponding to the DLP control circuit 3313 etc. of the projector device 3300) is controlled to control the optical mechanism 4330. '(Corresponding to the optical mechanism 3330 of the projector device 3300) illuminates the image.

Further, the sub-control board 4200'can set the corresponding screen inversion according to the installation position of the projector device (4300a, 4300b) in advance as long as the rotation direction does not change depending on the effect content, and the projector device (4300a) can be set. 4300b) stores this screen inversion setting in the EEPROM 4312'etc. (corresponding to the EEPROM 3312 etc. of the projector device 3300), and when there is a command from the sub-control board 4200' to irradiate the image or the like related to the production. It can also be configured to determine the rotation direction of the image by referring to the screen inversion setting stored in the EEPROM 4312'or the like.

In this embodiment, the production content is determined according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the command is not received, the rotation direction of the image is determined by referring to the screen inversion setting. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, when the demo screen is displayed, one projector device does not display, and the other projector device displays, even if one projector device does not display. You may control to set the screen inversion of the image. At this time, the state of not displaying on one of the projector devices includes the case of displaying an image in which the projection range is filled with black by using a layer, so that the state is behind the layer displaying the image filled with black. , The identification information (design, decorative symbol, etc.) may fluctuate, and it is possible to set the screen inversion for the image displaying the identification information. Such processing can be set not only for one (single) projector device but also for both (plural) projector devices. It is also possible to set the screen inversion for an image to be filled with black, and the color is not limited to black. Further, since the screen inversion setting can be made for each of such layers, it may be controlled to separately set the screen inversion setting for the superimposed images. By performing such control, when the projection ranges of a plurality of projector devices overlap, the image in which the screen inversion settings are individually set for the overlapping part (the part where the images overlap) can be obtained. Even in the overlapping state, it is possible to project the image normally.

Further, each of the projector devices 4300, 4300a, and 4300b may be a projector that can be selected to rotate the image in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(Screen reversal function 4)
As described above, the projector device 3300 of the game machine 3001 according to the second embodiment rotates the image according to the setting from the sub-control board 3200 according to the game machine on which the projector device 3300 is mounted. It has a screen inversion function for projecting (the rotation of the image includes, for example, forward rotation, vertical inversion, horizontal inversion, vertical inversion + horizontal inversion, etc.). Here, another screen inversion function according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view of an irradiation unit similar to that shown in FIG. 169, but here, an irradiation unit 5100 of the gaming machine 5001 similar to the irradiation unit 3100 of the gaming machine 3001 is shown.

The irradiation unit 5100 shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 is a modification of the irradiation unit 3100 shown in FIG. 169 and the like. The projector device 5300 shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 basically has the same configuration and functions as the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001, but as will be described later, the projector setting change process by the sub-control board 5200 The screen inversion setting is set in the projector device 5300.

Further, in the irradiation unit 3100, the mirror mechanism 3105 is attached so as not to move or rotate except for fine adjustment of the position, whereas the mirror mechanism 5105 of the irradiation unit 5100 rotates around the rotation shaft 5105a. It can be mounted movably. For example, in FIG. 210, the mirror mechanism 5105 is arranged at the position F, and in FIG. 211, a state in which the mirror mechanism 5105 is moved from the position F to the position G is shown.

As shown in FIG. 210, when the mirror mechanism 5105 is rotated downward (position F), the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 5300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 5105 and projected onto the front screen mechanism 5091 or the like. To.

Further, as shown in FIG. 211, when the mirror mechanism 5105 is moved to a horizontal position (position G), the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 5300 is projected onto the front surface of the projector device 5300. In this case, the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 5300 is projected onto the player, the screen, or the like. In the case of the irradiation unit 5100, the screen does not exist on the front side of the projector device 5300, but the screen and the decorative member may be arranged so that the irradiation light can be projected.

The mirror mechanism 5105 can be driven by, for example, a conventional drive mechanism. The mirror mechanism 5105 is provided with a rotation shaft 5105a extending in the left-right direction. Both ends of the rotating shaft 5105a are rotatably held by the projector cover 5101 (corresponding to the projector cover 3101 of the projector device 3300), and when the mirror drive motor is driven by the control of the sub-control board 5200, the mirror drive motor The motor shaft gear fixed to the shaft portion rotates, and in conjunction with this motor shaft gear, the rotary shaft gear provided near the end of the rotary shaft 5105a is rotated, and as a result, the mirror mechanism 5105 is positioned. It rotates around the rotation axis 5105a from F to position G or from position G to position F. The mirror drive motor is, for example, a drive unit such as a stepping motor.

The gaming machine 6001 shown in FIG. 212 is a modification of the gaming machine 4001'shown in FIG. 208, and members having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals. Similar to the gaming machine 4001', the gaming machine 6001 is configured to simultaneously include two projector devices (6300a, 6300b) at positions D and E. Further, it is configured to include a mirror mechanism 6140 and a third screen mechanism 6142. The drive mechanism of such a mirror mechanism 6140 is the same as the drive mechanism of the mirror mechanism 5105 described above.

The projector devices (6300a, 6300b) have the same configurations and functions as the projector devices (4300a, 4300b), but are determined according to the operation of the mirror mechanism 6140 by the effect content determination process, as will be described later. The screen inversion setting is performed for the two projector devices (6300a, 6300b) by the projector setting change processing by the sub-control board 6200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 4200') in the rotation direction.

In the game machine 6001 shown in FIG. 212, the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 6300a is not reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140 and is projected as it is on the first screen mechanism 4141. As a result, the projector device 4300a shown in FIG. It becomes the same projection mode as.

The irradiation light emitted from the projector device 6300b is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 and projected onto the second screen mechanism 4121 as in FIG. 208.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 6001 shown in FIG. 213, the mirror mechanism 6140 rotates downward, and the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 6300a is reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140 and projected onto the third screen mechanism 6142. .. The image projected on the third screen mechanism 6142 is visually recognized by the player via the first screen mechanism 4141. In this case, the first screen mechanism 4141 is a liquid crystal film configured as a transmissive panel in response to a predetermined signal, like the screen mechanism 3091'in FIG. 205, and by making the first screen mechanism 4141 a transmissive panel. , The player can visually recognize the image projected on the third screen mechanism 6142 behind it.

Here, the effect content determination process in which the sub-control board 6200 determines the rotation direction of the image according to the position of the mirror mechanism 6140 and the projector devices (6300a, 6300b) that project the image will be described with reference to FIG. 214. To do. This effect content determination process is a modification of the effect content determination process (S222) executed by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS shown in FIG. 71.

As shown in FIG. 214, the sub CPU 6201 of the sub control board 6200 (corresponding to the sub CPU 4201'of the sub control board 4200') is produced according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is determined (S2241).

Next, the sub CPU 6201 selects a projector device that projects the determined effect content (S2242).

Next, the sub CPU 6201 determines whether or not the determined effect content is an effect of moving the mirror mechanism 6140 (that is, whether or not the effect of moving the mirror mechanism 6140 to the lower side (position of FIG. 213)) (S2243). .. If the effect is not to move the mirror mechanism 6140 (S2243: No), the process proceeds to S2247. In the case of the effect of moving the mirror mechanism 6140 (S2243: Yes), the process proceeds to the next process of S2244.

Next, the sub CPU 6201 determines in S2244 whether or not the selected projector device is the first projector (for example, the projector device 6300a shown in FIGS. 212 and 213). If the selected projector device is not the first projector (S2244: No), the sub CPU 6201 shifts to the process of S2247. When the selected projector device is the first projector (S2244: Yes), the sub CPU 6201 shifts to the next process of S2245.

In S2245, the sub CPU 6201 determines the image to be projected by the first projector. Next, in S2246, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the first projector is determined. As described above, the screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 6300a by the projector setting change processing by the sub-control board 6200. As shown in FIG. 213, the projector device 6300a is installed at the position D in an upside-down position, is reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140, and the reflected light is projected onto the front side of the third screen mechanism 6142. , The screen inversion setting is set to "3: upside down + left / right inversion".

In this example, when the effect is not to move the mirror mechanism 6140 (S2243: No), it is controlled not to project the image by the first projector, but in this case, the image is projected by the first projector. You may. At this time, the irradiation light from the projector device 6300a is not reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140 and is directly projected onto the rear side of the first screen mechanism 4141. Therefore, the screen inversion setting is set to "3: upside down + left / right inversion". Set.

Next, the sub CPU 6201 determines whether or not the selected projector device is a second projector (for example, the projector device 6300b shown in FIGS. 212 and 213) (S2247). If the selected projector device is not the second projector (S2247: No), the sub CPU 6201 ends the effect content determination process. When the selected projector device is the second projector (S2247: Yes), the sub CPU 6201 shifts to the next process of S2248.

In S2248, the sub CPU 6201 determines the image to be projected by the second projector. Next, in S2249, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the second projector is determined. As described above, the screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 6300b by the projector setting change processing by the sub-control board 6200. As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the projector device 6300b is installed at the position E in an upside-down posture, and the irradiation light from the projector device 6300b is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 to be reflected by the mirror mechanism 4121, and the second screen mechanism 4121. Since it is projected on the rear side, the screen inversion setting is set to "1: upside down".

The sub-control board 6200 can set screen inversion for each projector device (6300a, 6300b) based on the information for designating the rotation direction of the image determined by the effect content determination process (FIG. 184). , See FIG. 185). When the control LSI 6311 of the projector control board 6310 of the projector device (6300a, 6300b) stores this screen inversion setting in a DRAM or the like and receives a command from the sub control board 6200 to irradiate an image or the like related to the effect, the DRAM or the like The rotation direction of the image is determined with reference to the screen inversion setting stored in, and then the DLP control circuit 6313 and the like (corresponding to the DLP control circuit 3313 and the like of the projector device 3300) are controlled to control the optical mechanism 6330 (projector device 3300). (Corresponding to the optical mechanism 3330 of the above) is used to irradiate the image.

Further, the sub-control board 6200 can set the corresponding screen inversion setting in advance according to the installation position of the projector device 6300b as long as the rotation direction does not change depending on the effect content, and the projector device 6300b has this setting. When the screen inversion setting is stored in the EEPROM 6312 or the like (corresponding to the EEPROM 3312 or the like of the projector device 3300) and there is a command from the sub-control board 6200 to irradiate the image or the like related to the production, the screen inversion stored in the EEPROM 6312 or the like is performed. It can also be configured to determine the direction of rotation of the image with reference to the settings.

Further, each of the projector devices 5300, 6300a, and 6300b may be a projector that can be selected to rotate the image in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD (secondary control board))
Next, in the sub-control board 3200 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, a function of issuing a warning based on a temperature rise related to the DMD 3333 will be described. As described above, in the game machine 3001, in the projector device 3300, when the temperature abnormality related to the DMD 3333 is determined by the projector self-diagnosis process (see FIG. 181) and the temperature related to the DMD 3333 exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the projector device The main operation of the 3300 was controlled to be forcibly shut down, but here, various warning screens are displayed under the control from the sub-control board 3200 side according to the temperature related to the DMD3333.

That is, by acquiring the temperature (DMD temperature) related to the DMD 3333 from the projector device 3300 on the sub-control board 3200 side and instructing the projector device 3300 to irradiate the front screen mechanism 3091 with an image based on the acquired DMD temperature. , The warning screen is displayed on the upper display window 3009 of the game machine 3001, or the warning screen is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 by instructing via the sub liquid crystal I / F substrate SL.

FIG. 215 shows a warning screen displayed according to the instruction of the sub-control board 3200. FIG. 215 (a) shows a warning screen (1) displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 when the DMD temperature satisfies a predetermined condition. In this example, since most of the increase in DMD temperature is caused by placing an object on the ventilation openings 3024a and 3024b of the gaming machine 3001, the portion of the ventilation openings 3024a and 3024b is highlighted in the gaming machine 3001. The upper part of the housing (3002) is shown as a guide diagram 3501.

FIG. 215 (b) shows a warning screen (2) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 when the DMD temperature satisfies a predetermined condition.

The period during which the warning screen (1) is displayed is, for example, from the time when the DMD temperature satisfies a predetermined condition until the forced shutdown by the projector device 3300 described above, and the warning screen (2) is displayed. The displayed period is, for example, from the time when the projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down and the front screen mechanism 3091 and the like are no longer irradiated with images until the power is cut off (the power of the gaming machine 3001 is turned off).

Further, the period during which the warning screen (2) is displayed is not after the projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down and the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like is no longer irradiated with the image, but before the irradiation is stopped. It is also possible to control the game machine 3001 so that the period from when the forced shutdown is grasped to when the power is cut off. When the projector device 3300 shuts down, it is also possible to configure the projector device 3300 to transmit the fact to the gaming machine 3001 before the shutdown. In this case, the projector device 3300 displays a warning screen on the game machine 3001. The warning screen (2) can be displayed even while the (1) is being displayed.

In the present embodiment, the DMD temperature is the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 (from the projector device 3300) every second. Further, the display / non-display of the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) as described above is determined by the relationship between the DMD temperature and the threshold values such as the warning temperature and the stable temperature. Further, a specified number of temperature drops is set as a reference for the number of temperature drops, and is set to 3 here.

Further, the expected shutdown temperature of the DMD3333 (threshold value of the DMD temperature expected to be forcibly shut down by the projector device 3300) is set to 64 ° C. The expected shutdown temperatures of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) are 105 ° C for 3331R and 125 ° C for 3331G and 3331B.

Further, in the processing of the sub-control board 3200, four DMD temperatures are maintained. Here, the current temperature measurement value (DMD temperature) is TempNow, the one-time previous TempNow is TempOld1, the two-time previous TempNow is TempOld2, and the three-time previous TempNow is TempOld3. The DMD temperature is acquired every second, and TempNow is also updated accordingly, but TempNow is updated only when the DMD temperature is different from the previous time. Therefore, when TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, and TempOld3 are compared side by side, the same values are not stored adjacent to each other.

Further, in the processing of the sub-control board 3200, four transitions of the DMD temperature state are maintained. Here, if TempOld1 <TempNow, "upward transition" is set, and if TempOld1> TempNow, "downward transition" is set. Let TempNowSt be TempOld3St. Since TempNowSt is set as described above, it indicates whether or not the current DMD temperature has risen from the previous DMD temperature.

The values of the warning temperature, the stable temperature, and the specified number of temperature drops are stored in, for example, the sub ROM board 42. TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3, TempNowSt, TempOld1St, TempOld2St, and TempOld3St are temporarily stored in, for example, the sub-RAM board 41 or SRAM 401.

FIG. 216 shows conditions related to the display of the warning screen. Condition A and condition B are conditions for displaying the warning screen, condition C and condition D are conditions for hiding the displayed warning screen, and condition E is the displayed warning. This is a condition for maintaining the screen or the hidden warning screen as it is.

Condition A is that (A-1) TempNowSt is "rising", (A-2) TempNow is above the warning temperature, and (A-3) TempNowSt is below the warning temperature. It is a condition that all three conditions of "" are satisfied.

Condition B is that (B-1) TempNowSt is "rising transition", (B-2) TempNow is above the warning temperature, and (B-3) TempOld1 is above the warning temperature, then TempNowSt and TempOld1St are "up". It is a condition that all three conditions of "upward transition" are satisfied.

Condition C is a condition in which (C-1) TempNowSt is a “downward transition” and (C-2) TempNow is a stable temperature or less.

Condition D is a condition that (D-1) "falling transition" continues for the specified number of temperature drops. As described above, in this example, since the specified number of temperature drops is three, the condition D is that TempNowSt, Tempold1St, and Tempold2St are "falling transitions".

Condition E is a condition that (E-1) does not correspond to the above conditions A to D, or (E-2) TempOld1 is 0 ° C. When TempOld1 is 0 ° C., the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 may be a negative value due to noise or the like, and the sub-control board 3200 receives such a negative value as the DMD temperature. Then, in order to correct to 0 ° C. on the sub-control board 3200 side, 0 ° C. may be stored in TempOld1 or the like, and the condition (E-2) corresponds to this.

Next, a specific display of the warning screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. FIG. 217 is a table showing how the DMD temperature and the warning screen are displayed when the DMD temperature is sequentially acquired in the sub-control board 3200. In this table, the number of times the DMD temperature is acquired is shown, but as described above, when the same DMD temperature continues, TempNow is not updated and the number of times the temperature is acquired is not shown. The item of "temperature" corresponds to TempNow of the number of times the temperature is acquired, and is in increments of 0.25 ° C. Further, in this example, the warning temperature is 50 ° C., the stable temperature is 49 ° C., which is lower than the warning temperature, and the item of "state" corresponds to TempNowSt of the number of times the temperature is acquired.

When the number of temperature acquisitions = "0" to "8", the temperature rises continuously, but the warning temperature of 50 ° C. is not exceeded, conditions A and B are not satisfied, and of course, conditions C and D are also satisfied. Therefore, the condition E is satisfied, and the hidden state is maintained. When the number of temperature acquisitions = "9", TempNow becomes 50 ° C. and the condition A is satisfied, so that a warning screen is displayed based on the condition A. Further, at this time, since the DMD temperature is 64 ° C. or lower and the projector device 3300 has not been forcibly shut down, the warning screen (1) is displayed.

When the number of temperature acquisitions = "10" to "15", the rising transition is continuous and TempNow and TempOld1 exceed 50 ° C. Therefore, the condition B is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is displayed based on the condition B. .. When the number of temperature acquisitions = "16" and "17", the temperature changes, but the conditions C and D are not satisfied (condition E is satisfied), so that the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained.

When the number of temperature acquisitions = "18" to "20", the descending transition continues three or more times, so that the condition D is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is hidden based on the condition D.

After that, the conditions A to E are similarly determined, and the warning screen is displayed / hidden. For example, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "32", the downward transition is continuous twice and the TempNow is 49 ° C. or lower, so that the condition C is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is hidden based on the condition C.

Further, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "36", the warning screen (1) should originally satisfy the condition A, but TempOld1, that is, the TempNow of the previous time (the number of temperature acquisitions = "35") is 0 ° C. Therefore, the state is maintained according to the condition E, and the non-display under the condition C is maintained when the number of temperature acquisitions = "35".

Further, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "44" to "49", the warning screen will continue to rise, but when the number of temperature acquisitions = "44", the warning screen (1) will be displayed under condition A. On the other hand, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "45" to "49", a warning screen is displayed under condition B, and further, TempNow is displayed because it exceeds the expected shutdown temperature of DMD3333 of 64 ° C. The warning screen is the warning screen (2).

FIG. 218 is a graph showing the transition of the DMD temperature shown in FIG. 217. The range of the number of times the temperature is acquired where the warning screen (1) is displayed and the temperature at which the warning screen (2) is displayed. The range of the number of acquisitions is shown. As described above, the horizontal axis is based on the number of temperature acquisitions in which the DMD temperature different from the previous time is acquired, and is not in units of time. Further, although the vertical axis shows the DMD temperature (° C.), the display of 53 ° C. or higher is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 218, the number of times of temperature acquisition = "9" to "17", "24" to "26", "30", "31", "34", "39", "40", "44" The warning screen (1) is displayed, and the warning screen (2) is displayed when the number of temperature acquisitions = "45" to "49".

FIG. 219 shows the same DMD temperature transition as that shown in FIG. 217. Here, FIG. 219 newly shows an item called "projector temperature warning number of times". The number of times the projector temperature warning is displayed is a count-up of the number of times the warning display (1) and the warning display (2) are performed for each gaming machine 3001.

The number of projector temperature warnings is counted up when the warning screen is not displayed at the previous number of temperature acquisitions and the warning screen is displayed at the current number of temperature acquisitions. For example, as shown in FIG. 219, the warning screen is not displayed when the number of temperature acquisitions = "8", and the warning screen (1) is displayed when the number of temperature acquisitions = "9". Count up the first temperature warning. When the temperature acquisition count = "10", the warning screen (1) is displayed, but since the warning screen (1) is displayed when the temperature acquisition count = "9" last time, it is not subject to the count-up.

After that, similarly, the number of times of temperature acquisition = "24", "30", "34", "39", "44" is counted up, and the number of projector temperature warnings is finally 6 times.

Further, as described in relation to FIGS. 217 and 218, the warning screen (1) is displayed when the number of temperature acquisitions = "44", and the warning screen (2) is displayed when the number of temperature acquisitions = "45". Although it is displayed, when such different warning screens are displayed with the number of consecutive temperature acquisitions, in the example of FIG. 219, the display of such a warning screen is counted as one time, but the warning screen ( It is also possible to count up 1) and the warning screen (2) individually. Then, in the case shown in FIG. 219, the number of projector temperature warnings is 6 for the warning screen (1) and 1 for the warning screen (2). Further, the number of such projector temperature warnings is stored as cumulative data for the gaming machine 3001, but it can also be managed as the number of projector temperature warnings on a daily basis or in a predetermined period.

Further, the number of projector temperature warnings thus grasped can be converted into a two-dimensional code and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. For example, a person in charge of operation / maintenance of the game machine 3001 causes the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 to display a hall menu or an error screen related to the operation / maintenance by performing a predetermined special operation on the game machine 3001. When instructed to display the two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code including the data of the number of projector temperature warnings is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

The person in charge of operation / maintenance can grasp the number of projector temperature warnings of the gaming machine 3001 by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like and performing a predetermined decoding process. In addition to the number of projector temperature warnings, the two-dimensional code includes the number of shutdowns of the projector device 3300, the number of shutdowns of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), the number of shutdowns of the DLP control circuit 3313, the number of shutdowns of the exhaust fan 3342, and the LED. The maximum temperature of the light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the like can be included, so that the hard error information and the like of the game machine 3001 can be easily managed at a detailed level.

FIG. 220 shows the transition of DMD temperature similar to that shown in FIG. 217. The temperature transition shown in FIG. 220 is different from the temperature transition in FIG. 217 in that the DMD temperature (TempNow) is 50.50 ° C. when the number of temperature acquisitions = “37”.

In such a case, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "36", the warning screen (1) should originally satisfy the condition A, but TempOld1, that is, the previous TempNow (the number of temperature acquisitions = "35") is Since the temperature is 0 ° C., the condition E is satisfied, the state is maintained, and the non-display under the condition C is maintained when the temperature acquisition count = “35”. Further, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "37", TempOld1 is 50 ° C. or higher, and TempNowSt and TempOld1St are "rising transitions", so that condition B is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

That is, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "37", TempOld1St (the state at the number of temperature acquisitions = "36") is based on the temperature caused by noise or the like, such as TempNow = 0 ° C. when the number of temperature acquisitions = "35". Although it is a judgment of "rise", this TempOld1St is grasped as an effective "rise transition".

Next, the projector temperature warning screen determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 221. This process can be performed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by a subdevice task (see FIG. 73) of the subcontrol board 3200.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter in S2661. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2262 whether or not the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the transmission cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2662: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2265. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2662: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next process of S2263.

Next, in S2263, the sub CPU 3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d indicating the temperature near the DMD 3333. The status value is set to a value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d. Due to such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2264). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the current DMD temperature (TempNow) is 64 ° C. or higher (S2265). When the DMD temperature is not 64 ° C. or higher (S2265: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2267. When the DMD temperature is 64 ° C. or higher (S2265: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 is set to display the warning screen (2) on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2266). Since the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 is configured as the touch panel 3023T, the player or the like can perform operations related to the game and operations related to responding to the warning in response to the display of the warning screen (2). .. After that, the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2272.

In this example, TempNow (DMD temperature) is referred to, and if this is 64 ° C. or higher, the warning screen (2) is controlled to be displayed. 64 ° C. is the expected shutdown temperature of the DMD 3333 as described above, and from this temperature, it can be expected that the projector device 3300 will perform a forced shutdown in the sub CPU 3201.

In such a process, when the DMD temperature rises to 64 ° C., a forced shutdown is performed on the projector device 3300 side, and information can no longer be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like. Is intended to display a warning screen on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 capable of displaying. However, it is also possible to control the display of the warning screen (2) based on a standard other than the DMD temperature. For example, since the projector device 3300 has a shutdown factor other than DMD3333, when the projector device 3300 shuts down (or when there is a possibility of shutting down), a warning screen (2) is uniformly displayed. You may control it.

Further, when the projector device 3300 shuts down, a notification to that effect can be transmitted from the projector device 3300 to the sub control board 3200 or the like, and in this case, the sub CPU 3201 may detect the shutdown of the projector device 3300. it can.

In S2267, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether TempNow has been updated, that is, whether the current DMD temperature has changed. When TempNow is not updated (S2267: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. When TempNow is updated (S2267: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the warning screen (2) is set in S2268. When the warning screen (2) is set (S2268: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. These processes mean that once the warning screen (2) is displayed, the display of the warning screen (2) is not erased until the gaming machine 3001 is turned off (power off).

When the warning screen (2) is not set (S2268: No), the sub CPU 3201 executes the warning screen display control process in S2269. As described above, the determination (condition E) when TempOld1 is 0 ° C. is also performed by this process. Further, in this example, when TempOld1 is 0 ° C., it is controlled to maintain the display / non-display of the warning screen, but when TempOld1 becomes negative, it is controlled to maintain the display / non-display of the warning screen. You may try to do it.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not to display the warning screen in S2270. When the warning screen is not displayed (S2270: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. When displaying the warning screen (S2270: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 is set to display the warning screen (1) on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2271). In this case, not only the warning screen (1) is displayed on the front screen 3091 mechanism or the like, but also other displays such as displaying the warning screen (2) on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like can be performed in parallel. it can.

Next, in S2272, the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the number of projector temperature warnings when the warning screen is not displayed last time and the warning screen is displayed in this process. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. As described above, the number of projector temperature warnings accumulated in this way is converted into a two-dimensional code and can be confirmed on the hall menu or the error screen.

Next, the warning screen display control process (S2269) in the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221 will be described with reference to FIG. 222.

First, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2291 whether TempOld1 is 0 ° C. or lower. When TempOld1 is not 0 ° C. or lower, that is, when it is a positive value (S2291: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2293. When TempOld1 is 0 ° C. or lower (for example, 0 ° C.) (S2291: Yes), the process proceeds to the next process of S2292, and it is determined that the screen display is to maintain the state. This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition E. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the display control process of the warning screen.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2293 whether or not TempNowSt is in an upward transition, that is, whether or not there is a relationship of the previous DMD temperature (TempOld1) <the current DMD temperature (TempNow). When TempNowSt is in an upward trend (S2293: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2299. When TempNowSt does not increase (S2293: No), it is determined whether or not TempNow is below the stable temperature (S2294). The stable temperature is set to 49 ° C. in this example.

When TempNow is not below the stable temperature (S2294: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2296. When TempNow is below the stable temperature (S2294: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2297 in order to hide the warning screen. This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition C.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2296 whether or not the downward transition continues a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times is the above-mentioned specified number of temperature drops, and in this example, it is set to three times. When the downward transition continues a predetermined number of times (S2296: Yes), it is determined to hide the warning screen (S2297). This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition D. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the display control process of the warning screen. On the other hand, when the downward transition is not continued a predetermined number of times (S2296: No), it is determined that the screen display is maintained in the state (S2298). This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition E. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the display control process of the warning screen.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2299 whether or not TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature. The warning temperature is set to 50 ° C. in this example. When TempNow is not equal to or higher than the warning temperature (S2299: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2304. When TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature (S2299: Yes), it is determined whether or not TempOld1 is lower than the warning temperature (S2300).

When TempOld1 is not lower than the warning temperature (S2300: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2302. When TempOld1 is lower than the warning temperature (S2300: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2303 to display the warning screen. This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition A.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2302 whether or not TempOld1St is in an upward transition, that is, whether or not there is a relationship of the previous DMD temperature (TempOld2) <previous DMD temperature (TempOld1). When TempOld1St is not in an upward transition (S2302: No), it is determined that the screen display is maintained in the state (S2304). This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition E. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the display control process of the warning screen.

On the other hand, when TempOld1St is in an upward trend (S2302: Yes), it is determined to display a warning screen (S2303). This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition B. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the display control process of the warning screen.

In the warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 222, the warning screen is hidden in S2297 and controlled to be displayed in S2303, but such a warning screen may be a display of the entire screen. Further, in S2292, S2298, and S2304, it is determined that the screen display is to maintain the state, which basically means that the display state or the non-display state of the warning screen is maintained. However, at this time, it is possible to control to maintain the display or non-display of not only the warning screen but also the entire screen (even if the warning screen is not the display of the entire screen).

In the present embodiment, the display control process of the warning screen is performed in the flow as shown in FIG. 222, and various display controls can be performed in this regard. For example, if the warning screen is displayed, it may be determined to hide the warning screen, and if the warning screen is not displayed, the state may be maintained.

As described above, when the projector device 3300 shuts down, a notification (error notification) to that effect is transmitted from the projector device 3300 to the sub control board 3200, and the sub CPU 3201 detects the shutdown of the projector device 3300. can do.

Such an error notification determines that the DMD temperature is abnormal, as described in, for example, S2008 to S2010 of the projector control main process shown in FIG. 180 and S2033 of the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIG. 181. Then, the control LSI 3311 sets the error information of the DMD temperature abnormality in the error management area of the projector (S2033), and the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating the error notification as transmission data in response to the error information (S2033). S2008), a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, a process as shown in S825 of FIG. 135). In S825 of FIG. 135, when a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality is set in the error management area, the reset request is turned ON and the corresponding error notification command is controlled so as not to be transmitted (FIG. 135). (See S818, S819', and S825), in the present embodiment, it is possible to control the transmission of the corresponding error notification command even for such an error in which the reset request is turned ON.

Further, in S450 of the projector control reception processing shown in FIG. 138, a status request command is transmitted to the projector control board 3310 in response to the status request for acquiring the DMD temperature set by the sub CPU 3201. Note that FIG. 56 shows a status value corresponding to the LED temperature and the FAN rotation speed as a parameter of the status request (CMD: 83H) of the sub-control board (transmission command), but the status value corresponding to the DMD temperature. Is also added according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 56 shows commands corresponding to the LED temperature (CMD: 85H) and the FAN rotation speed (CMD: 86H) of the projector control board (transmission command), which also correspond to the DMD temperature. The command to be executed is added according to the present embodiment.

In S445 shown in FIG. 138, the status request command is controlled to be transmitted when there is no projector setting change request, but the control is not limited to such control. For example, a parameter request command is used. You may control to send the status request command every time it receives (S444: Yes).

Further, the status request command may be controlled so as to be sequentially transmitted to the projector device 3300 when each status request command is set.

On the other hand, the process of receiving the status request command from the sub-control board 3200 by the projector control board 3310 is performed in the sub-control-projector transmission time process shown in FIG. 135, and in S822, the transmission request of the command corresponding to the status is performed. If there is (S822: Yes), the status transmission data creation process shown in FIG. 223 is executed. The status transmission data creation process of FIG. 223 will be described later.

In the sub-control-projector transmission processing of FIG. 135, all the commands transmitted from the projector device 3300 are transmitted at intervals of 500 ms (S811 to S813), but the'parameter request'command of S824 is transmitted. Only the DMD temperature can be transmitted at intervals of 500 ms, and other commands can be transmitted at any time, and it is possible to acquire the DMD temperature at intervals of 1 second as in the present embodiment.

Further, when the projector device 3300 receives a status request command from the gaming machine side (sub-control board 3200), the projector device 3300 can be controlled so that the corresponding status can be sequentially transmitted.

It should be noted that the projector control board 3310 can transmit a parameter request command at an arbitrary timing. For example, when the projector control board 3310 is processing a command, the transmission of the'parameter request'command is omitted. be able to.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the status transmission data creation process, which is a partial improvement of the status transmission data creation process shown in FIG. 115 described above.

The status transmission data creation process shown in FIG. 223 is obtained by adding a status transmission data creation process (command transmission data creation process) related to DMD temperature to the status transmission data creation process of FIG. 115, and the other processes are the same. Therefore, the same processing as in FIG. 115 is designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In S849, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next process of S2321.

In S2321, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area is the DMD temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is the DMD temperature (S2321: Yes), the control LSI 3311 shifts to the next processing of S2322. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the DMD temperature (S2321: No), the control LSI 3311 ends the status transmission data creation process.

Next, the control LSI 3311 inputs data from the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333, and generates the DMD temperature data (S2322).

Next, the control LSI 3311 creates a'DMD temperature'command that includes DMD temperature data in the status as transmission data (S2323). After that, the control LSI 3311 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In addition, the status of the lens temperature (for example, the temperature near the lens unit 3332, particularly the temperature near the power for driving the angle of the lens, the temperature near the power transmission, etc.) can also be transmitted.

224 and 225 are flowcharts showing the projector status reception processing, which is a partial improvement of the projector status reception processing shown in FIG. 94 described above. Since the sub CPU 3201 receives the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 on the gaming machine 3001 side, if the acquired command is the DMD temperature in the projector status reception processing, the DMD temperature data is saved. Perform processing.

The projector status reception processing shown in FIGS. 224 and 225 is obtained by adding the reception processing related to the DMD temperature as described above to the projector status reception processing of FIG. 94, and the other processing is the same. The same processing as in FIG. 94 is designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After S534 shown in FIG. 224, the process of the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2341 shown in FIG. 225. In S2341, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the acquired command is the DMD temperature. If the acquired command is not the DMD temperature (S2341: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector status reception processing.

When the acquired command is the DMD temperature (S2341: Yes), the sub CPU3201 corrects the acquired DMD temperature to 0 ° C. in S2342 when the acquired DMD temperature is negative. In this example, when the DMD temperature is negative, the DMD temperature is corrected to 0 ° C., but it is not limited to such processing. For example, the DMD temperature is negative without correction. It is also possible to leave it as it is.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2343 whether or not the acquired DMD temperature is the same value as the DMD temperature currently stored as TempNow. When the acquired DMD temperature is the same as TempNow (S2343: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2346.

When the acquired DMD temperature is not the same as TempNow (S2343: No), the sub CPU3201 saves DMD temperature data in the projector status storage area in S2344 to update TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, and TempOld3. That is, the value of TempOld2 is copied to TempOld3, the value of TempOld1 is copied to TempOld2, the value of TempNow is copied to TempOld1, and the saved DMD temperature data is copied to TempNow.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 compares TempNow and TempOld1 set as described above in S2344, and updates TempNowSt, TempOld1St, TempOld2St, and TempOld3St (S2345). That is, the value of TempOld2St is copied to TempOld3St, the value of TempOld1St is copied to TempOld2St, the value of TempNowSt is copied to TempOld1St, and TempNow and TempOld1 are compared by TempNow and TempOld1.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a status request completion command transmission process in S2346. In this process, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector status reception processing.

FIG. 226 is a diagram showing a communication sequence during normal operation between the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 and the projector device 3300. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 226 is an improvement of the communication sequence of FIG. 158 for the present embodiment, and a PJ status request from the sub-control board 3200 according to the configuration / function of the gaming machine 3001 of the present embodiment. The contents of are changed.

As shown in FIG. 226, during the normal operation of the projector device 3300, the control LSI 3311 of the projector device 3300 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a status request “LED temperature (R)” command (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. The control LSI 3311 that has received the command of the status request "LED temperature (R)" sets the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341a as the LED temperature (R), and substituting the command (see FIG. 227) indicating the LED temperature (R). It is transmitted to the CPU 3201.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) of the status request “LED temperature (G)” to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. The control LSI 3311 that has received the command of the status request "LED temperature (G)" sets the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341b as the LED temperature (G), and substituting the command indicating the LED temperature (G) (see FIG. 227). It is transmitted to the CPU 3201.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) of the status request “LED temperature (B)” to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. The control LSI 3311 that has received the command of the status request "LED temperature (B)" sets the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341c as the LED temperature (B), and substituting the command (see FIG. 227) indicating the LED temperature (B). It is transmitted to the CPU 3201.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) of the status request “lens temperature” to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. Upon receiving the command of the status request "lens temperature", the control LSI 3311 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) indicating the lens temperature to the sub CPU 3201 with the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341e as the lens temperature.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) of the status request “FAN4 rotation speed” to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. Upon receiving the command of the status request "FAN4 rotation speed", the control LSI 3311 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) indicating the FAN4 rotation speed to the sub CPU 3201 using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor 3343a of the FAN4 as the FAN4 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) of the status request “FAN5 rotation speed” to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. Upon receiving the command of the status request "FAN5 rotation speed", the control LSI 3311 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) indicating the FAN5 rotation speed to the sub CPU 3201 with the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor 3343b of the FAN 5 as the FAN5 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) of the status request “DMD temperature” to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. Upon receiving the command of the status request "DMD temperature", the control LSI 3311 transmits a command (see FIG. 227) indicating the DMD temperature to the sub CPU 3201 with the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d as the DMD temperature.

After that, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command for completing the status request to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311, and the control LSI 3311 receiving the command transmits a command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 3201. As a result, the communication sequence in the normal operation of the projector device 3300 is completed.

In FIG. 226, after the parameter request, various PJ status requests and corresponding values are transmitted as a series of communication sequences. For example, only the parameter request is transmitted at a fixed interval such as 500 ms interval, and other The PJ status request command can be sent at any time.

FIG. 227 shows the commands used in the communication sequence during normal operation of FIG. 226. Although not shown in FIG. 56, in the sub-control board 3200 (sub-CPU3201), the status value “8” corresponding to the lens temperature is used as a parameter for the status request (83h) related to the lens temperature, and the projector device 3300 (sub CPU3201) The control LSI 3311) transmits a command (CMD = “8Ch”) corresponding to the lens temperature to the sub CPU 3201 in response to this.

Further, in the sub control board 3200 (sub CPU 3201), the status value "9" corresponding to the rotation speed of the FAN 4 is used as a parameter in the status request (83h) regarding the rotation speed of the FAN 4, and the projector device 3300 (control LSI 3311). Corresponds to this, and transmits a command (CMD = "86h", parameter: D4) corresponding to the rotation speed of FAN4 to the sub CPU3201.

In the sub control board 3200 (sub CPU3201), the status value "10" corresponding to the rotation speed of the FAN 5 is used as a parameter in the status request (83h) relating to the rotation speed of the FAN 5, and the projector device 3300 (control LSI 3311) uses the projector device 3300 (control LSI 3311). In response to this, a command (CMD = "86h", parameter: D5) corresponding to the rotation speed of the FAN 5 is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201.

Further, in the sub-control board 3200 (sub-CPU 3201), the status value "11" corresponding to the DMD temperature is used as a parameter in the status request (83h) regarding the DMD temperature, and the projector device 3300 (control LSI 3311) uses this as a parameter. Correspondingly, a command (CMD = "8Dh") corresponding to the DMD temperature is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD, etc. (Modification example 1))
As described above, in the sub-control board 3200 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, the function of issuing a warning based on the temperature rise related to DMD3333 has been described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227. Now, a modified example of such a function will be described.

Here, a process of adjusting the brightness of the projector device 3300 with reference to FIG. 228 will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an outline of such a luminance adjusting process. This process can be performed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by a subdevice task (see FIG. 73) of the subcontrol board 3200.

The brightness adjustment process shown in FIG. 228 reduces the brightness of the projector device 3300 (LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) by 1 / when the DMD temperature reaches the specified temperature (1), for example, when the DMD temperature rises. Change to 2 and set the brightness to 0 when the specified temperature (2) is reached. On the other hand, when the DMD temperature drops to the specified temperature (2) -correction temperature, the brightness of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) is returned to 1/2 and the specified temperature (1) -correction is achieved. When the temperature is reached, the brightness is returned to the original LED brightness (initial brightness). In this example, the specified temperature (1) is 50 ° C, the specified temperature (2) is 64 ° C, and the corrected temperature is 5 ° C.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter in S2361. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2362 whether or not the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the transmission cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2362: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2365. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2362: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next process of S2363.

Next, in S2363, the sub CPU 3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d indicating the temperature near the DMD 3333. The status value is set to a value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d. Due to such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2364). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow (current DMD temperature) has been updated (S2365). When TempNow is not updated (S2365: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is updated (S2365: Yes), the sub CPU3201 determines in S2366 whether or not TempNow is at or above the specified temperature (1).

When TempNow is equal to or higher than the specified temperature (1) (S2366: Yes), the sub CPU3201 sets the brightness correction value to 1/2 in S2637. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. By halving the brightness correction value in this way, the LED brightness is adjusted to the (current) LED brightness * brightness correction value. In this example, since the brightness correction value is set to 1/2, the LED brightness is changed to 1/2 of the current LED brightness. The brightness correction value is 1/2 here, but a value between 0 and 1 can be selected. Further, the LED brightness is the brightness of the LED light source, and is represented by a value between 0% and 100%, for example.

When TempNow is not equal to or higher than the specified temperature (1) (S2366: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2368. In S2368, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow is at or above the specified temperature (2).

When TempNow is equal to or higher than the specified temperature (2) (S2368: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets the brightness correction value to 0 in S2369. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. By setting the brightness correction value to 0 in this way, the LED brightness is adjusted to the (current) LED brightness * brightness correction value, that is, 0.

When TempNow is not equal to or higher than the specified temperature (2) (S2368: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2370. In S2370, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (2) -correction temperature.

When TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (2) -correction temperature (S2370: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets the brightness correction value to 1/2 in S2371. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. By setting the brightness correction value to 1/2 in this way, the LED brightness that has been 0 is adjusted to 1/2 the LED brightness.

When TempNow is not equal to or lower than the specified temperature (2) -correction temperature (S2370: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2372. In S2372, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (1) -correction temperature.

When TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (1) -correction temperature (S2372: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets the brightness correction value to 1 in S2373. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. By setting the brightness correction value to 1 in this way, the initial brightness is returned from the place where the LED brightness was adjusted to 1/2. When TempNow is not equal to or lower than the specified temperature (1) -correction temperature (S2372: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process.

When the DMD temperature rises due to the brightness adjustment process of the sub-control board 3200, the LED brightness is set to decrease based on the specified temperature (1) and the specified temperature (2), but when the temperature decreases, it remains as it is. Instead of returning the LED brightness setting based on the specified temperature (1) and specified temperature (2), the LED brightness setting adjusted to be smaller is returned when the temperature is further lowered by the temperature set by the correction temperature. I am trying to do it. With such a configuration, when the brightness of the LED light source is returned, the change in the DMD temperature is judged more carefully and the brightness is adjusted, and as a result, a high-quality image with a high visual effect is safely projected. Can be done.

FIG. 229 is a graph illustrating how the brightness of the LED light source is adjusted by the temperature change of the DMD temperature. Similar to FIG. 218, the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 229 is based on the number of temperature acquisitions in which a DMD temperature different from the previous time is acquired, and is not in units of time. The vertical axis (left side) of the graph shown in FIG. 229 shows the DMD temperature (° C.), and the horizontal axis (right side) shows the LED brightness (%).

As shown in FIG. 229, when the DMD temperature rises from 46.00 ° C. to 65.00 ° C. from the number of temperature acquisitions = “0” to the number of temperature acquisitions “12”, the DMD temperature rises to 50 ° C. (that is, the specified temperature (1). )) The LED brightness is adjusted from 100% to 50% (the brightness correction value is 1/2) at the point where the temperature is obtained (that is, at the point X1 where the temperature acquisition frequency is "3"). After that, when the DMD temperature becomes 64 ° C. (that is, the specified temperature (2)) or higher (that is, at the point X2 where the temperature acquisition frequency is "12"), the LED brightness is adjusted from 50% to 0% (that is, at the point X2). The brightness correction value is 0).

After the DMD temperature reaches 64 ° C. or higher, the DMD temperature temporarily falls below 64 ° C. at the temperature acquisition frequency “14”, but even in this case, the LED brightness adjusted to 0% is not changed. The DMD temperature becomes 64 ° C. or higher again at the temperature acquisition frequency “15” and then falls below 64 ° C. at the temperature acquisition frequency “17”, but the LED brightness is not adjusted here either, and is 59.00 ° C. (that is, specified). The LED brightness is returned from 0% to 50% when the temperature drops below the temperature (2) -correction temperature (5 ° C.) (at the point X3 where the temperature acquisition frequency is "19"). After that, when the DMD temperature reaches 50 ° C. (that is, the specified temperature (1)) at the temperature acquisition frequency “22”, the LED brightness is not adjusted and 45.00 ° C. (that is, the specified temperature (1)). -When the temperature drops to the corrected temperature (5 ° C.) (at the point X4 of the temperature acquisition number "24"), the LED brightness is returned from 50% to 100%.

In this way, when the DMD temperature rises, the LED brightness is adjusted based on the relationship between the DMD temperature and the specified temperature (1) and the specified temperature (2), but when the DMD temperature decreases, the DMD The LED brightness is adjusted based on the relationship between the temperature, the temperature lower than the specified temperature (1) by the correction temperature, and the temperature lower than the specified temperature (2) by the correction temperature.

The specified temperature (1), the specified temperature (2), the correction temperature, and the brightness correction value can be set to various values different from the above. Further, although the present embodiment has three LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), the LED brightness of these may be controlled to be uniformly adjusted or may be adjusted individually. When the LED brightness is adjusted individually, for example, the brightness of each LED light source may be adjusted according to different specified temperatures (1), specified temperature (2), correction temperature, and brightness correction value.

Further, here, the stepwise brightness adjustment according to the specified temperature is performed in two steps, but it may be performed in more steps, and the adjustment in different steps is performed in the rising phase and the falling phase of the DMD temperature. You may. In this case, when the DMD temperature rises from the specified temperature (1) beyond the specified temperature (2) and then decreases to the specified temperature (1), the brightness returns to the initial brightness (here, 100%-> 0%-). > 100%), but the brightness during this period (between 0% and 100%) can be set differently between the ascending phase and the descending phase (luminance correction value is not limited to 1/2). ). Further, the correction temperature corresponding to the specified temperature can be a different temperature for each specified temperature. Further, in this example, when the DMD temperature becomes the specified temperature (2) or higher, the brightness is set to 0%, but this is only an example, and it should be set to another small value such as 2% or 3%. You can also. Further, the correction temperature itself may not be provided, and the specified temperature may be fixedly provided. For example, the specified temperature (1) is 50 ° C., the specified temperature (2) is 64 ° C., the temperature at which the LED brightness is returned from 0% to 50% is 59 ° C., and the temperature at which the LED brightness is returned from 50% to 100% is 45 ° C. May be good. Further, the correction temperature is not fixed at 5 ° C., but can be appropriately changed according to various conditions such as brightness, operating time (of the gaming machine 3001 and projector device 3300), and outside air temperature. Further, the correction temperature may be appropriately set by the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300.

By providing the correction temperature as in this modification, even if the DMD temperature fluctuates many times in the vicinity of the specified temperature (1) and the specified temperature (2), the LED brightness each time. Is avoided from being changed frequently.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD, etc. (Modification 2))
Another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on an increase in temperature with respect to DMD3333, which has been described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227, will be described. In this modification, it is determined whether or not to perform the display control process of the warning screen based on the DMD temperature according to the mode of the change of the DMD temperature.

FIG. 230 shows conditions related to the display of the warning screen. Condition F and condition G are conditions for maintaining the displayed warning screen or the hidden warning screen as it is, and condition H and condition I are the warning screen shown in FIG. 222 described above. This is a condition for displaying the warning screen (1) based on the same determination as the display control process of FIG. 216 (see conditions A to E in FIG. 216).

The condition F is a condition in which the relation that (F-1) TempOld1-TempNow ≧ first value is satisfied. Here, the first value is a value such as 10, for example.

The condition G is (G-1) TempOld1-TempNow <first value, (G-2) TempOld2-TempOld1 ≧ first value, and (G-3) TempNow-TempOld1 ≧ second value. It is a condition that all three conditions of being are satisfied. Here, the second value is a value such as 3, for example.

Condition H is (H-1) TempOld1-TempNow <first value, (H-2) TempOld2-TempOld1 ≧ first value, (H-3) TempNow-TempOld1 <second value. It is a condition that all three conditions of being are satisfied.

Condition I is a condition in which all two conditions of (I-1) TempOld1-TempNow <first value and (I-2) TempOld2-TempOld1 <first value are satisfied.

When the difference between the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is equal to or greater than the first value due to such conditions F to I, the change between the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is used for display control processing of the warning screen. It will not be used. Further, when the difference between the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is less than the second value, the change between the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is used for the display control process of the warning screen.

In each condition shown in FIG. 230, the arithmetic results of "TempNow-TempOld1", "TempOld1-TemNow", and "TempOld2-TempOld1" are compared with the first value and the second value. The arithmetic result may be compared with the first value and the second value as absolute values by excluding the concept of plus and minus, or compared with the first value and the second value in consideration of plus and minus. You may. At the same time, the first value and the second value may have the concept of plus or minus. Further, as the second value, a value equal to or less than the first value can be set, and for example, the first value and the second value can be the same value. However, as shown in this example, as the second value, a value smaller than the first value (that is, here, the first value is 10 and the second value is 3) can be set. With such a setting, the display / non-display of the warning screen is preferably controlled without being affected by a large temporary fluctuation regarding the detection temperature.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232, a process of controlling whether or not to determine whether to display or hide the warning screen (1) according to the temperature change of the DMD3333 will be described. This process is a modification of the warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 222, and is called in the projector temperature warning screen determination process of FIG. 221 executed by the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (see S2269). Since the processing shown in FIG. 232 is the same as that of S2291 to S2304 in the warning screen display control processing shown in FIG. 222, the same reference numerals are given and the description of each processing is omitted, and only the processing of FIG. 231 is described. To do.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 determines in S2391 whether or not TempOld1-TempNow is equal to or greater than the first value. When TempOld1-TempNow is equal to or greater than the first value (S2391: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2394. When TempOld1-TempNow is not equal to or greater than the first value (S2391: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2392.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2392 whether or not TempOld2-TempOld1 is equal to or greater than the first value. When TempOld2-TempOld1 is not equal to or greater than the first value (S2392: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2291 shown in FIG. 232, and thereafter performs the same processing as the warning screen display control processing shown in FIG. 222. When TempOld2-TempOld1 is equal to or greater than the first value (S2392: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2393.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2393 whether or not TempNow-TempOld1 is less than the second value. When TempNow-TempOld1 is not less than the second value (S2393: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2394. When TempNow-TempOld1 is less than the second value (S2393: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2291 shown in FIG. 232, and thereafter performs the same processing as the display control processing of the warning screen shown in FIG. 222.

In S2394, the sub CPU 3201 determines that the screen display is to maintain the state.

FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating how the warning screen is displayed according to the transition of the DMD temperature at each temperature acquisition number and the change of the DMD temperature. Similar to FIG. 218, the horizontal axis of the graph shown on the upper side of FIG. 233 is based on the number of temperature acquisitions in which a DMD temperature different from the previous time is acquired, and is not in units of time. The vertical axis represents the DMD temperature (° C.).

Here, the warning temperature used in determining the conditions A to D is shown as 50 ° C., and the stable temperature is shown as 49 ° C. The specified number of temperature drops is three. Further, the first value used in the judgment of the conditions F to I is 10, and the second value is 3. Here, in the determination of the conditions F to I, the deviation of the DMD temperature is determined based on the absolute value.

With the passage of time, the number of temperature acquisitions increases. For example, if the current DMD temperature (TempNow) is the DMD temperature of the number of temperature acquisitions = "3", the DMD temperature (TempOld1) immediately before that is The number of temperature acquisitions = "2" is the DMD temperature, and the DMD temperature (TempOld2) two times before is the DMD temperature of the number of temperature acquisitions = "1".

First, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions = "0" is 47 ° C., and TempNow is "47". At this point, the warning screen is not displayed.

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "1", the DMD temperature acquired is 48.5 ° C., TempNow is "48.5", and TempOld1 is "47". Here, when examining whether or not conditions F to I are satisfied, it corresponds to condition I, and when examining whether or not conditions A to E are satisfied there, it does not correspond to conditions A to D, so it corresponds to condition E. Then, the state is maintained (that is, the state in which the warning screen is hidden is maintained).

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "2", the DMD temperature acquired is 47 ° C., TempNow is "47", TempOld1 is "48.5", and TempOld2 is "47". Here, when examining whether or not conditions F to I are satisfied, it corresponds to condition I, and when examining whether or not conditions A to E are satisfied there, it does not correspond to conditions A to D, so it corresponds to condition E. Then, the state is maintained (that is, the state in which the warning screen is hidden is maintained). The DMD temperatures acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions = "3" and "4" are 48.5 ° C. and 47 ° C., respectively, and the state is maintained in the same manner as described above.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions = "5" is 49 ° C., TempNow is "49", TempOld1 is "47", and TempOld2 is "48.5". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, the conditions A to D are not satisfied. (That is, the state where the warning screen is hidden is maintained).

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "6", the DMD temperature acquired is 54 ° C., TempNow is "54", TempOld1 is "49", and TempOld2 is "47". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, TempNowSt rises, TempNow is above the warning temperature, and TempOld1 Since the temperature is lower than the warning temperature, the condition A is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "7", the DMD temperature acquired is 53 ° C., TempNow is "53", TempOld1 is "54", and TempOld2 is "49". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, the conditions A to D are not satisfied. (That is, the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained).

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "8", the DMD temperature acquired is 52 ° C., TempNow is "52", TempOld1 is "53", and TempOld2 is "54". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, the conditions A to D are not satisfied. (That is, the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions = "9" is 51 ° C., TempNow is "51", TempOld1 is "52", TempOld2 is "53", and TempOld3 is "54". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, the downward transition continues three times. Condition D is met and the warning screen (1) is hidden.

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "10", the DMD temperature acquired is 60 ° C., TempNow is "60", TempOld1 is "51", and TempOld2 is "52". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, the conditions A to D are not satisfied. (That is, the state where the warning screen is hidden is maintained).

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "11", the DMD temperature acquired is 47 ° C., TempNow is "47", TempOld1 is "60", and TempOld2 is "51". Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition F, and the state is maintained there (that is, the state in which the warning screen is hidden is maintained).

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "12", the DMD temperature acquired is 55 ° C., TempNow is "55", TempOld1 is "47", and TempOld2 is "60". Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition G, and the state is maintained there (that is, the state in which the warning screen is hidden is maintained).

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "13", the DMD temperature acquired is 56 ° C., TempNow is "56", TempOld1 is "55", and TempOld2 is "47". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, TempNowSt rises, TempNow is above the warning temperature, and TempOld1 Is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and TempNowSt and TempOld1St are in an upward trend. Therefore, the condition B is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "14", the DMD temperature acquired is 58 ° C., TempNow is "58", TempOld1 is "56", and TempOld2 is "55". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, TempNowSt rises, TempNow is above the warning temperature, and TempOld1 Is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and TempNowSt and TempOld1St are in an upward trend. Therefore, the condition B is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "15", the DMD temperature acquired is 48 ° C., TempNow is "48", TempOld1 is "58", and TempOld2 is "56". Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition F, and the state is maintained there (that is, the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained).

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "16", the DMD temperature acquired is 50 ° C., TempNow is "50", TempOld1 is "48", and TempOld2 is "58". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition H, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, TempNowSt rises, TempNow is above the warning temperature, and TempOld1 Is below the warning temperature and TempNowSt is on the rise, so condition A is met and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, when the number of temperature acquisitions = "17", the DMD temperature acquired is 49 ° C., TempNow is "49", TempOld1 is "50", and TempOld2 is "48". Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, TempNowSt is in a downward transition and TempNow is below the stable temperature. Therefore, the condition C is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is hidden.

As described above, according to the modification of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the warning screen from being displayed or hidden in a sensitive reaction to a sudden change in the DMD temperature, and as a result, visual perception is achieved. It is possible to safely project high-quality images with high effectiveness.

Further, as described above, the conditions may be determined by excluding the concept of plus or minus (that is, using an absolute value) for the subtraction result related to TempNow, TempOld1 and the like.

If there is no concept of plus or minus, when a sudden drop or rise of DMD temperature occurs, it is possible to control so that the temperature at that time is not used for the judgment regarding the warning screen, but if there is a concept of plus or minus , It is possible to determine whether or not to use the temperature at that time for the determination regarding the warning screen according to either the sudden drop in the DMD temperature or the sudden rise in the DMD temperature.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD, etc. (Modification 3))
Further, another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on an increase in temperature with respect to DMD3333, which has been described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227, will be described. In this modification, the number of times the warning screen is displayed is cumulatively recorded, and the number of temperature errors is grasped.

Here, the above processing will be described with reference to FIG. 234. This process is a modification of the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221. Since many processes are the same as the process shown in FIG. 221, these processes are modified by giving the same reference numerals and omitting the description. Only the processing (S2411, S2412) will be described.

In S2411 of FIG. 234, when it is determined in S2267 that TempNow has been updated (S2267: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 executes the display control process of the warning screen. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 236. Next, the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2268.

Further, the sub CPU 3201 executes the error history determination process in S2412 after S2266 or S2271 in FIG. 234. This process will be described next with reference to FIG. 235.

FIG. 235 shows the error history determination process executed by the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200.

First, in S2431, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the warning screen (2) is set to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023. When the warning screen (2) is not set to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2431: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2434. When the warning screen (2) is set to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2431: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2432, and the warning screen (2) is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023. Determine whether or not it is being displayed on.

When the warning screen (2) is being displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2432: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2434. When the warning screen (2) is not being displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2432: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2433.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the number of times the warning screen (2) is displayed in S2433. In this way, when the warning screen (2) is not continuously displayed (when it is newly displayed), the number of times the warning screen (2) is displayed is counted up.

After that, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2434 whether or not the warning screen (1) is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like. If the warning screen (1) is not set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2434: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2439. When the warning screen (1) is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2434: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the processing of S2435, where the warning screen (1) is displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like. Determine whether or not it is being displayed on. This is to count up the number of times the warning screen (1) is displayed when the warning screen (1) is not continuously displayed.

When the warning screen (1) is not being displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2435: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2436. When the warning screen (1) is being displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2435: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2439.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the gaming machine 3001 has recovered from the power failure (S2436). This is because the display of the warning screen (1) that may be displayed when the power is restored is not counted. When the power is restored (S2436: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2439. When it is not at the time of power recovery (S2436: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2437, and determines whether or not TempNow-TempOld1 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value.

When TempNow-TempOld1 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (S2437: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2439. The predetermined value is, for example, 15 ° C., and since the difference between the two temperatures becomes a problem, it may be determined by an absolute value. When TempNow-TempOld1 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S2437: No), the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the number of times the warning screen (1) is displayed in S2438.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2439 whether or not the DMD temperature has been updated. If the DMD temperature has not been updated (S2439: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the error history determination process. When the DMD temperature is updated (S2439: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2440 whether or not TempNow is 0 ° C.

When TempNow is not 0 ° C. (S2440: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the error history determination process. When TempNow is 0 ° C. (S2440: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the number of times 0 ° C. is recorded in S2441, and then ends the error history determination process. The number of times 0 ° C. is recorded can also be executed in the projector status reception processing as shown in FIG. 224.

The warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 236 is the same process as the warning screen display control process described with reference to FIG. 222, and the same processes as those in FIG. 222 are designated by the same reference numerals. ing. Here, the description of individual processing will be omitted. However, in the display control process of the warning screen of FIG. 236, as compared with the same process of FIG. 222, it is determined that the screen display is maintained in the state when TempOld1 becomes 0 ° C. or lower (for example, 0 ° C.) (S2291, S2292) has been deleted.

An actual example of the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed in this modification has been outlined with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220, but here, the warning is given with reference to FIG. 237. Another pattern for screen counting is described.

FIG. 237 shows the same DMD temperature transition as that shown in FIG. 219. In the temperature transition shown in FIG. 237, the DMD temperature (TempNow) is 0 ° C. when the number of temperature acquisitions = “35”, and the DMD temperature (TempNow) is 50.25 ° C. when the number of temperature acquisitions = “36”. However, as described in the warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 236, in this example, it is determined that the screen display is maintained in the state when the temperature becomes 0 ° C. or lower (for example, 0 ° C.) (for example, 0 ° C.). Since S2291 and S2292) in FIG. 222 have been deleted, the number of temperature acquisitions = “36” corresponds to the condition A (see S2293, S2299, S2300, and S2303 in FIG. 236).

In such a situation, when the error history determination process shown in FIG. 235 is performed, the warning screen (1) is set for the temperature acquisition count = "36", and the warning screen is neither displayed nor when the power is restored. , Temperature (50.25 ° C.)-Tempold1 (0.00 ° C.) ≥ 15 ° C., and the number of times the warning screen (1) is displayed is not counted up (see S2434 to S2438 in FIG. 235).

Therefore, in FIG. 237, the warning screen (1) under the condition A is displayed with the temperature acquisition count = “36”, but the projector temperature warning count is not counted up. Such control is possible.

The DMD temperature used in the DMD temperature diagnostic process of S2031 shown in FIG. 181 is corrected by 0 ° C. with respect to the DMD temperature on the projector device 3300 side (that is, the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d is lower than 0 ° C. or 0. The result of performing correction) to set the detection temperature to 0 ° C. when the temperature is below ° C. is used, and the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side to the game machine 3001 side is the projector device 3300 side. This is the DMD temperature corrected by 0 ° C. On the other hand, the gaming machine 3001 also corrects the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side (DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side and received by the gaming machine 3001 side) by 0 ° C.

As described above, normally, the DMD temperature grasped by the gaming machine 3001 side does not show a negative value, but the value of the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side shows a negative value due to noise or the like. Therefore, the gaming machine 3001 is also controlled to perform 0 ° C. correction. However, since the outside air temperature is very low and it is assumed that the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side continues to indicate 0 ° C., in such a case, do not give a continuous warning notification of 0 ° C. It may be set and controlled.

As described above, by the processing shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed and the temperature error (that is, the DMD temperature which is considered to be mainly due to the noise error are 0). It is possible to cumulatively store the number of times (error that is grasped as ° C).

Further, the number of display times and the number of temperature errors stored in this way can be converted into a two-dimensional code and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. For example, the person in charge of operation / maintenance of the gaming machine 3001 causes the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 to display the hall menu related to the operation / maintenance by performing a predetermined special operation on the gaming machine 3001, and the two-dimensional code is displayed there. Is instructed to display, a two-dimensional code including the number of times the warning screen is displayed and the temperature error data is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

The person in charge of operation / maintenance can grasp the number of display times and the number of temperature errors of the gaming machine 3001 by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like and performing a predetermined decoding process. Further, the person in charge of operation / maintenance can also connect a mobile terminal or the like to the gaming machine 3001 and copy the data related to the number of display times and the number of temperature errors from the storage area.

Further, in this case, the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed and the number of temperature errors are cumulative data since the gaming machine 3001 first operates. It can be accumulated and stored in a predetermined period such as daily or monthly.

As described above, according to the modification of the present embodiment, the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed and the number of temperature errors are stored, and the error status of the projector device 3300 is displayed on the warning screen. It can be grasped from the viewpoint, and as a result, a high-quality image with a high visual effect can be safely projected.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD, etc. (Modification example 4))
Further, another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on an increase in temperature with respect to DMD3333, which has been described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227, will be described. In this modification, the process of adjusting the brightness of the projector device 3300 with the temperature change of the DMD 3333 will be described. This process can be performed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by a subdevice task (see FIG. 73) of the subcontrol board 3200.

In the luminance adjustment process shown in FIG. 238, for example, in a situation where the DMD temperature rises, when the DMD temperature exceeds the reference operating temperature, the luminance value is lowered, for example, in units of 2.5 ° C., and the DMD temperature is lowered. In the aspect, for example, the brightness value is increased in units of 5 ° C. That is, when the DMD temperature rises, the luminance value is increased quickly, and when the DMD temperature decreases, the luminance value is controlled to increase more slowly than when the luminance value is decreased. Further, when the DMD temperature drops and reaches the reference operating temperature, the luminance value is controlled to return to the original set luminance value (initial luminance) when the state below the reference operating temperature elapses for a predetermined time.

In the luminance adjustment process shown in FIG. 238, first, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter in S2461. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2462 whether or not the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the transmission cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2462: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2465. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2462: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next process of S2463.

Next, in S2463, the sub CPU 3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d indicating the temperature near the DMD 3333. The status value is set to a value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d. Due to such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2464). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow (current DMD temperature) has been updated (S2465). When TempNow is not updated (S2465: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is updated (S2465: Yes), the sub CPU3201 determines in S2466 whether or not TempNowSt is in a downward trend.

When TempNowSt is not in a downward transition (S2466: No), that is, when it is in an upward transition, the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2471. When TempNowSt is in a downward transition (S2466: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 controls in S2467 to increase the brightness value by 2 every time the DMD temperature decreases by 5 ° C. For example, when the brightness value of the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) is set from 0% to 100%, this brightness value is set for each predetermined adjustment unit temperature (for example, every time the temperature drops by 5 ° C.). Is controlled to increase by 2% (or to increase by 2% of the initial brightness).

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2468 whether or not TempNow is equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature. When TempNow is not equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature (S2468: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature (S2468: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2469 whether or not the state of the reference operating temperature or lower is maintained for the stable time or longer. The reference operating temperature is set to 25 ° C. in this example, but other temperatures can be selected.

When the state below the reference operating temperature is not maintained for the stable time or longer (S2469: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the luminance adjustment process. When the state of the reference operating temperature or lower is maintained for the stable time or longer (S2469: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets the luminance value to 100 (S2470), and then ends the luminance adjustment process. In this example, the stabilization time is set to 1 minute, but other periods can be selected. Further, setting the luminance value to 100 means returning the luminance value to the initial luminance.

In S2471, the sub CPU determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or higher than the reference operating temperature. When TempNow is not equal to or higher than the reference operating temperature (S2471: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is equal to or higher than the reference operating temperature (S2471: Yes), the sub CPU3201 lowers the luminance value by 2 in S2472 for each predetermined adjustment unit temperature (for example, every 2.5 ° C. increase). After that, the brightness adjustment process is terminated.

By such a luminance adjustment process, for example, assuming that the reference operating temperature is 25 ° C. and the luminance value at 25 ° C. is 100, the luminance value becomes 27.5 ° C. when the DMD temperature changes from 25 ° C. to 27.5 ° C. It becomes 98. That is, when the DMD temperature rises by 2.5 ° C., the brightness value is controlled to decrease by 2.

Although the present embodiment has three LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), the LED brightness of these may be controlled to be uniformly adjusted or may be adjusted individually. When the LED brightness is individually adjusted, for example, different reference operating temperatures, a decrease in brightness value and adjustment unit temperature when the DMD temperature rises, an increase in brightness value and adjustment unit temperature when the DMD temperature decreases, and a stabilization time. May be set for each LED light source.

Further, in this example, the brightness value adjustment range (decrease width, increase width) is set to the same "2" both when the DMD temperature rises and when it falls, but this is when the DMD temperature rises and falls. The adjustment range can be set differently.

With such a configuration, when the DMD temperature rises, the brightness value is lowered quickly for immediate response, while when the DMD temperature falls, it is necessary to carefully identify another rise or a sudden temperature change. As a result, a high-quality image with a high visual effect can be safely projected because the brightness value is controlled to be increased slowly.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD, etc. (Modification 5))
Further, another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on an increase in temperature with respect to DMD3333, which has been described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227, will be described. In this modification, when the previous DMD temperature is other than 0 ° C. and the current DMD temperature is 0 ° C., and then the DMD temperature is not updated for a predetermined period, the warning screen is controlled to be displayed.

Here, the above processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240. This process is a modification of the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221. Since some of the processes are the same as the process shown in FIG. 221, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 adds 1 to the transmission cycle counter in S2491. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2492 whether or not the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the transmission cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2492: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2511 in FIG. 240. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2492: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next processing of S2493.

Next, in S2493, the sub CPU 3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d indicating the temperature near the DMD 3333. The status value is set to a value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d. Due to such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2494). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2511 in FIG. 240, where it is determined whether or not TempNow is 0 ° C. When TempNow is not 0 ° C. (S2511: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the same processing of S2265 as shown in FIG. 221 and determines whether or not TempNow is 64 ° C. or higher. When TempNow is 0 ° C. (S2511: Yes), the sub CPU3201 determines in S2512 whether or not TempOld1 is not 0 ° C.

When TempOld1 is 0 ° C. (S2512: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2265. When TempOld1 is not 0 ° C. (S2512: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow is updated for 1 second or longer in S2513. If TempNow is not updated for 1 second or longer (S2513: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2266 similar to that shown in FIG. 221 and is set to display the warning screen (2). When TempNow is updated within 1 second (S2513: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2265.

In this example, it is determined whether or not TempNow is updated for a period (1 second) or more, which is an interval for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d, which means that TempNow is 0 ° C. It indicates whether or not the situation in which TempOld1 is other than 0 ° C. is resolved at the timing when TempNow is acquired next. For example, as in the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221, when TempNow does not change, the process ends without doing anything (see S2267), so even if TempNow continues with an abnormal value. This cannot be detected. In this modified example, such a situation can be effectively grasped and a warning screen can be displayed.

Further, in order to determine that the status of TempNow and TempOld1 is not updated for a certain period of time, a reference period other than 1 second may be provided.

Further, in the projector control board 3310 of the projector device 3300, when the DMD temperature is transmitted to the sub-control board 3200, it is determined whether or not the DMD temperature is negative, and if the DMD temperature is negative, the DMD temperature is determined. It can be configured to correct the DMD temperature to 0 ° C.

With this configuration, when the DMD temperature is acquired by the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200, if the DMD temperature is negative, it is understood that it is affected by noise or the like, and the negative DMD temperature is obtained. The number of acquisitions of is grasped as the number of occurrences of noise and the like, and more detailed error information can be obtained.

With such a configuration, if the previous DMD temperature is other than 0 ° C. and the current DMD temperature is 0 ° C., and then the DMD temperature is not updated for a predetermined period, a warning screen is displayed and an abnormality occurs. As a result, it is possible to safely project a high-quality image with a high visual effect.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the DMD temperature is negative, and if the DMD temperature is negative, the DMD temperature is corrected to 0 ° C. The mode of correction is only an example, and when the detected DMD temperature is negative, it can be configured to be corrected to a value other than 0 ° C., which is larger than the detected temperature. For example, when the DMD temperature is −20 ° C., the detection temperature can be set to −10 ° C. or 20 ° C., which is higher than that temperature.

Further, up to this point, in the present embodiment, various processes / functions have been described regarding warnings based on the temperature information of DMD, but similar processes / functions were detected near the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B). It can also be applied to temperature (LED temperature). Further, it is also possible to provide temperature sensors near the exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) and apply the above processing / function to the temperature detected by these.

(Intake fan speed error control)
As described above, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment includes an intake fan 3210 in the projector cover 3101, and further includes a pulse sensor 3211 for detecting the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the intake fan 3210. (See FIG. 171). As shown in FIG. 177, the intake fan 3210 cools the projector device 3300 by taking in external air from the intake port 3103b of the projector cover 3101 and sending the air to the projector device 3300.

In the present embodiment, it is monitored whether or not the intake fan 3210 is operating normally, and if there is a problem, a warning screen is displayed to notify that the state requires inspection.

FIG. 241 shows a warning screen displayed according to the instruction of the sub-control board 3200. FIG. 241 (a) shows a warning screen (3) displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 when the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 satisfies the condition J described later. There is. This warning screen (3) may be displayed for, for example, 3 minutes.

FIG. 241 (b) shows a warning screen (4) displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 when the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 satisfies the condition K described later. There is. This warning screen (4) can be displayed up to, for example, a power failure of the gaming machine 3001.

FIG. 242 shows conditions related to the display of the warning screen and the like. Condition J acquires the FAN rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 every second from the start of (J-1), and the average calculated from the FAN rotation speed for 5 seconds from the beginning obtained in this way is the specified value. When it is 1 or less, the warning screen (3) is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

In this example, the warning screen (3) is displayed for 3 minutes. Further, the specified value 1 is a rotation speed (rotation speed) obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210. For example, when the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 is 12000 rpm, the default value 1 is 9000 rpm.

Condition K is a warning screen (4) when the FAN rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 acquired first (for example, in the first second) after starting (K-1) is a specified value of 2 or less. It is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023. Further, the brightness of the projected image of the projector device 3300 is set to 0.

In this example, the warning screen (4) is displayed up to the power failure of the gaming machine 3001. Further, the specified value 2 is a rotation speed (rotation speed) obtained by subtracting 60% from the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210. For example, when the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 is 12000 rpm, the default value 2 is 4800 rpm.

Further, when the condition K is satisfied, the energization of the intake fan 3210 can be stopped.

Next, the intake fan warning screen determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 243. This process can be performed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by a subdevice task (see FIG. 73) of the subcontrol board 3200. Further, since it is determined whether or not to display the warning screen when the gaming machine 3001 is started, the execution can be terminated at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine 3001 is started.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 adds 1 to the acquisition cycle counter in S2531. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2532 whether or not the acquisition cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the acquisition cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2532: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2535. When the acquisition cycle counter is 250 or more (S2532: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the next process of S2533.

Next, in S2533, the sub CPU 3201 acquires the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the intake fan 3210 from the pulse sensor 3211. As described above, the sub CPU 3201 acquires the DMD temperature by communicating with the projector device 3300 in response to the status request, but the pulse sensor 3211 is connected to the sub control board 3200. Therefore (see FIG. 171), here, the FAN rotation speed can be obtained directly from the pulse sensor 3211.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the acquisition cycle counter (S2534). By handling the acquisition cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can acquire the FAN rotation speed every second.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2535 whether or not the FAN rotation speed in the first cycle (that is, the first second at the time of startup) is the specified number 2 or less. When the FAN rotation speed in the first cycle is not the specified number 2 or less (S2535: No), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2538. When the FAN rotation speed in the first cycle is 2 or less (S2535: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 is set to display the warning screen (4) on the front screen mechanism 3091, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, or the like in S2536. To do. This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition K.

The warning screen (4) can be displayed on various display means such as the front screen mechanism 3091 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, but may be displayed on any one of these display means, or two or more. It may be displayed in. The warning screen (4) is displayed until the gaming machine 3001 is turned off (power off).

Next, the sub CPU 3201 sets the projected brightness to 0 (S2537). In this process, for example, the brightness of each of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) is instructed to be 0, and when the brightness of the LED light source is set from 0% to 100%, it is set to 0%. Set to be. The setting of the brightness for such an LED light source is instructed to the projector device 3300 by, for example, the projector setting change processing as shown in FIGS. 184 and 185. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process.

Further, at this time, the sub CPU 3201 can also control to change the projected brightness to a value smaller than the current setting instead of 0.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2538 whether or not the FAN rotation speed for five times has been acquired from the time of startup. If the FAN rotation speed for five times has not been acquired (S2538: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process. When the FAN rotation speed for 5 times is acquired (S2538: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 calculates the average of the FAN rotation speed for 5 times in S2539.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2540 whether or not the average of the FAN rotation speeds for five times is the specified number 1 or less. When the average of the FAN rotation speeds for five times is not less than or equal to the specified number 1 (S2540: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process. When the average of the FAN rotation speeds for five times is 1 or less (S2540: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 displays the warning screen (3) on the front screen mechanism 3091, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, or the like in S2541. To set. This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition J. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process.

The warning screen (3) can be displayed on various display means such as the front screen mechanism 3091 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, but may be displayed on any one of these display means, or two or more. It may be displayed in. The warning screen (3) is displayed for 3 minutes.

In addition, although the FAN rotation speeds for five times are acquired here, it is also possible to acquire a plurality of FAN rotation speeds and obtain the average of the FAN rotation speeds from these FAN rotation speeds. Further, the representative value for evaluating the FAN rotation speed can be determined not by the average of the FAN rotation speed but by other indexes such as the median value and the mode value.

Further, in this example, the default value 1 and the default value 2 are set based on the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210, but the default value can be set by using various other criteria.

In the determination of the above-mentioned condition K, the sub CPU 3201 compares the FAN rotation speed acquired in the first cycle with the default value 2, and determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the intake fan 3210. In this case, The FAN rotation speed is not the FAN rotation speed when the game is being played by the player, for example, after a sufficient time has passed since the power was turned on to the game machine 3001, but the FAN rotation speed when the game machine 3001 is started. It is a number.

However, the FAN rotation speed at startup does not represent the rotation speed at which the intake fan 3210 has not yet reached a stable rotation state, such as when the intake fan 3210 starts up. In this example, after the game machine 3001 is started, the intake fan warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 243 is started, and when the acquisition cycle counter reaches 250 (that is, one second after the game machine 3001 is started (more). , Strictly speaking, 1 second after the start of the intake fan warning screen determination process)), the acquired rotation speed is used as the FAN rotation speed at startup.

The reason why the rotation speed is acquired at such a timing is that it is assumed that the intake fan 3210 has reached the stable rotation state immediately after the start-up at that time. Such timing may be adjusted to other timings based on the model of the intake fan 3210, the number of years elapsed, and the like.

Further, in order to acquire the FAN rotation speed in the stable rotation state at the time of startup, for example, the FAN rotation speed is acquired several times (that is, for several seconds), and the difference in the FAN rotation speed thus acquired becomes a predetermined value or less. In this case, the FAN rotation speed can be used as the FAN rotation speed at the time of activation. Further, at this time, the intake fan warning screen determination process can be executed at intervals shorter than 1 second.

In the present embodiment, when the warning screen (3) and the warning screen (4) are displayed, the number of times of display can be counted up and stored. Further, at this time, the number of times the warning screen (3) is displayed and the number of times the warning screen (4) is displayed can be added up or individually stored.

The number of display times grasped in this way can be converted into a two-dimensional code and displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. For example, a person in charge of operation / maintenance of the gaming machine 3001 causes the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 to display a hall menu or an error screen related to the operation / maintenance by performing a predetermined special operation on the gaming machine 3001. When instructed to display the two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code including the data of the number of times the warning screen is displayed is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

The person in charge of operation / maintenance can grasp the number of times the warning screen is displayed related to the intake fan 3210 of the gaming machine 3001 by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like and performing a predetermined decoding process.

According to the present embodiment configured in this way, at the time of startup, the intake fan warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 243 is executed, and when an abnormality in the intake fan is found, a warning screen is displayed, while the projector is displayed. The device 3300 detects abnormalities in the LED temperature and DMD temperature by projector self-diagnosis processing (see FIG. 181 and the like), and forcibly shuts down or resets as necessary (see FIG. 180).

Furthermore, in order to detect an abnormality in the intake fan 3210 in the gaming machine 3001 in which the player is playing, the intake fan warning screen determination process is used to determine the rotation speed abnormality based on the specified value 1 or the specified value 2. Or, it is possible to determine the rotation speed abnormality based on other criteria, and the warning screen as shown in FIG. 241 can be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, or the like.

However, at this time, it is possible to control so that the warning screen is not displayed during the game so as not to notify the player of the abnormality in the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210. For example, even after a predetermined period (at startup (1 second after startup) or 5 seconds after startup) for determining whether to display the warning screen (3) or the warning screen (4) has elapsed. Control not to start displaying these warning screens.

After that, due to such an abnormality in the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210, the temperature near the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the vicinity of DMD3333 in the projector device 3300 rises, and the projector device 3300 is shut down due to this. (That is, the operating operation of the projector device 3300 is stopped separately from the game machine 3001). After that, if the projector device 3300, which has stopped operating, starts up in response to the start-up of the gaming machine 3001 (that is, recovers from power failure) and still satisfies the conditions J and K, the front screen mechanism 3091. A warning screen related to an abnormality in the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. With this configuration, even if the fan rotation speed increases for some reason during the game, the player does not immediately recognize it, and the player manages the game field based on the fact that the projector device 3300 is stopped. Is called, and the game hall manager performs the operation of turning off and returning the game machine 3001 so that the player playing the game does not immediately recognize it, and the game hall manager recognizes that it is a fan error. It will be possible.

Further, the warning screen display after the power failure is restored as described above (that is, the warning screen is not started to be displayed after a predetermined period for determining the display of the warning screen has elapsed, and the warning screen after the power failure is restored. The display method of displaying) can be adopted only for either the warning screen (3) or the warning screen (4). For example, in a situation where both condition J and condition K are satisfied, the warning screen (4) is displayed immediately after a predetermined period for determination (1 second after startup in this example) has elapsed, while the warning screen (4) is displayed. After that, when it is determined that the condition J is satisfied, the display of the warning screen (4) is maintained, and the warning screen (3) has a predetermined period for determination (in this example, 5 seconds after activation). It is not displayed even after the lapse of time, and is displayed when the condition J is still satisfied after the gaming machine 3001 recovers from the power failure. The intake fan warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 243 displays either the warning screen (3) or the warning screen (4). In this case, the warning screen (3) and the warning are displayed. It is configured so that both screens (4) can be displayed. In that case, it is desirable that the warning screen (3) and the warning screen (4) are notified by different image modes or different notification means.

(Application to gaming devices)
In the second embodiment, the projector device 3300 is applied to the game machine 3001 and the game machine 3001', the projector device 4300 is applied to the game machine 4001, the projector devices 4300a and 4300b are applied to the game machine 4001', and the projector. The device 5300 has been applied to the game machine 5001 and the projector devices 6300a and 6300b have been applied to the game machine 6001 to describe them. It can also be applied to devices.

FIG. 244 shows various devices used in a game system of a game field such as a so-called pachinko parlor. In this example, a game display device 7001, a game machine 7002, a game medium rental device 7003, and a server device 7004 are shown. Are connected as shown in the figure.

The game display device 7001 displays various game information as a projected image by, for example, the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment, and is installed so as to be located above the game machine 7002, for example. .. As the game information, the number of acquired game media (number of acquired cards or acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history, and the like are displayed as graphs and numerical values. In addition, the game information includes a production video and the like related to the game.

The game display device 7001 is provided with a plurality of buttons for the player to operate. The game display device 7001 is connected to the game machine 7002, the game medium lending device 7003, and the server device 7004, and various game information is based on the input signal, the received signal, or the operation of the player. Is displayed on a screen (projected portion) 7110 or the like, which will be described later. The game display device 7001 may be installed in units of so-called game islands.

The game display device 7001 includes the above-mentioned projector device 3300, a control unit 7400 for controlling the projector device 3300, and the like as electrical or optical components. The control unit 7400 corresponds to the sub-control board 3200 of the game machine 3001 described above, and controls the projector device 3300 and controls communication between the game machine 7002, the game medium lending device 7003, and the server device 7004. Do. Further, when the operation of the button of the game display device 7001 is detected by the sensor, the control unit 7400 controls the display of the screen 7110 or the like according to the operation. The game display device 7001 may configure the above-mentioned buttons with a touch panel, and the control unit 7400 may detect an operation on the touch panel.

Although not particularly shown, the game display device 7001 includes an interface unit for communicating with the game machine 7002, the game medium lending device 7003, and the server device 7004. The interface unit and the external connection terminal board of the gaming machine 7002, which will be described later, are connected by a contact input method, and communication is possible from the gaming machine 7002 to the gaming display device 7001 in one direction. The interface unit and the game medium lending device 7003 are connected by, for example, a harness in a contact input / output system, and bidirectional communication is possible. Further, the interface unit and the server device 7004 are connected by a wired LAN method by, for example, a coaxial cable, and are connected by a contact output method by a harness, so that bidirectional communication is possible. The connection method is not limited to these methods. For example, a wireless LAN method may be used for each connection, or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used. Further, a combination of these methods may be used.

FIG. 244 shows game machines 7002, which are, for example, pachinko game machines 7002a and pachislot game machines 7002b. These gaming machines 7002 correspond to the above-mentioned gaming machines 3001 and the like.

Further, FIG. 244 shows the game medium lending device 7003. In this example, as the game medium lending device 7003, a game ball lending device 7003a installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 7002a and a medal lending device 7003b installed adjacent to the pachislot gaming machine 7002b are shown. ..

The game medium lending device 7003 is connected to the server device 7004 via, for example, a switching hub or a controller (not shown). When a card is inserted by a player, the game medium lending device 7003 uses identification information such as a card ID and a member ID added to the IC chip or the like of the card (hereinafter, simply referred to as "identification information") as a server device. Send to 7004. The server device 7004 transmits the player's ball information stored in association with the received identification information to the game medium lending device 7003. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 7004 updates the possession ball information, and the game medium lending device 7003 drives the payout device to execute the payout control of the game medium. Further, when a bill is inserted by the player, the balance information corresponding to the amount (inserted amount) of the bill is transmitted to the server device 7004. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 7004 updates the balance information, and the game medium lending device 7003 similarly executes the payout control of the game medium.

Further, when the game medium is thrown into each machine counting device 7005 (not shown) by the operation of the player or directly from the game machine 7002, the game medium lending device 7003 is put into each machine counting device 7005. The number of game media is counted, and the counting result is transmitted to the server device 7004 as the counting ball information of the player, and the server device 7004 associates the received counting ball information with the identification information added to the card. Remember. When the card is not inserted, the counting ball information received in association with the identification information previously added to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 7003 is stored.

Here, the server device 7004 manages the player's ball possession information and the remaining amount information, but the game medium lending device 7003 may manage such information. Further, not only the identification information may be added to the card, but also a storage area may be provided, the information may be stored in the storage area, and the information may be managed. Then, the server device 7004 or the game medium lending device 7003 may update the information. Further, the ball holding information may be managed by the game medium lending device 7003 or the server device 7004, and the remaining amount information may be directly stored in the storage area of the card.

FIG. 244 further shows the server device 7004. The server device 7004 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected to the game display device 7001 and also to the game medium lending device 7003. The server device 7004 uses the game result management information to be managed (for example, ball ejection history information including the past several days, fraud detection information, etc.) and information about the game store (for example, new machine information, vacant machine information, etc.) for the game. It is transmitted to the display device 7001.

Further, a POS terminal 7006 (not shown) arranged at a prize exchange counter or the like is connected to the server device 7004. The POS terminal 7006 acquires the player's counting ball information managed by the server device 7004, and manages the exchange with the general prize or special prize designated by the player according to the value corresponding to the counting ball information. Control. The counting ball information is updated according to the value consumed by the prize exchange, and the updated counting ball information is transmitted to the server device 7004 and stored in association with the player.

The projector device 3300 or the like according to the second embodiment can be used to project an image in such a game device. Here, the game devices include, for example, the above-mentioned display devices such as the game display device 7001, the data display, and the signage, the game medium lending device 7003, the server device (hall computer) 7004, and each unit counting device 7005. Various devices such as POS terminal 7006 are included. In these game devices, like the game display device 7001, as game information, the number of acquired game media (number of acquired cards or acquired balls), the number of various games, the game history, the production video related to the game, and the like are displayed. , Can be projected onto the screen by a projector device 3300 or the like. The video (content) of the game information for display is determined by, for example, the control unit 7400 of the game display device 7001 or the like.

Next, an example in which the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment is applied to the above-mentioned game display device 7001 will be described more specifically.

FIG. 245 shows a cross section of the game display device 7001. As shown in FIG. 245, the game display device 7001 is composed of a concave screen 7110 on the entire front surface of the screen unit 7100, and the entire front surface side of the screen 7110 is a concave display surface 7101 having a gentle inclination. ing. The light emitting surface and buttons are omitted from the game display device 7001.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245, an LED substrate 7060 and a reflector 7061 are provided on the outside of the back surface 7010d of the housing 7010, which is the back surface side of the reflector 7200. A plurality of LEDs 7060A are mounted on the LED substrate 7060 so as to be positioned in an annular shape with respect to the back surface 7010d, and the LEDs 7060A are arranged so as to be able to irradiate light toward the reflector 7061. The light of the LED 7060A is reflected by the reflector 7061 to illuminate the periphery of the game display device 7001 and the peripheral edge of the screen 7110 from the rear.

Further, since the screen 7110 of the game display device 7001 is formed in a concave shape, it is possible to display a three-dimensional image having a depth. This makes it possible to further enhance the visual effect and the decorative effect.

Further, the light beam α emitted from the projector device 3300 passes through the incident surface 7111 of the screen 7110 and reaches the upper end of the display surface 7101 after being reflected by the reflector 7200. Further, the light ray β emitted from the projector device 3300 passes through the incident surface 7111 of the screen 7110 and reaches the lower end of the display surface 7101 after being reflected by the reflector 7200.

As a result, projected images showing various game information are displayed between the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the display surface 7101 of the screen 7110. Further, at the left and right sides of the projected image and at each end of the display surface 7101 (the peripheral portion of the screen 7110 described above), the light of the LED 7060A is reflected by the reflector 7061, so that the game state or the like can be obtained. Lighting and blinking are performed accordingly.

As described above, the game display device 7001 is configured to include a so-called rear projector screen in which the image projected from the projector device 3300 is transmitted through the incident surface 7111 of the screen 7110 and displayed on the display surface 7101. However, it is not limited to such a configuration.

In the projector device 3300, a projector cover is arranged around the projector device 3300 as in the case of the gaming machine 3001, but the illustration is omitted in FIG. 245.

FIG. 246 is an exploded perspective view of the game display device 7001. As shown in FIG. 246, the substrate G101 has a flat plate-shaped back surface portion G101a and a bottom surface portion G101b, and constitutes a back surface wall and a bottom surface wall of the housing G10, respectively. The projector device 3300 is mounted on the bottom surface portion G101b so as to be mounted. The projector device 3300 is represented by hatching with diagonal lines in FIG. 246. Further, the reflector 7200 is arranged along the inner wall of the back surface portion G101a.

The projector accommodating body G102 is attached to the bottom surface portion G101b so as to cover the projector apparatus 3300, thereby accommodating the projector apparatus 3300 in the internal space. The upper part of the internal space is opened so that the image light emitted from the projector device 3300 can reach the reflector 7200 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. The screen unit 7100 is attached so as to cover the reflector 7200, and is configured so that the image light reflected by the reflector 7200 is applied to the screen 7110.

Similar to the gaming machine 3001, a projector cover 7300 is arranged around the projector device 3300, and external air is sent in for exhaust heat of the projector device 3300. More specifically, an intake fan 7310 is arranged on the inner right side of the projector cover 7300, and external air is taken into the inside of the projector cover 7300 from an intake port 7320b provided on the front right side of the projector cover 7300. (Arrow Z1). The air taken in in this way is sent toward the vent 3404b of the projector device 3300. After that, the air taken in from the vent 3404b of the projector device 3300 passes through the inside of the projector device 3300 (arrow Z2), is discharged to the vent 3404a on the opposite side, and is exhausted to the outside from the exhaust port 7320a of the projector cover 7300. (Arrow Z3).

The U-shaped air flow path formed by the projector cover 7300 and the projector device 3300 is the U-shaped air flow formed by the projector cover 3101 and the projector device 3300 with respect to the game machine 3001 described above. It's like a road. Further, similarly to the gaming machine 3001, a pulse sensor 7311 for transmitting a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 7310 to the control unit 7400 as a rotation speed detection signal is provided.

The projector housing G102 is provided with a ventilation port 7330b for taking in air from the outside and a ventilation port 7330a for discharging air to the outside at positions corresponding to the intake port 7320b and the exhaust port 7320a of the projector cover 7330, respectively. ..

The control unit 7400 is located below the projector device 3300 in this example. The control unit 7400 has each function of the sub-control board 3200 described above with reference to FIGS. 215 to 243 (that is, a warning due to a temperature rise of the DMD, a warning due to a temperature rise of the DMD, etc. (Modifications 1 to 5). And the rotation speed error control of the intake fan) can be implemented.

The game display device 7001 displays image data according to the case where the screen unit 7100 is replaced with another screen unit, the presence / absence / installation position of the reflector 7200, the installation position / posture of the projector device 3300, and the like. It is possible to store setting information that determines whether to project by a suitable projection method (for example, in what rotation direction the image is projected). Such setting information can be prepared, for example, at the manufacturing stage or the installation stage of the game display device 7001, or can be set from another device connected to the game display device 7001.

Further, the game display device 7001 may display the video on the other game display device by transmitting the video data to the other game display device connected by the master-slave method (as a slave terminal). At this time, the above-mentioned setting information can be transmitted at the same time to change the projection method in another game display device. Here, one game display device 7001 that functions as a master terminal can connect a plurality of game display devices as slave terminals, and each of the game display devices that are slave terminals is the above-mentioned projector device. It can be equipped with a 3300. Further, the game display device 7001 can be configured to be connected to the master terminal as a slave terminal.

Further, in the game device including the game display device 7001, a projector device such as the projector device 3300 can be selectively installed at a plurality of positions as shown in, for example, FIGS. 205 and 207. Further, a plurality of projector devices can be installed at the same time at the positions shown in FIGS. 208, 212 and 213. At this time, each projector device can project an image in various rotation directions according to the installation position and the installation posture.

Although the first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings, these are merely examples, and the technical idea in the present invention can be realized by various other configurations. In addition, the gaming machines and processes shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and modified examples thereof, can be appropriately combined and implemented as long as there is no contradiction in configuration and processing.

It should be noted that the gaming machine and the gaming device according to the embodiment of the present invention basically have the following features and effects.

[Appendix A]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [A-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 3001) including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image.
The projection device
With a plurality of vents (eg, vents (3404a, 3404b)),
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
An air flow path from one vent to another in the plurality of vents (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent 3404b to the vent 3404a as shown in FIG. 177).
A first temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the first optical element, and
The air flow path includes at least a second temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor 3341d) provided downstream of the second optical element.
The temperature change unit (for example, 0.25 ° C.), which is a unit for changing the temperature detected by the second temperature detecting means, is a temperature change unit (for example, 1 ° C.) for the temperature detected by the first temperature detecting means. A game machine characterized by being smaller than).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game machine has a first optical element and a second optical element that reflects the light emitted from the first optical element, and further. , A second temperature detecting means provided downstream of the second optical element, and the temperature near the second optical element is downstream of the second optical element in the air flow path. Therefore, the temperature of the second optical element can be appropriately grasped, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

Further, since the second temperature detecting means is configured to detect the temperature change more finely than the first temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the first optical element, the temperature in the vicinity of the second optical element can be further determined. It can be grasped with high accuracy.

Further, since the first optical element can irradiate light, it is necessary to provide a first temperature detecting means in the vicinity of the first optical element, but the second optical element irradiates from the first optical element. Since the structure reflects the light, even if the second temperature detecting means is not installed in the vicinity of the second optical element, a certain level of safety is provided by providing the second temperature detecting means in the vicinity of the second optical element. On the other hand, the safety of the second optical element can be enhanced by finely handling the temperature change with the second temperature detecting means.

Further, since the position of the first temperature detecting means with respect to the first optical element and the position of the second temperature detecting means with respect to the second optical element can be arranged with different design concepts, it is possible to design the projection device. Easy to change.

The invention of [A-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device provided with a projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image.
The projection device
With multiple vents
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
An air flow path from one vent to another in the plurality of vents,
A first temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element, and
The air flow path includes at least a second temperature detecting means provided downstream of the second optical element.
The temperature change unit, which is a unit of temperature change detected by the second temperature detecting means, is smaller than the temperature change unit of the temperature detected by the first temperature detecting means (for example, a gaming device). , Game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the gaming device has a first optical element and a second optical element that reflects the light emitted from the first optical element. Further, it has a second temperature detecting means provided downstream from the second optical element, and the temperature near the second optical element is downstream from the second optical element in the air flow path. Since it is detected by means, the temperature of the second optical element can be appropriately grasped, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. ..

Further, since the second temperature detecting means is configured to detect the temperature change more finely than the first temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the first optical element, the temperature in the vicinity of the second optical element can be further determined. It can be grasped with high accuracy.

Further, since the first optical element can irradiate light, it is necessary to provide a first temperature detecting means in the vicinity of the first optical element, but the second optical element irradiates from the first optical element. Since the structure reflects the light, even if the second temperature detecting means is not installed in the vicinity of the second optical element, a certain level of safety is provided by providing the second temperature detecting means in the vicinity of the second optical element. On the other hand, the safety of the second optical element can be enhanced by finely handling the temperature change with the second temperature detecting means.

Further, since the position of the first temperature detecting means with respect to the first optical element and the position of the second temperature detecting means with respect to the second optical element can be arranged with different design concepts, it is possible to design the projection device. Easy to change.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix B]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [B-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300) and
An external control means (for example, a sub-control board 3200), which is a control means provided outside the projection device, is provided.
The projection device
With a plurality of vents (eg, vents (3404a, 3404b)),
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
An air flow path from one vent to another in the plurality of vents (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent 3404b to the vent 3404a as shown in FIG. 177).
In the air flow path, a temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor 3341d) provided in the vicinity of the second optical element and
Operation stopping means (for example, rotation stop of FAN4 and FAN5 according to DMD temperature, and DLP) for stopping the operation of the projector during operation according to at least the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means (for example, DMD temperature). It has at least a control circuit 3313, LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), and a projector control board 3310) that instructs a forced shutdown such as driving and stopping the DMD3333.
The external control means sets a reference temperature (for example, a shutdown temperature) which is a temperature at which the operation of the projection device is stopped by the operation stop means, and whether or not the operation stop means is enabled. Whether it is valid or not (for example, shutdown control execution enable / disable information indicating whether or not forced shutdown control is performed) can be set at least.
The projection device is a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001), which initializes the reference temperature and the validity / non-validity set for the projection device when energized.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game machine has a first optical element and a second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is a second. It is reflected by an optical element and has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature near the second optical element, and is projected according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means provided in the air flow path. Control means for controlling the reference temperature, which is the temperature at which the operation of the device can be stopped and the operation of the projection device is stopped, and the effectiveness of the operation stop means for stopping the operation of the projection device. Since it can be set from, the reference temperature can be set so that the reflection of light is not affected by the change in the outside air temperature.

In addition, when the power is turned on, the reference temperature set in the projection device and the validity / disable setting are initialized, and it is possible to make settings according to daily environmental changes, so high-quality images are safe. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of projecting on.

The invention of [B-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image,
An external control means, which is a control means provided outside the projection device, is provided.
The projection device
With multiple vents
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
An air flow path from one vent to another in the plurality of vents,
In the air flow path, a temperature detecting means provided in the vicinity of the second optical element and
It has at least an operation stopping means for stopping the operating operation of the projection device according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means.
The external control means has at least a reference temperature which is a temperature at which the operation of the projection device is stopped by the operation stop means and whether or not the operation stop means is effective or not. It is configurable and
The projection device is a game device (for example, a game display device 7001) that initializes the reference temperature and the validity / non-validity set for the projection device when energized.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the gaming device has a first optical element and a second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is the second. It has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the second optical element, which is reflected by the optical element of the above, and depends on the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means provided in the air flow path. It is possible to stop the operation of the projection device while it is in operation, and control the reference temperature, which is the temperature at which the operation of the projection device is stopped, and the effectiveness of the operation stop means for stopping the operation of the projection device. Since it can be set from the means, the reference temperature can be set so that the reflection of light is not affected by the change in the outside air temperature.

In addition, when the power is turned on, the reference temperature set in the projection device and the validity / disable setting are initialized, and it is possible to make settings according to daily environmental changes, so high-quality images are safe. It becomes possible to provide a gaming device capable of projecting on.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix C]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [C-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine provided with a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image.
The projection device
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
It has at least a temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor 3341d) for detecting the temperature of the second optical element.
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 3001) characterized in that the highest temperature detected by the temperature detecting means during operation of the gaming machine can be stored (for example, in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310). ..

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game machine has a first optical element and a second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is a second. It is reflected by the optical element and has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature of the second optical element, and can store the highest temperature detected by the operating temperature detecting means. Therefore, the environment in which the projection device is installed is inferred from the stored temperature, and for example, when the projection device is recycled, whether or not to recycle the projection device and the position where the temperature detection means is provided. It is possible to determine whether or not to replace adjacent parts based on the stored temperature.

The invention of [C-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [C-1].
It is possible to memorize the operating time when the gaming machine has been operated.
The operating time is configured so that it is not reset.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the projection device is recycled, whether or not to recycle the projection device and whether or not to replace a part close to the position where the temperature detecting means is provided are stored. It is possible to make a judgment based on the operating time and temperature.

The invention of [C-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device provided with a projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image.
The projection device
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
It has at least a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature of the second optical element.
A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), characterized in that the highest temperature among the temperatures detected by the temperature detecting means can be stored during the operation of the gaming device.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the gaming device has a first optical element and a second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is the second. It has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature of the second optical element, which is reflected by the optical element of the above, and can store the highest temperature detected by the operating temperature detecting means. Therefore, the environment in which the projection device is installed is inferred from the stored temperature, and for example, when the projection device is recycled, whether or not the projection device is recycled and the position where the temperature detection means is provided. It is possible to determine whether or not to replace a part close to the above based on the stored temperature.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix D]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in recent game machines equipped with a projector, it is often necessary to perform projection in a limited space, and it is necessary to change the installation position and projection method of the projector according to the configuration of the game machine. Therefore, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can easily change the installation position and projection direction of a projection device such as a projector.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration (for example, installation position and projection direction) of the projection device can be easily changed. ..
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [D-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300) and
An external control means (for example, a sub-control board 3200), which is a control means provided outside the projection device, is provided.
The projection device
An image rotating means (for example, control LSI 3311) capable of rotating the image used in the effect determined by the external control means in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction.
It has a projection means (for example, an optical mechanism 3330) that projects the rotated image.
The image rotating means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the external control means, and rotates the image by combining the vertical direction and the horizontal rotation direction (for example, forward rotation and vertical rotation). , Left-right rotation, up-down rotation + left-right rotation), a game machine (for example, game machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the rotation direction can be specified from the external control means that controls the effect. Therefore, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game machine, the image of the projection device is rotated. The direction can be easily changed, and the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed according to the configuration of the game machine.

The invention of [D-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device for projecting images and
An external control means (for example, a control unit 7400), which is a control means provided outside the projection device, is provided.
The projection device
An image rotating means capable of rotating the image determined by the external control means in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction, and
It has a projection means for projecting the rotated image, and has
The image rotating means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the external control means, and can rotate the image by combining the rotation directions of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. A featured gaming device (eg, gaming display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the rotation direction can be specified from the external control means for determining the image, so that even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the gaming device, the image of the projection device can be rotated. The direction can be easily changed, and the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed according to the configuration of the gaming device.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed.

[Appendix E]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [E-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300) and
A cover member (for example, a projector cover 3101) arranged so as to surround the projection device is provided.
The projection device
A main body having an opening (for example, an optical case main body 3418a) and
A closure that closes the opening (eg, an optical case top 3418b) and
An air flow path from one vent to another in a plurality of vents (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent 3404b to the vent 3404a as shown in FIG. 177).
It has an optical element (for example, LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) or DMD3333) provided in the main body and capable of irradiating light.
The cover member is formed with a first opening (for example, an intake port 3103b) and a second opening (for example, an exhaust port 3103a).
Inside the cover member, a first space (for example, the space P5 shown in FIG. 177) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while a second space (for example, the space P5 shown in FIG. 177) communicates with the second opening. For example, the space P6) shown in FIG. 177 is formed.
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down to the second space, and the concave structure of the main body portion is prevented so that the fluid does not reach the optical element. A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 3001) characterized in that (for example, the concave portion 3418g) and the convex structure of the closed portion (for example, the convex portion 3418h) are configured to engage with each other.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the structure on the main body side is recessed on the contact surface between the main body and the closed portion of the optical case, and the convex portion of the closed portion is engaged with the concave portion. It is difficult for fluid (for example, smoke) flowing in from the outside of the housing to enter the inside of the optical case, and the optical element (and the image projection function realized by the optical element) is not easily affected by smoke or the like.

The invention of [E-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [E-1].
When the concave structure and the convex structure are engaged, an elastic member (for example, member 3418i) is arranged between the concave structure and the convex structure.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the concave structure and the convex structure of the optical case are engaged, an elastic member is arranged between them, so that the degree of sealing between the main body portion and the closed portion of the optical case is further improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the contact between the main body and the closed portion of the optical case and absorb the vibrations of both.

The invention of [E-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device for projecting images and
A cover member arranged so as to surround the projection device is provided.
The projection device
The main body with an opening and
A closing part that closes the opening and
An air flow path from one vent to another in multiple vents,
It has an optical element provided in the main body and capable of irradiating light.
A first opening and a second opening are formed in the cover member.
Inside the cover member, a first space is formed by communicating with the first opening, while a second space is formed by communicating with the second opening.
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down to the second space, and the concave structure of the main body portion is prevented so that the fluid does not reach the optical element. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), characterized in that the convex structure of the closed portion and the convex structure of the closed portion are engaged with each other.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the structure on the main body side is recessed on the contact surface between the main body and the closed portion of the optical case, and the convex portion of the closed portion is engaged with the concave portion. The fluid (for example, smoke) flowing in from the outside of the housing of the apparatus is difficult to enter the inside of the optical case, and the optical element (and the image projection function realized by the optical element) is not easily affected by smoke or the like.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix F]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [F-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300) and
A projection device cover member (for example, a projector cover 3101) provided on the gaming machine side outside the projection device is provided.
The projection device
It is stored in the main body (for example, case 3402) and
An air flow path from one vent to another in a plurality of vents provided in the main body (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent 3404b to the vent 3404a as shown in FIG. 177). )When,
With optical elements capable of irradiating light (for example, LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and DMD3333),
A lens member through which the light emitted from the optical element passes (for example, the lens of the lens unit 3332) and
A filter member (for example, a filter 3414) provided in front of the lens member and at least making it difficult for dust to pass through.
It has a lens cover member (for example, a lens cover 3413) that fixes the filter member to the front of the lens member.
The projection device cover member is formed with a first opening (for example, an intake port 3103b) and a second opening (for example, an exhaust port 3103a).
Inside the projection device cover member, a first space (for example, the space P5 shown in FIG. 177) is formed through the first opening, while the second space communicates with the second opening. A space (for example, space P6 shown in FIG. 177) is formed.
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down into the second space.
The filter member is exposed to the outside of the main body through an opening (for example, opening 3420) provided in the main body, and is arranged outside the main body.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body portion.

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the lens cover member for holding the filter member is provided in front of the lens member, the influence of the fluid (dust such as dust and smoke) inside the main body on the lens is minimized. can do. Further, since a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body, the influence on the lens cover from the outside of the main body (touched by hand, etc.) can be minimized. Furthermore, since the filter member is arranged outside the main body from the opening provided in the main body, the influence of the fluid inside the main body is reduced, and a high-quality image with a high visual effect can be safely projected. However, space saving can be realized.

The invention of [F-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [F-1].
A part of the main body that hides the lens cover member when viewed from the outside of the main body protrudes forward (for example, the lens cover 3413 is stored in the protruding portion 3421 of the lower case 3402b). It is configured as follows.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a part of the main body portion that hides the lens cover member when viewed from the outside of the main body portion is configured to protrude forward, so that a part of the main body portion is a lens cover member. As a result, the lens member is protected and the safety of the lens member is enhanced.

The invention of [F-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A projection device for projecting images and
It is provided with a projection device cover member which is outside the projection device and is provided on the game device side.
The projection device
Stored in the main body
An air flow path from one vent to another in a plurality of vents provided in the main body, and
Optical elements that can irradiate light and
A lens member through which the light emitted from the optical element passes, and
A filter member provided in front of the lens member, which at least makes it difficult for dust to pass through,
It has a lens cover member for fixing the filter member to the front of the lens member.
A first opening and a second opening are formed in the projection device cover member.
Inside the projection device cover member, a first space is formed by communicating with the first opening, while a second space is formed by communicating with the second opening.
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down into the second space.
The filter member is exposed to the outside of the main body through an opening provided in the main body and is arranged outside the main body.
A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), wherein at least a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body portion.

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the lens cover member for holding the filter member is provided in front of the lens member, the influence of the fluid (dust such as dust and smoke) inside the main body on the lens is minimized. can do. Further, since a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body, the influence on the lens cover from the outside of the main body (touched by hand, etc.) can be minimized. Furthermore, since the filter member is arranged outside the main body from the opening provided in the main body, the influence of the fluid inside the main body is reduced, and a high-quality image with a high visual effect can be safely projected. However, space saving can be realized.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix G]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [G-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 3001) provided with a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) for projecting an image.
The projection device
Optical elements capable of irradiating light (for example, LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
It has at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) provided in the vicinity of the optical element.
At least a first temperature which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, a second temperature which is a past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and a temperature of a predetermined ratio of the first temperature. The abnormality of the optical element can be detected from the reference temperature (for example, a temperature x% higher than the first temperature).
When the value that is the result of comparison between the first temperature and the second temperature is larger than the magnitude of the value that is the reference temperature (for example, first temperature-second temperature> first temperature *. In the case of x%), the gaming machine is characterized in that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the vicinity of the optical element.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, when the value which is the comparison result between the current temperature and the past temperature is larger than the magnitude of the value which is the reference temperature obtained from the current temperature, an abnormality occurs in the optical element. Since it is possible to determine that the temperature has risen (the temperature near the optical element has risen), the gaming machine sets the optical element for each gaming machine according to the region where the climate is warm and the region where it is extremely cold. It can be used in various environments by always making a judgment based on the current temperature, and it can be safely projected even if the operating time of the gaming machine is long in such an environment. Can be done.

The invention of [G-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
It is a gaming device equipped with a projection device for projecting images.
The projection device
Optical elements that can irradiate light and
It has at least a temperature detecting means provided in the vicinity of the optical element.
At least a first temperature which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, a second temperature which is a past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and a temperature of a predetermined ratio of the first temperature. The abnormality of the optical element can be detected from the reference temperature, which is
When the value which is the result of comparison between the first temperature and the second temperature is larger than the magnitude of the value which is the reference temperature, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the vicinity of the optical element. A featured gaming device (eg, gaming display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the value which is the comparison result between the current temperature and the past temperature is larger than the magnitude of the value which is the reference temperature obtained from the current temperature, an abnormality occurs in the optical element. Since it is possible to determine that the temperature has risen (the temperature near the optical element has risen), the game device sets the optical element for games according to the region where the climate is warm and the region where it is extremely cold. It is not necessary to perform it for each device, and it can be used in various environments by always making a judgment based on the current temperature, and it is safe even if the operating time of the gaming device becomes long in such an environment. Can be projected.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix H]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [H-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 3001) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having an optical element (for example, LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) for projecting an image.
The projection device
It has at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) provided in the vicinity of the optical element.
The first value is obtained from the first temperature, which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the second temperature, which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means.
A value obtained from the reference change amount, which is the upper limit of the temperature change amount detected by the temperature detecting means, and the first temperature and the correction value stored in advance, and is the first temperature. The second value is obtained from the permissible amount of change in which the magnitude of the value decreases as the temperature increases.
A gaming machine characterized in that an abnormality relating to the optical element can be detected by comparing the first value and the second value.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a first value obtained from a first temperature which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means and a second temperature which is a past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and a first value obtained in advance. It is a value obtained from the reference change amount which is the upper limit of the temperature change amount detected by the determined temperature detecting means, the first temperature, and the correction value stored in advance, and corresponds to the rise of the first temperature. Since anomalies can be detected by comparing with the second value obtained from the permissible change amount in which the magnitude of the value becomes smaller, the upper limit of the temperature change amount can be reduced as the current temperature rises. When controlled in this way, it becomes possible to accurately detect the wear of parts of the image projection device that increases as the temperature rises, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely performing projection.

The invention of [H-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device provided with a projection device having an optical element for projecting an image.
The projection device
It has at least a temperature detecting means provided in the vicinity of the optical element.
The first value is obtained from the first temperature, which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the second temperature, which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means.
A value obtained from the reference change amount, which is the upper limit of the temperature change amount detected by the temperature detecting means, and the first temperature and the correction value stored in advance, and is the first temperature. The second value is obtained from the permissible amount of change in which the magnitude of the value decreases as the temperature increases.
A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), characterized in that an abnormality relating to the optical element can be detected by comparing the first value and the second value.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a first value obtained from a first temperature which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means and a second temperature which is a past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and a first value obtained in advance. It is a value obtained from the reference change amount which is the upper limit of the temperature change amount detected by the determined temperature detecting means, the first temperature, and the correction value stored in advance, and corresponds to the rise of the first temperature. Since anomalies can be detected by comparing with the second value obtained from the permissible change amount in which the magnitude of the value becomes smaller, the upper limit of the temperature change amount can be reduced as the current temperature rises. When controlled in this way, it becomes possible to accurately detect the wear of parts of the image projection device that increases as the temperature rises, and it is possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely performing projection.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix I]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [I-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 3001) equipped with a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having an optical element (for example, LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) for projecting an image.
The projection device
Ventilation means for ventilation (for example, exhaust fan 3342) and
It has at least a rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor 3343) for detecting the rotation speed of the ventilation means.
It is a rotation speed for detecting an abnormality related to the ventilation means from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means (for example, the rotation speed at the time of starting) within a predetermined period after the projection device is activated. The reference rotation speed can be set,
A gaming machine characterized in that an abnormality relating to the ventilation means can be detected from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means after the reference rotation speed is set and the reference rotation speed.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a reference rotation speed, which is a rotation speed for detecting an abnormality related to the ventilation means from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means within a predetermined period after the projection device is activated. Can be set, and the abnormality related to the ventilation means can be detected from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means and the reference rotation speed. Therefore, the abnormality of the ventilation means is deteriorated over time without simply judging by the rotation speed. By detecting abnormalities in the ventilation means according to the condition of the ventilation means due to individual differences, the timing of error notification of the projection device (the period from the start of operation of the projection device to the notification of the error) is alleviated, which is wasteful. It is possible to safely project even if the operating time of the game machine is long, while reducing the replacement of various ventilation means.

The invention of [I-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device provided with a projection device having an optical element for projecting an image.
The projection device
Ventilation means for ventilation and
It has at least a rotation speed detecting means for detecting the rotation speed of the ventilation means.
Within a predetermined period after the projection device is activated, it is possible to set a reference rotation speed, which is a rotation speed for detecting an abnormality related to the ventilation means, from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means.
A gaming device (for example, an abnormality relating to the ventilation means can be detected from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means after the reference rotation speed is set and the reference rotation speed. Display device for games 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, a reference rotation speed, which is a rotation speed for detecting an abnormality related to the ventilation means from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means within a predetermined period after the projection device is activated. Can be set, and the abnormality related to the ventilation means can be detected from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means and the reference rotation speed. Therefore, the abnormality of the ventilation means is deteriorated over time without simply judging by the rotation speed. By detecting abnormalities in the ventilation means according to the condition of the ventilation means due to individual differences, the timing of error notification of the projection device (the period from the start of operation of the projection device to the notification of the error) is alleviated, which is wasteful. It is possible to safely project even if the operating time of the gaming device is long, while reducing the replacement of various ventilation means.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix J]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in recent game machines equipped with a projector, it is often necessary to perform projection in a limited space, and it is necessary to change the installation position and projection method of the projector according to the configuration of the game machine. Therefore, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can easily change the installation position and projection direction of a projection device such as a projector.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration (for example, installation position and projection direction) of the projection device can be easily changed. ..
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [J-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control means (for example, a sub-control board 4200) for controlling the effect is provided, and a projection device (for example, a projector device 4300) for projecting an image is placed at a plurality of positions (for example, a position D of the projector device 4300 shown in FIG. 207). A gaming machine that can be installed in E) (for example, a gaming machine 4001).
The projection device
Control of an image rotating means (for example, a projector device 4300) capable of rotating an image used in an effect determined by the control means in a vertical direction and / or a horizontal direction (for example, a rotation direction shown in FIG. 189). LSI4311 etc.)
The image rotating means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means, and even when the installation position of the projection device is changed, the designation from the control means can be changed. A gaming machine capable of projecting an image with the same reference as the image before the installation position of the projection device is changed.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game machine, the rotation direction of the image of the projection device can be easily changed. Therefore, the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed.

The invention of [J-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game device having a control means for controlling game information (for example, the number of acquired game media, a production image, etc.) and capable of installing a projection device for projecting an image at a plurality of positions.
The projection device
It has an image rotating means capable of rotating the image determined by the control means in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction.
The image rotating means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means, and even when the installation position of the projection device is changed, the designation from the control means can be changed. A game device (for example, a game display device 7001) capable of projecting an image with the same reference as the image before the installation position of the projection device is changed.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game device, the rotation direction of the image of the projection device can be easily changed. Therefore, the configuration of the game device. It is possible to easily change the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) according to the above.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed.

[Appendix K]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in recent game machines equipped with a projector, it is often necessary to perform projection in a limited space, and it is necessary to change the installation position and projection method of the projector according to the configuration of the game machine. Therefore, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can easily change the installation position and projection direction of a projection device such as a projector.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration (for example, installation position and projection direction) of the projection device can be easily changed. ..
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [K-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (for example, a game machine) provided with a control means (for example, a sub-control board 4200') for controlling the effect and a plurality of projection devices for projecting an image (for example, projector devices 4300a and 4300b shown in FIG. 208). Machine 4001')
The plurality of projection devices
An image rotating means (for example, a projector device 4300') capable of rotating an image used in an effect determined by the control means in a vertical direction and / or a horizontal direction (for example, a rotation direction shown in FIG. 189). Control LSI 4311'etc.)
The image rotating means can determine the direction of rotation of the image according to the designation from the control means.
The control means
The rotation direction of the image used in the effect is specified for one of the plurality of projection devices, and the rotation of the image related to the effect is specified for the other projection device among the plurality of projection devices. It is possible to specify the direction, the rotation direction specified for one projection device among multiple projection devices, and the rotation direction specified for the other projection device among multiple projection devices. Is a gaming machine characterized in that different rotation directions can be specified.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game machine, the rotation direction of the image of the projection device can be easily changed. The configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed.

The invention of [K-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game device including a control means for controlling game information (for example, the number of acquired game media, a production image, etc.) and a plurality of projection devices for projecting an image.
The plurality of projection devices
It has an image rotating means capable of rotating the image determined by the control means in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction.
The image rotating means can determine the direction of rotation of the image according to the designation from the control means.
The control means
The rotation direction of the image is specified for one projection device among the plurality of projection devices, and the rotation direction of the image related to the image is specified for the other projection device among the plurality of projection devices. It is possible that the direction of rotation specified for one of the projection devices is different from the direction of rotation specified for the other projection device of the plurality of projection devices. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), characterized in that the direction can be specified.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game device, the rotation direction of the image of the projection device can be easily changed. Therefore, the configuration of the game device. The configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed according to the above.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed.

[Appendix L]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in recent gaming machines equipped with a projector, it is difficult to change the projection position of the image by the projector according to the effect because the projection must be performed in a limited space, which is surprising to the effect. Even when the projection target is moved so as to have the above, the range in which the projection target can move is limited to the projection range of the projector.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of performing various effects and the like with a simple configuration.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [L-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 6001) provided with a control means (for example, a sub-control board 6200) for controlling the effect and a projection device (for example, projector devices 6300a, 6300b) for projecting an image. ,
The projection device
Control of an image rotating means (for example, a projector device 6300) capable of rotating an image used in an effect determined by the control means in a vertical direction and / or a horizontal direction (for example, a rotation direction shown in FIG. 189). LSI6311 etc.)
The image rotating means can determine the direction of rotation of the image according to the designation from the control means.
The control means
When the rotation direction with respect to the image used in the effect can be specified for the projection device and the position of the reflective member (for example, the mirror mechanism 3105) that reflects the light from the projection device is displaced in the effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the rotation direction of an image can be specified to the projection device according to the displacement of the reflection member.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the projected image is reflected by the projection device that normally projects without using the reflecting member, the reflected image is a mirror. Since it is in the state of copying, it is necessary to add rotation to the original image, and by controlling the rotation of such an image with the projection device and the control means, the projection range by the projection device can be determined by a simple method. It can be expanded and various productions can be provided.

The invention of [L-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game device including a control means for controlling game information (for example, the number of acquired game media, a production image, etc.) and a projection device for projecting an image.
The projection device
It has an image rotating means capable of rotating the image determined by the control means in the vertical direction and / or the horizontal direction.
The image rotating means can determine the direction of rotation of the image according to the designation from the control means.
The control means
When the rotation direction with respect to the image can be specified for the projection device and the position of the reflecting member that reflects the light from the projection device is displaced in relation to the image, the position of the reflecting member is displaced according to the displacement of the reflecting member. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), characterized in that the direction of rotation of an image can be specified to the projection device.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the projected image is reflected by the projection device that normally projects without using the reflecting member, the projected image is reflected according to the predetermined image display. Since the image is in a mirrored state, it is necessary to add rotation to the original image, and by controlling the rotation of such an image with the projection device and the control means, the projection device can be used in a simple manner. It is possible to expand the projection range and provide various game information.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of performing various effects and the like with a simple configuration.

[Appendix M]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [M-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projector (eg, 3341d) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. , Projector device 3300)
The temperature storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings (for example, every second) and stores it cumulatively,
The comparison result between the detected temperature (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and the first reference temperature (for example, 64 ° C. set as the expected shutdown temperature), or the above. A warning screen determining means (for example, the sub-control board 3200) for determining whether or not to display the first warning screen (for example, the warning screen (2)) in response to a predetermined notification (for example, an error notification) from the projection device. With sub CPU3201)
When the warning screen determining means determines that the first warning screen is not displayed, the result of comparison between the detected temperature and the second reference temperature (for example, 50 ° C. set as the warning temperature) and the detected temperature. It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to display a second warning screen (for example, a warning screen (1)) different from the first warning screen according to a change in (for example, TempNowSt representing a change in Temperature and Temperature1). (For example, the gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the situation is such that the projection device provided in the gaming machine is shut down based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, or other warnings should be given. Since it is determined whether the situation is the situation and different warning screens are displayed according to the situation, the situation of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed warning screen, thereby producing a high-quality image. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting.

The invention of [M-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [M-1].
The first display means (for example, front screen mechanism 3091, etc.), which is the main display means for displaying according to the progress of the game, and
A second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3023), which is a sub display means different from the first display means,
A display control means (for example, a sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) is provided.
The display control means is configured to display the first warning screen on the first display means and display the second warning screen on the second display means based on the determination by the warning screen determination means. To.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the first warning screen is displayed on the first display means and the second warning screen is displayed on the second display means, so that the projection device is shut down and displayed on the second display means. Even if this is not possible, the content of the warning is displayed on the first display means, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [M-3] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [M-1] or the invention of [M-2].
The warning screen determining means has the detection temperature and a third reference temperature (for example, 49 ° C. set as a stable temperature) which is a temperature lower than the second reference temperature, which is a temperature lower than the first reference temperature. Whether or not to hide the second warning screen, or whether to maintain the display state or the non-display state of the second warning screen according to the comparison result with and at least one of the changes in the detected temperature. It is configured to determine whether or not.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the second warning screen is hidden, and the display state and the non-display state are maintained according to any of the comparison result between the detected temperature and the second reference temperature and the change in the detected temperature. Is determined, so that the second warning screen is effectively displayed only when the projection device is abnormal, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [M-4] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
A temperature storage means that acquires and cumulatively stores the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings, and
A warning for determining whether or not to display the first warning screen according to the comparison result between the detected temperature and the first reference temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means, or a predetermined notification from the projection device. Equipped with screen judgment means
When the warning screen determining means determines that the first warning screen is not displayed, the warning screen determines the first warning screen according to the comparison result between the detected temperature and the second reference temperature and the change in the detected temperature. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), which determines whether or not to display a different second warning screen.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the first warning screen is displayed on the first display means and the second warning screen is displayed on the second display means, so that the projection device is shut down and displayed on the second display means. Even if this is not possible, the content of the warning is displayed on the first display means, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix N]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [N-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projector (eg, 3341d) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. , Projector device 3300)
The temperature storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings (for example, every second) and stores it cumulatively,
The detection temperature (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) and the reference temperature (for example, 64 ° C. set as the expected shutdown temperature, 50 ° C. set as the warning temperature, etc., accumulated in the temperature storage means. A warning screen (for example, a warning screen (1)), a warning screen (for example, a warning screen (1)), according to a comparison result with the stable temperature (49 ° C.) and a change in the detected temperature (for example, TempNowSt indicating a change in TempNow and TempOld1). 2)) is provided, or a warning screen determination means (for example, sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) for determining whether to display the displayed warning screen or to hide the displayed warning screen is provided.
In the warning screen determination means, the current detection temperature stored after the previous detection temperature satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 0 ° C. or 0 ° C. or lower) becomes the reference temperature (for example, 50 ° C.). Even if the temperature is such that the warning screen is displayed (for example, 50 ° C. or higher) based on the comparison result of Machine 3001).

According to such a configuration of the present invention, when the display / non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the detected temperature is a temperature such as 0 ° C. Since the display state or non-display state of the warning screen is maintained, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate warning screen from being displayed based on the detection temperature, which is abnormal data due to the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [N-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [N-1].
The warning screen is further provided with a warning screen display count counting means (for example, sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) that cumulatively counts the number of transitions from the non-display state to the display state as the warning screen display count.
The warning screen display count counting means controls the data representing the warning screen display count to be coded (for example, coded into a two-dimensional code) and displayed on the display means (for example, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023). It is configured as follows.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the number of times the warning screen is displayed is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine in a coded state, so that the code of the display means can be easily captured and decoded to easily display the warning screen. The number of impressions can be grasped, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [N-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
A temperature storage means that acquires and cumulatively stores the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings, and
A warning screen is displayed or the displayed warning screen is hidden according to the comparison result between the detected temperature and the reference temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and the change in the detected temperature. It is equipped with a warning screen determination means for determining whether or not to perform.
Even if the current detection temperature stored after the previous detection temperature satisfies the predetermined condition is the temperature at which the warning screen is displayed based on the comparison result with the reference temperature. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), which does not display the warning screen based on the detected temperature of the present time.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, when the display / non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the detected temperature is a temperature such as 0 ° C. Since the display state or non-display state of the warning screen is maintained, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate warning screen from being displayed based on the detection temperature, which is abnormal data due to the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix O]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [O-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
An intake means capable of inhaling external air (for example, an intake fan 3210) and
A gaming machine including a rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor 3211) for detecting the rotation speed of the intake means.
A warning screen (for example, a warning) is based on the number of rotations detected by the rotation speed detecting means within a predetermined period (for example, at the time of starting (1 second after starting) or 5 seconds after starting) after the gaming machine is started. A warning screen determination means (for example, sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) for determining whether to display the screen (3) or the warning screen (4)) is further provided.
The warning screen determination means has a first rotation speed based on the detected rotation speed (for example, an average of a total of five FAN rotation speeds acquired every second from the start) and a first reference value (for example, intake air). It is determined whether or not to display the first warning screen (for example, the warning screen (3)) according to the comparison result of the specified value 1), which is the rotation speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of the fan 3210. The second rotation speed (for example, the FAN rotation speed at startup) and the second reference value (for example, the rotation speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210) based on the detected rotation speed. According to the comparison result of 2), it is determined whether or not to display a second warning screen (for example, a warning screen (4)) different from the first warning screen.
The first rotation speed and the second rotation speed are based on the rotation speeds detected in different periods (for example, 5 seconds after startup and 1 second after startup).
The first warning screen and the second warning screen are displayed in different display periods (for example, 3 minutes and a period until a power failure), respectively (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display the corresponding warning screens according to different criteria based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detecting means. Correspondingly, a corresponding appropriate warning screen is displayed, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

Further, according to such a configuration of the present invention, the abnormality is judged by different evaluation criteria for the intake means, and the display period of the warning screen displayed accordingly is set to be different, so that the importance of the warning is important. It is possible to display a warning screen according to the degree of influence and the degree of influence, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [O-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [O-1].
Further, a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having an optical element (for example, LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), DMD3333) for projecting an image is provided.
The intake means can send external air towards the projection device.
When the warning screen determining means determines to display the second warning screen, which is a warning screen more serious than the first warning screen, the brightness of the image projected by the projection device is changed (for example, a projector). The brightness of the device 3300 is set to 0).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when a serious error is found in the intake means, the brightness of the projection device is controlled to be reduced, so that heat is generated in the projection device in preparation for a decrease in the cooling function by the intake means. It is effectively deterred, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting high-quality images.

The invention of [O-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
An intake means capable of inhaling external air (for example, an intake fan 7310) and
A gaming device including a rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor 7311) for detecting the rotation speed of the intake means.
Further provided with a warning screen determining means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen based on the number of rotations detected by the rotation speed detecting means within a predetermined period after the gaming device is activated.
The warning screen determining means determines whether or not to display the first warning screen according to the comparison result of the first rotation speed and the first reference value based on the detected rotation speed, and determines whether or not to display the first warning screen, and the detected rotation speed. It is determined whether or not to display a second warning screen different from the first warning screen according to the comparison result of the second rotation speed and the second reference value based on the above.
The first rotation speed and the second rotation speed are based on the rotation speeds detected in different periods.
A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), wherein the first warning screen and the second warning screen are displayed in different display periods.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display the corresponding warning screens according to different criteria based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detecting means. Correspondingly, a corresponding appropriate warning screen is displayed, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

Further, according to such a configuration of the present invention, the abnormality is judged by different evaluation criteria for the intake means, and the display period of the warning screen displayed accordingly is set to be different, so that the importance of the warning is important. It is possible to display a warning screen according to the degree of influence and the degree of influence, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix P]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [P-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projector (eg, 3341d) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. , Projector device 3300)
The temperature storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings (for example, every second) and stores it cumulatively,
The comparison result between the detection temperature (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and the first reference temperature (for example, 50 ° C. set as the warning temperature), and the detection. It is determined whether or not to display the warning screen (for example, the warning screen (2)) according to the change in temperature (for example, the increase transition in TempNowSt indicating the change between TempNow and TempOld1) (for example, condition A and condition B). ) A warning screen determination means (for example, a sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) is provided.
The warning screen determining means compares the detection temperature with a second reference temperature lower than the first reference temperature (for example, 49 ° C. set as a stable temperature), and changes in the detection temperature (for example, TempNow). It is determined whether or not to hide the warning screen according to at least one of (for example, the number of downward transitions and the number of continuous downward transitions) in TempNowSt representing the change in Temperature1 (for example, condition C and condition D). (For example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the display / non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detection temperature and the change in the detection temperature in the projection device provided in the gaming machine. The warning screen is displayed or hidden at the appropriate timing, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [P-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [P-1].
When the warning screen is displayed when the previous detection temperature is equal to or higher than the first reference temperature, the warning screen determination means detects the detection when the detection temperature is equal to or lower than the second reference temperature. When the temperature is lower than the previous detection temperature, it is determined to hide the warning screen (condition C).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the detection temperature and the change of the detection temperature tend to be in a more stable direction, it is determined that the warning screen is hidden, so that it is appropriate according to the temperature condition of the projection device. The warning screen is hidden at the right time, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [P-3] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [P-2].
In the warning screen determining means, even if the detected temperature this time is equal to or higher than the first reference temperature, when the detected temperature continuously decreases at a timing within a predetermined period (for example, the detected temperature three times in a row). The warning screen is determined to be hidden (condition D) when the change in the above is a downward transition.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, when the change of the detected temperature is continuously decreasing a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the warning screen is hidden regardless of the detected temperature. The warning screen is hidden at an appropriate timing accordingly, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [P-4] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
A temperature storage means that acquires and cumulatively stores the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings, and
A warning screen determining means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen according to a comparison result between the detected temperature and the first reference temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and a change in the detected temperature. With,
Whether the warning screen determining means hides the warning screen according to at least one of the comparison result between the detected temperature and the second reference temperature lower than the first reference temperature and the change in the detected temperature. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), characterized in that it determines whether or not it is present.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the display / non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detection temperature and the change in the detection temperature in the projection device provided in the gaming device. The warning screen is displayed or hidden at an appropriate timing, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix Q]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [Q-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 3001) including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) that projects an image.
An intake means capable of inhaling external air (for example, an intake fan 3210) and
A rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor 3211) for detecting the rotation speed of the intake means, and
The rotation speed and the reference value (for example, the intake fan 3210) detected by the rotation speed detecting means within a predetermined period after the game machine is started (for example, at the time of starting (1 second after starting) or 5 seconds after starting). Warning based on the comparison result with the specified value 1 which is the rotation speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of No. 1 and the specified value 2) which is the rotation speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210. A warning screen determination means (for example, sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) for determining whether or not to display a screen (for example, a warning screen (3) or a warning screen (4)) is provided.
The projection device
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element.
Having at least an operation stopping means (for example, a control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310) for stopping the operating operation of the projection device separately from the gaming machine according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means. A featured gaming machine.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display a warning screen regarding the intake means based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detecting means, and in the projection device, the temperature detecting means is used. Based on the detected temperature detected by, the operating operation of the projection device is stopped separately from the game machine, so it is effective to respond to abnormal conditions with both the projection device and the intake means for cooling it. This makes it possible to provide a game machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [Q-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [Q-1].
The intake means can send external air towards the projection device.
The projection device can be activated in response to the activation of the gaming machine while the operation is stopped.
The warning screen is controlled so that the display is not started after the elapse of the predetermined period, and after the operating operation of the projection device is stopped by the operation stopping means (for example, when a reset request is made). Displayed when the stopped operation is resumed in response to the activation of the gaming machine (after the reset is performed) and the rotation speed is the rotation speed for which the warning screen is displayed even after the operation is restarted. It is configured to be controlled to be.

With such a configuration of the present invention, during the player's game (after a predetermined period of time), a warning screen (for example, at least one of the warning screen (3) and the warning screen (4)) indicating an abnormality of the intake means is displayed. Since the warning screen is displayed when the projection device returns to power failure (that is, the operation is restarted in response to the activation of the gaming machine) without displaying it, the player can concentrate on the game without seeing the warning screen. After the projection device is shut down due to an abnormality in the intake means, the warning screen is displayed, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. It becomes.

The invention of [Q-3] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [Q-1].
The warning screen includes a first warning screen (for example, a warning screen (3)) and a second warning screen (for example, a warning screen (4)) different from the first warning screen.
The warning screen determining means determines whether or not to display the first warning screen and whether or not to display the second warning screen according to different criteria.
The cumulative number of times the first warning screen is displayed and the cumulative number of times the second warning screen is displayed are added up and grasped.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the cumulative number of times the first warning screen is displayed and the number of times the second warning screen is displayed are added up and grasped, so that the abnormal state of the gaming machine can be grasped as a whole. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [Q-4] of the present invention has the following configuration.
It is a gaming device equipped with a projection device that projects an image.
An intake means capable of inhaling external air (for example, an intake fan 7310) and
A rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor 7311) for detecting the rotation speed of the intake means, and
A warning screen determining means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen based on a comparison result between the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means and a reference value within a predetermined period after the gaming device is activated. And with
The projection device
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element, and
A gaming device (for example, a game) having at least an operation stopping means for stopping the operating operation of the projection device separately from the gaming device according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means. Display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display a warning screen regarding the intake means based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detecting means, and in the projection device, the temperature detecting means is used. Based on the detection temperature detected by, the operating operation of the projection device is stopped separately from the game device, so that both the projection device and the intake means for cooling it can respond to abnormal conditions. It is done effectively, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix R]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [R-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projector (eg, 3341d) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. , Projector device 3300)
The temperature storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings (for example, every second) and stores it cumulatively,
When the detection temperature rises with the passage of time, the brightness of the image projected by the projection device (for example, the brightness of the LED light source 3331R or the like) is set to be gradually reduced according to the rise in the detection temperature. When the detection temperature decreases with the passage of time, the brightness adjusting means (for example, the sub-control board 3200) for setting the brightness of the image projected by the projection device to be gradually increased according to the decrease in the detection temperature. Sub CPU 3201), and a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is set to decrease as the detection temperature detected by the temperature detecting means increases, and the brightness of the projection device increases as the detection temperature decreases. Therefore, the abnormal heat generation of the projection device is effectively suppressed, which makes it possible to provide a game machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [R-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [R-1].
The brightness adjusting means is
When the detection temperature rises with the passage of time, or when the detection temperature becomes equal to or higher than the first reference temperature (for example, 50 ° C. set as the specified temperature (1)), the brightness is changed to be smaller than the initial brightness. (For example, the brightness is reduced to 50% of 1/2), and when the detected temperature becomes equal to or higher than the second reference temperature higher than the first reference temperature (for example, 64 ° C. set as the specified temperature (2)). ) To further reduce the brightness (for example, set the brightness to 0%).
After that, when the detected temperature decreases with the passage of time, the detected temperature is equal to or lower than the third reference temperature (for example, 59 ° C. which is the specified temperature (2) -correction temperature (5 ° C.)) lower than the second reference temperature. When becomes, the brightness is changed to be increased (for example, the brightness is changed from 0% to 50%), and the detection temperature is lower than the first reference temperature for a fourth reference temperature (for example, a specified temperature (1). ) -The brightness is changed to be further increased (for example, the brightness is changed from 50% to 100%) when the temperature becomes 45 ° C or lower, which is the correction temperature (5 ° C).
When the detected temperature becomes equal to or lower than the fourth reference temperature, the brightness is returned to the initial brightness as a result of the change (for example, the brightness that was 100% is changed from 50%->0%-> 50). %-> 100% transition).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the detection temperature detected by the temperature detecting means rises, the brightness of the projection device is set to decrease based on the first reference temperature and the second reference temperature, and when the detection temperature falls, the brightness of the projection device is set to decrease. Since the brightness of the projection device is set to be large based on the third reference temperature lower than the second reference temperature and the fourth reference temperature lower than the first reference temperature, the detection temperature fluctuates frequently near each reference temperature. Even in the case, it is effective to prevent the brightness of the projection device from being changed frequently accordingly, thereby providing a game machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. Is possible.

The invention of [R-3] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [R-1].
By the brightness adjusting means, a brightness decrease temperature (for example, a specified temperature (1) or a specified temperature (2)) which is a reference for determining to reduce the brightness and a brightness increase temperature which is a reference for determining to restore the brightness. (For example, the specified temperature (1) -correction temperature or the specified temperature (2) -correction temperature) is different.
The brightness increase temperature is configured to be a temperature obtained by subtracting a predetermined correction value from the brightness decrease temperature.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a reference temperature for setting the brightness of the projection device to be small when the detection temperature detected by the temperature detecting means rises, and a reference for setting the brightness of the projection device to be large when the detection temperature falls. Even if the detection temperature fluctuates frequently near each reference temperature, it is effectively suppressed that the brightness of the projection device is frequently changed accordingly, and the temperature drops once. To return the increased brightness to the original brightness (initial brightness), it is necessary to provide a game machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image by requiring that the temperature be lower than the lowered temperature. Is possible.

The invention of [R-4] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
A temperature storage means that acquires and cumulatively stores the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings, and
When the detection temperature rises with the passage of time, the brightness of the image projected by the projection device is set to be gradually reduced according to the rise of the detection temperature, and the detection temperature decreases with the passage of time. A gaming device (for example, for gaming), which comprises a brightness adjusting means for setting the brightness of the image projected by the projection device to be gradually increased in response to a decrease in the detection temperature. Display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is set to decrease as the detection temperature detected by the temperature detecting means increases, and the brightness of the projection device increases as the detection temperature decreases. Therefore, the abnormal heat generation of the projection device is effectively suppressed, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix S]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [S-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projector (eg, 3341d) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. , Projector device 3300)
The temperature storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings (for example, every second) and stores it cumulatively,
A warning for determining whether to display a warning screen (for example, a warning screen (1)) based on the detected temperature (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means. A screen determination means (for example, a sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) is provided.
The warning screen determination means
When the change in the detected temperature (for example, TempOld1-TempNow) this time is equal to or higher than the first reference value (for example, 10 ° C.), it is determined not to perform the determination.
When the previous change in the detected temperature (for example, TempOld2-TempOld1) is equal to or greater than the first reference value, the change in the detected temperature this time is equal to or less than the first reference value (for example, greater than or equal to the second reference value). For example, if it is 3 ° C.), it is determined not to perform the determination based on the detected temperature.
If the previous change in the detected temperature is equal to or greater than the first reference value and the change in the detected temperature this time is less than the second reference value, which is equal to or less than the first reference value, the detection temperature is reached. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001), which is determined to make the determination based on the above.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the previous detection temperature fluctuates significantly, the warning screen display state is not determined, the warning screen display state and non-display state are maintained as they are, and then the change in the detection temperature this time. When is not so large (it can be judged that the detection temperature that fluctuated greatly in the previous time is the correct temperature transition), the display judgment of the warning screen is performed, and then the change in the detected temperature this time fluctuates greatly (the large fluctuation in the previous time When the detected temperature can be judged to be an incorrect temperature transition), the warning screen is not judged to be displayed and the warning screen is displayed or hidden as it is. Therefore, the display or non-display of the warning screen is related to the detected temperature. It is not affected by large temporary fluctuations, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [S-2] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
A temperature storage means that acquires and cumulatively stores the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings, and
A warning screen determining means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen based on the detected temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means is provided.
The warning screen determination means
When the change in the detected temperature this time is equal to or greater than the first reference value, it is determined not to perform the determination.
If the previous change in the detected temperature is equal to or greater than the first reference value and the change in the detected temperature this time is greater than or equal to the second reference value, which is equal to or less than the first reference value, the detection temperature is reached. Based on the decision not to make the above judgment,
If the previous change in the detected temperature is equal to or greater than the first reference value and the change in the detected temperature this time is less than the second reference value, which is equal to or less than the first reference value, the detection temperature is reached. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), which is determined to perform the determination based on the above.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the previous detection temperature fluctuates significantly, the warning screen display state is not determined, the warning screen display state and non-display state are maintained as they are, and then the change in the detection temperature this time. When is not so large (it can be judged that the detection temperature that fluctuated greatly in the previous time is the correct temperature transition), the display judgment of the warning screen is performed, and then the change in the detected temperature this time fluctuates greatly (the change in the detection temperature in the previous time fluctuates greatly). When the detected temperature can be judged to be an incorrect temperature transition), the warning screen is not judged to be displayed and the warning screen is displayed or hidden as it is. Therefore, the display or non-display of the warning screen is related to the detected temperature. It is not affected by large temporary fluctuations, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix T]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [T-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projector (eg, 3341d) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. , Projector device 3300)
The temperature storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings (for example, every second) and stores it cumulatively,
A warning for determining whether to display a warning screen (for example, a warning screen (1)) based on the detected temperature (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means. Screen determination means (for example, sub CPU 3201 of sub control board 3200) and
A warning screen display count counting means (for example, sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) that cumulatively counts the number of warning screen display times when the warning screen transitions from the non-display state to the display state is provided.
The warning screen display count counting means includes at least a transition to the display state of the warning screen based on the difference between the current detection temperature and the previous detection temperature by a predetermined value (for example, 15 ° C.) or more. When the non-accounting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 3001) is controlled so that the number of times the warning screen is displayed is not cumulatively counted.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the display / non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, so that the number of times the warning screen is displayed under a predetermined condition is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accurate (substantial) number of temperature errors, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [T-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [T-1].
The warning screen display count counting means controls the data representing the warning screen display count to be coded (for example, coded into a two-dimensional code) and displayed on the display means (for example, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023). It is configured as follows.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the number of times the warning screen is displayed is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine in a coded state, so that the code of the display means can be easily captured and decoded to easily display the warning screen. The number of impressions can be grasped, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [T-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
A temperature storage means that acquires and cumulatively stores the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings, and
A warning screen determining means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen based on the detected temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means, and
It is provided with a warning screen display count counting means for cumulatively counting the number of warning screen display times when the warning screen transitions from the non-display state to the display state.
The warning screen display count counting means satisfies a predetermined non-counting condition including a transition to a warning screen display state based on at least a deviation between the current detection temperature and the previous detection temperature by a predetermined value or more. The game device (for example, the game display device 7001) is characterized in that the number of times the warning screen is displayed is controlled so as not to be cumulatively counted.

According to such a configuration of the present invention, the display / non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, so that the number of times the warning screen is displayed under a predetermined condition is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accurate (substantial) number of temperature errors, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix U]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [U-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device (for example, a projector) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. Device 3300) and
The temperature storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings (for example, every second) and stores it cumulatively,
When the detection temperature rises with the passage of time and the detection temperature becomes equal to or higher than the reference operating temperature (for example, 25 ° C.), the detection temperature is set as the first temperature (for example, the adjustment unit temperature). When the brightness of the image projected by the projection device is reduced by a first predetermined value (for example, 2%) each time the temperature is increased by 2.5 ° C., and the detection temperature decreases with the passage of time. Therefore, when the detected temperature becomes equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature, the second temperature (for example, 5 ° C. set as the adjustment unit temperature) whose detected temperature is larger than the first temperature is lowered. Brightness adjusting means (for example, sub-control) that controls the brightness of the image projected by the projection device to be increased by a second predetermined value (for example, 2%, which is the same as the first predetermined value, or another value). A game machine (for example, a game machine 3001) including a sub CPU 3201) of the board 3200.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is changed according to the change in the detection temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and when the detection temperature rises, for example, the brightness becomes 2 for every 2.5 ° C. rise. It is changed to be smaller by%, and when the detection temperature is lowered, for example, the brightness is changed to be increased by 2% every time the temperature is lowered by 5 ° C. It is possible to provide a game machine that can safely project high-quality images by slowly responding to the brightness when the detection temperature rises and carefully responding to the brightness when the detection temperature drops. It will be possible.

The invention of [U-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [U-1].
In the luminance adjusting means, when the detection temperature drops with the passage of time and a certain time (for example, 1 minute) elapses when the detection temperature becomes equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature, the projection device can be used. It is configured to return the brightness of the projected image to the initial brightness.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the detection temperature is lowered, the brightness is returned to the initial brightness when the state below the reference operating temperature is held for a certain period of time, so that the detection temperature rises again or the temperature changes suddenly. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention of [U-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
A temperature storage means that acquires and cumulatively stores the detection temperature detected by the temperature detection means at predetermined timings, and
When the detection temperature rises with the passage of time and the detection temperature becomes equal to or higher than the reference operating temperature, the image projected by the projection device each time the detection temperature rises to the first temperature. When the detection temperature drops with the passage of time and the detection temperature becomes equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature, the detection temperature becomes the first temperature. A gaming device comprising: a brightness adjusting means for controlling the brightness of an image projected by the projection device to be increased by a second predetermined value each time a larger second temperature is lowered. For example, a game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is changed according to the change in the detection temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and when the detection temperature rises, for example, the brightness becomes 2 for every 2.5 ° C. rise. When the detection temperature drops, for example, the brightness is changed to decrease by 2% every time the detection temperature drops by 5 ° C. Therefore, the brightness changes when the detection temperature drops compared to when the detection temperature rises. To provide a gaming device that can safely project high-quality images by slowly responding to the brightness when the detection temperature rises and carefully responding to the brightness when the detection temperature drops. Is possible.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix V]
[Background technology]

Some conventional gaming machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-3506 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459 [Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, the operating time of the gaming machine is often long, and it is required to continue to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines and gaming devices.

The invention of [V-1] of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) and
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projector (eg, 3341d) having at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element. , Projector device 3300)
The detection temperature based on the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is received from the projection device at predetermined timings (for example, every 1 second), and when the detection temperature is negative, the detection temperature is set to 0 ° C. When the detected temperature changes with the passage of time, the detected temperature before the change is set as the previous temperature (for example, TempOld1), and the detected temperature after the change is cumulatively stored as the current temperature (for example, TempNow). Storage means (for example, sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) and
When the previous temperature is other than 0 ° C. and the current temperature is 0 ° C. for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second which is the reception timing of the detected temperature), the warning screen (for example, the warning screen (1)) ) Is displayed (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200), and the gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the current temperature and the previous temperature are updated only when the detected temperature changes, and an abnormal situation in which the previous temperature is other than 0 ° C and the current temperature is 0 ° C is continued for a predetermined period. Since a warning screen is displayed in the case, it is possible to grasp that the detection temperature of 0 ° C. is continuously transmitted from the projection device, thereby providing a game machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. It becomes possible to do.

The invention of [V-2] of the present invention has the following configuration in the invention of [V-1].
The projection device
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is negative, the temperature controlling means (for example, the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310) is configured to transmit the detected temperature as 0 ° C.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the detected temperature is corrected in the projection device. Therefore, when a negative detected temperature is received by the temperature storage means of the gaming machine, for example, the projection device and the sub-control It is considered that the noise between the substrates is the cause, and the number of times such noise is generated can be surely grasped, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. It becomes.

The invention of [V-3] of the present invention has the following configuration.
The first optical element that can irradiate light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element, and
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element.
The detection temperature based on the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is received from the projection device at predetermined timings, and when the detection temperature is negative, the detection temperature is set to 0 ° C., and the detection temperature is the time. When the temperature changes with the lapse of time, the temperature storage means that cumulatively stores the detected temperature before the change as the previous temperature and the detected temperature after the change as the current temperature.
For games, the game comprises a warning screen determining means for determining to display a warning screen when the previous temperature is other than 0 ° C. and the current temperature is 0 ° C. for a predetermined period of time. Device (for example, game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the current temperature and the previous temperature are updated only when the detected temperature changes, and an abnormal situation in which the previous temperature is other than 0 ° C and the current temperature is 0 ° C is continued for a predetermined period. In some cases, a warning screen is displayed, so it is possible to know that the detection temperature of 0 ° C has been continuously transmitted from the projection device, which enables a gaming device that can safely project high-quality images. It will be possible to provide.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

1 Game machine G Cabinet G4 Top wall A Display unit B1 Projector cover B12 Upper wall B2, X, X', X "Projector device B20 Power supply circuit B21 Lens unit B22, X22 Case B23 Projector control board B25 Temperature sensor B25a First temperature Sensor B25b Second temperature sensor B26a Intake temperature sensor B26b Exhaust temperature sensor B27a to B27c Pulse sensor 210 Projector lens 230 Control LSI
240R, 240G, 240B LED light source 241 DMD
242 Focus mechanism 242A Rack member 242B Lead screw 242C Focus motor 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, 243Xa, 243Xc Heat sink 244A, 244B Intake fan 245 Exhaust fan 400 Sub CPU
401 SRAM
700 MCU
710 Multi-output scaler LSI
2430, 2431 Heat sink D1 to D4 Reflector E11a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
F1a projection plane (movable projection plane)
E2 Front screen drive mechanism F2 Reel screen drive mechanism MS Main control board SS Sub control board SK Scaler board RD Reel drive board DS Door relay board FC1 First optical fiber cable FC2 Second optical fiber cable DD19 Sub liquid crystal display device DD19T Touch panel 3001,3001' , 4001,4001', 5001,6001 Game machine 3100, 5100 Irradiation unit 3101, 7330 Projector cover 3200, 4200, 4200', 5200, 6200 Sub-control board 3210, 7310 Intake fan 3211, 7311 Pulse sensor 3300, 4300, 4300a , 4300b, 6300a, 6300b Projector device 3310, 4310, 4310', 6310 Projector control board 3330, 4330, 4330', 6330 Optical mechanism 3331R, 3331G, 3331B LED light source 3332 Lens unit 3333 DMD
3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d, 3341e Temperature sensor 3342a, 3342b Exhaust fan 3343a, 3343b Pulse sensor 7001 Game display device 7400 Control unit

Claims (1)

A projection device that can project images and
A gaming machine provided outside the projection device and provided with a control means for controlling the effect.
The projection device
Optical elements used to project images and
Cooling means with fans for intake or exhaust,
A temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature at a predetermined location and
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means becomes the first temperature or the second temperature higher than the first temperature, the transmitting means for transmitting the first error information which is the information indicating an abnormality to the controlling means. And with
When the control means receives the first error information when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is the second temperature, the control means responds to the first error information to the projection device.
The projection device further includes an operation stop means for executing a first stop process for stopping the operation of the optical element and the cooling means in operation in the projection device when the response to the first error information is received.
The operation stop means executes the first stop process when a predetermined time elapses without a response to the first error information from the control means after the transmission means transmits the first error information.
When the rotation speed of the fan is smaller than the predetermined rotation speed, the transmission means transmits the second error information, which is information indicating an abnormality, to the control means.
When the operation stop means receives a response to the second error information from the control means, the operation stop means executes a second stop process for stopping the operation of the optical element and the cooling means in operation in the projection device. A featured gaming machine.

Images